Aws D1.6 - 2007 PDF

& American Welding Society AWS D1.6/D1.6M:2007 An American National Standard iE EE Structural Welding Code— Stainless SteelAWS D1.6/D1.6M:2007 An American National Standard Approved by the American National Standards Institute January 4, 2007 Structural Welding Code— Stainless Steel 2nd Edition Supersedes AWS D1.6:1999 Prepared by the ‘American Welding Society (AWS) D1 Commintee on Structural Welding Under the Direction of the AWS Technical Activities Commitee Approved by the AWS Boanl of Directors Abstract ‘This code covers the requirements for welding stainless stel structural assemblies. American Welding Society 550 N.W, LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126AWS D1.103.6412007 International Standard Book Number: 978-0-87171-063-5 ‘American Welding Society 350 N.W. Leleune Road, Miami, FL 33126 © 2007 by American Welding Society All rights reserved Printed in the United Staes of America, Photocopy Rights. No portion ofthis standard may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval systema, or transmitted in any form, including mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission ofthe copyright owner. “Authorization to photocopy items for internal, personal or educational classroom use only or the internal, personal, or ‘educational classroom use only of specific clients is granted by the American Welding Society provided that the appropriate fee is paid to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA. 01923, tel: (978) 750-8400; Incernet: ‘www copyright.com>.AVIS 01.6001.6M:2007 Statement on the Use of American Welding Society Standards All sundarls odes, specifications, recommended practices, methods, classifications, and guides) of the American ‘Welding Society (AWS) ae voluntary consensus standards that have been developed in accordance with the rules of the “American National Standards Intute (ANSI), When AWS American National Standars are ether incorporated in, or mace part of, documents that are included in federal or state laws and regulations, or the regulations of other govem- ‘ental bodies, their provisions cary the full egal auhority ofthe statute. In such eases, any changes in those AWS standards must be approved by the governmental body having statutory jurisdiction before they can become a part of those laws and regulations. In all cases, these standards cary the fll legal authority of the contractor other dogument that invokes the AWS standards. Where this contractual relationship exists, changes in or deviations from requirements of an AWS standard must be by agreement between the contracting parties. ‘AWS American National Standards are developed through a consensus standards development process that brings together volanters representing varied viewpoints and interests to achieve consensus, While AWS administers the pracess and establishes rules to promote faimess in the development of consensus. it does not independently test, evaluate, or verify the accuracy of any information or the soundness of any judgements contained in ts standards, AWS disclaims lability for any injury to persons ar to property, or other damages of any nature whatsoever, whether special, indirect, consequential or compensatory, directly or indirectly resulting from the publication, use of or reliance on this standard. AWS also makes no guaranty or warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of any information published herein. {im issuing and making this standard available, AWS is neither undertaking to render professional or other services for or ‘on behalf of any person or entity, nor is AWS undertaking to perform any duty owed by any person or entity to someone else. Anyone using these documents should rely on his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice of a competent professional in determining the exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstances, ‘This standart may be superseded by the issuance of new editions. Users should ensure that they have the lates edition, Publication ofthis standard does not authorize inftingemeot of any patent or trade name. Users of tis standard accept any and all abies for infringement of any patent or trade name items. AWS diselains ability forthe infringement of any patent or product trade name resulting from the use of this standard, Finally, AWS does not monitor, police, orenforce compliance with this standard, nor does it have the power to do $0. n oocasion, text, tables, or figures are printed incorrectly, constinuting errata. Such errata, when discovered, are posted fon the AWS web page (www. aws.org). Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may only be obtained by sending a request, in writing, tothe appropriate technical committee. Such requests should be addressed to the American Welding Society, Autention: Managing Director, Technical Services Division, $50 N.W. Leleune Road, Miami, FL 33126 (see Annex K). ‘With regard to technical inquiries made concerning AWS standards, oral opinions on AWS standards may be rendered. ‘These opinions are offered solely as @ convenience to users ofthis standard, and they do not constitute professional advice. Such opinions represent only the personal opinions of the panicular individuals giving them. These individuals 4do not speak on behalf of AWS, nor do these oral opinions constitute official or unofficial opinions or interpretations of AWS. In addition, oral opinions are informal and should not be used as a substitute for an official interpretation. ‘This standacd is subject to revision at any time by the AWS Dt Committee on Structural Welding, It must be reviewed every five years, and if not revised, it must be either reaffirmed of withdrawn. Coraments (recommendations, additions, or deletions) and any pertinent data that may be of use in improving this standard are required and should be addressed to AWS Headquarters. Such comments will receive careful consideration by the AWS DI Committee on Structural Welding and the author of the comments will be informed of the Committee's response to the comments. Guests are ited to attend all meetings of the AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding to express their comments verbally. Procedures for appeal of an adverse decision conceming all such comments are provided in the Rules of Operation of the Technical Activities Comminee. A copy of these Rules can be obtained from the American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126,AWS D101 6442007 ‘This page is intentionally blank. acaen mmc sarvnd aetna en Settrtearaameeeretangu‘AWS D1.8/01.66:2007 Personnel AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding D.D. Rager, Chair D.K Miller, Ist Viee Chair A.W. Sindel, 2nd Vice Chair LL. Gayler, Secretary NJ. Altebrando E.G. Armao E.L Bickford F.C. Breismeister B.M. Butler HH. Campbell, II L.E.Collins R.B. Cobit M. V. Davis R.A. Dennis M.A. Grieco CR Hess C.W, Holmes MJ. Mayes D.L: McQuaid RD. Medio J. Meni Th D.C. Phillips JW, Post T. Schlafly D.R. Scout D.A. Shapira RE Shaw, J. RW. Stieve PJ. Sulivan MM, Tayarani KK Verma B.D. Wright Roger Consulting, Incorporated The Lincoln Electric Company Sindel and Associates American Welding Sociery STV, Incorporaied The Lincoln Electric Company Acute Technologieat Services Strocal, Incorporated Walt Disney World Company Pazuzu Engineering Teasn Industries, Incorporated Exelon Nuclear Corporation Consutant Consultant Massachuserts Highway Department High Steel Structures, Incorporated -Modjeski and Masters, Incorporated ConecoPhitiips Genesis Quality Systems American Engineering & Manufacturing, Incorporated Butler Manufacturing Company Canadian Welding Bureau Department of te Army (MHP Systems Engineering Mayes Testing Engineers, incorporated DL MeQuaid and Associates, Incorporated High Sice! Structures, Incorporated MACTEC, Incorporated ‘Minnesota Department of Transportation Hobart Brothers Company J.W. Post and Associates, Incorporated American institute of Steel Construction PSI Washingion Group International Steet Structures Technology Center, Incorporated Greenman-Pederson, Incorporated -Massachuseits Highteay Department (Retired) Massachuseits Turmpite Authority Federal Highway Administration Advantage Aviation Technologies Advisors to the D1 Committee on Structural Welding W.G. Alexander E.M. Beck (0. W. Blodgett WOAPE MACTEC, Incorporated ‘The Lincoln Electric CompanyANS 01.901 842007 Advisors to the D1 Committee on Structural Welding (Continued) GL. Fox ALR Fronduti G.3. Hill M.L, Hoitomt W.A.Milek, Je. LE Myers D.L. Sprow Consultant Rex Frond and Associates G.J, Hilt and Associates, Incorporated Hoitomt Consulting Services Consultant Consultant Consultant DIK Subcommittee on Stainless Steel Welding B.M. Butler, Coehair B.A, Shapira, Cochair W. Jaxa-Rozen, Vice Chair U.W. Aschemsier RE Avery D.K. Baird F.C. Breismeister 1H. Chambers RB, Corbit J.Grewe MJ. Harker G.1. Hill D.J. Kotecki D.R Luciani J.B. Pearson, J. A.W, Sindel B.D. Wright 0. Zollinger Walt Disney World Company ‘Washington Group International Bombardier Transportation HC Nutting Nickel Institute Bechtel National Incorporated Strocal Incorporated ‘Nelson Stud Welding Exelon Nuclear Corporation Omaha Public Power District Idaho National Laboratory GI Hill & Associares ‘The Lincoln Electric Company Canadian Welding Bureau LIK Engineering Services Sindel & Associates ‘Advantage Aviation Technologies Copeland Corporation ‘Advisors to the D1K Subcommittee on Stainless Steel Welding J.D. Duncan M. L. Hoitome ER Holby J. Merrill, Bechtel Corporation Consultant TER Engineering MACTEC, IncorporatedAWS 01.6701.6412007 Foreword ‘This foreword is not part of AWS D1.6/D1.6M:2007, Structural Welding Code—Siainless Steel, ‘but is included for informational purposes only. “This is the second edition of the AWS D1.6, Strucnural Welding Code—Stainless Steel; the first edition was published in 11999. This code is the product of a poo! of experss arriving at a consensus position, in keeping with the American National Standard Institute's requirements. This code covers the requirements for welding stainless steel components other than pressure vessels or pressure piping. For many years, fabrications involving stainless steel welding have used AWS D1.1/DI.IM, Structural Welding Code— Sieel, to provide the requirements for quality construction. However, as the AWS D1. document is writen forthe car~ bon and low alloy steels commonly encountered in structural fabrication, it does not explicitly address the unique re- guirements of the stainless steels. The AWS Structural Welding Commitice thus recognized the industry need for an AWS D1LI analogue designed for the welding of siintess steel wrougiit and eest shapes and plates. ‘The most noticeable feature of D1.6 isthe allowance of prequalified Welding Procedure Specifications (WSS) forthe austenitic stainless stels. This exemption from qualification testing is based on considerable experience with the most widely used suanless steels. from the 1999 edition. A Yertica ine in the margin next1o a figure indicates a revision from the 1999 edition. Changes to Clause 2 are not indicated in the chapter since the substantial earganization of Clause 7 makes it too difficult to idemify technical changes. ‘The following is a summary of the most significant technical revisions contained in DI 6/DJ.6M:2007: ‘Clause 1 was reorpanized to add elements found within AWS D1./D1.IM. ‘Terms specific to this code were added in 1.3 for clarity. ‘Responsibilities of parties involved in structural welding were clarified in 1.4. (Clause 2 was rewrinten to bring its des nenments into closer accord with AWS D1.1/DLLIM. “The fatigue provisions in Clause 2 were revised, ‘Provisions for filet welds and plug and slot welds were added to Table 2.1 and 2.2. ‘The provisions for fillet we les and slots in Clause 2 were revised, A comprehensive suggested filler metal char for various combinations of stainless steels and other ferrous base metals was added as an anne, ‘Now commentary for Clause 2 ws ‘Comments and suggestions for the improvement of this standard are welcome. They should be seat to the Secretary, AWS D1 Commitee on Structural Welding, American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126. (Rope Seraph a ‘etruasnews easae Sut‘AWS D1.81D1 6442007 ‘This page is imentionally blank. Eom Aretean io Ss “a‘AWS D1.601.6M:2007 Table of Contents Design of Welded Connections... ~ fa General Requitements, 2.0. Generat.. 2.2. Eccentricity of Connections. 23 Allowable Stresses Part B—Weld Lengths and Areas Part C—Miscellaneous Structural Details... 26 General. 27 Filler Plates. 28 Lap Joints. 29° ‘Transitions of Butt Joints in Nonubular Connections 2.10 Transitions in Tubular Connections. 2.11 Connections oF Splices.eron: 2.12 Built-Up Members in Statcaly Loaded Structures. nn 2.13 Noncomtinuous Beams ..e.e- 2.14 Specifie Requirements for Cyclically Loaded Sucre. 2.15 Combinations of Different Types of Welds... 2.16 Skewed T-Joims, ixAWS.01.0101.8M2007 Part B—Prequalified Processes... 33° Genera. 34 Welding Processes... 3.5 Other Welding Processes ssemnninunsnsnsmeneninvonnn Part C—~Base Metals. 3.6 Base Metals for Prequalified WPSs... 3.7 Auxiliary Component Base Metals 3.8. Base Metal for Weld Tabs and Backing .. Part D—Prequalified Filler Metals, Fluses, anel Gases 3.9 Filler Metals ns 3.10 Electrodes for SMAW.vrsnon 3.11 Electrodes and Fluxes for SAW.. 3.12 Consumables for GMAW, GTAW, and FCAW Part E—Weld Sizes for Prequalified Joints 3.13 General non 3.14 Prequalified Fillet Welds 3.15 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration (P!P) Groove Welds in Nontubular Connections 3.16 Prequalified Panal Joint Penetration (PIP) Groove Welds in Tubular Connection... 3.17 Prequalified Flare-Bevel Groove Sizes. 3.18 Prequalified Skewed Joints. 3.19 Prequalified Plug and Sloe Weld Sizes 320 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration (CIP) Groove Wels in Nontubular Connections... 3.21 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration (CIP) Groove Welds in Tubular Connections Part F_Prequalified Nontubulor Joint Details. ~ se r 3.22 Gener mn : 323 Panial Joint Penetration PIP) Groove Welds. 3.24 Complete Joint Penetration (CIP) Groove Welds... 3.25 Plug and Slot Weld 3.26 Flare-Bevel Groove Welds... Part G—Prequalified Tubular Joint Details. 3.27 Gem ne 3.28 Prequalified Joints. Part HPrequalified WPS Requirements. [329 Genet annum 3.30 Plug and Slot Welds. Quatitcation. Part A—WPS Qualification Requirements... 41 Genera 42 Essential Variables for WPS Qualification. 43. WPS Qualification Requirements. 44 Fillet Welds 43 Tests Requited for Groove and Fillet Welds 46 Types, Purposes, and Acceptance Criteria of Tests for ac BPefomance Cualifeaton Regu for Welders and Welding Opes ern 47 General 48. Limitaion of Variables for Welder Perlormance Qualification ass 49 Limitation of Variables for Welding Operator Performance Qualification 4.10 Types, Purposes, and Acceptance Criteria of Tests and Examinations for Welders and ‘Welding Operators stnAWS D1.901.64:2007 Preparation of Base Meta 53. Assembly. 5.4 Assembly Tolerances... 5.5. Distortion of Members. 5.6 Groove Weld Backing... 5.7. Tack Welds and Temporary Welds 5.8 Peening 5.9. Weld Termination... 5.10 Weld Cleaning mnmnmmn S.L1 Weld Profiles 5.12 Weld Metal Removal and Repair. 5.13 Base Metal Repairs by Welding 5.14 Mislocated Hotes. 5.15 Inaceessibility of Unacceptable Welds 5.16 Postweld Heat Treatment and Recommendations. 6. Inspection. Par A—General Requirements sstannssn 25 6.1 General non 25 6.2 Inspection Personnel Qualification se 25 6.3. Inspection and Verification of Materials 64_ Verification of Procedure Qualification Record (PQR), Welding Procedure Specification (WPS), and Performance Qualification... 6.5. Inspection and Verification of Work and Records.. vo 126, 66 Obligations of the Contraser.. 6.7 Nondestructive Testing 68 Extent of Testing. Part B—Raiographic Testing of Groove Welds in Butt Joints. 69. General 6.10 Radiographic Procedures 6.11 Accepuability of Welds 6.12 Examination, Report, and Disposition of Radiographs..usnnsn Part C—Ultasonic Testing (UT) of Groove Welds. 6.13 General 6.14 UT Operator Requirements, 6.15 UT Equipment. 616 UT Procedure... 6.17 Reference Standard. 6.18 Calibration Methods, 6.19 Scanning Patterns and Methods... 6.20 Wetd Discontinuity Characterization Method 6.21 Weld Discontinuity Sizing and Location Methods... 6.22 Interpretation Problems With Discontinuities... 6.23 Weld Classes and Amplitude Level 6.24 Acceplance Rejection Criteri 6.25 Preparation and Disposition of Reports. xiAWS D1.6701.68:2007 6627 Radiation Imaging Systems Including Real-Time Imaging. von eran Part B—Quality of WES ne 6.28 Quality of Welds—Statically Loaded. 6.29 Quality of Welds—Cyclically Loaded 2 ‘Stud Application Qualification Requirements... 77 Production Control 7.8 Fabrication and Verification Inspection Requirements. Annex A (Nonmative)—Effective Throat ...srnesssennvsrs Annex B (Normative)}—Effective Throats of Fillet Welds in Skewed T-Joints... ‘Annex D (Normative)—Manufocturers’ Stud Base Qualification Requirements ‘Annex & (Normative)—Discontinuty Acceptance Criteria. ‘Annex F(Informative)—Suggested Filler Meta for Various Combinations of Stainless Steels and Other Ferrous Base Metals Annex G (Informative)—List of Reference Documents ‘Annex H (Informative) Recommended Inspection Practice Annex | (Informative)—Nonprequalified Stainless Stcels—Guidelines for WPS Qualification and Use. Annex J (Informative)—Safe Practices... ‘Annex K (Knformasive) Guidelines forthe Preparation of Technica! Inquires Annex L (Informative})—Terms and Definitions ‘Anoex M (informative) Sample Welding Forms Annex N (Informative)—Etchant Solutions. ci ‘Annex © (Informative) Ultrasonic Unit Ceifcation cnn 253 Commentary. sen 261 Foreword. 263 Index. List of AWS Documents on Structural Welding. 267 25‘AWS D1S(D1 642007 List of Tables Table 2.1 Allowable Stresses 3.1 Prequalified Variabies to be Specified in the 32 Prequalified Austenitic Stainless Stee 33. Prequalified Filler Metal Classifications. 34 Effective Weld Sizes of Fare-Groove Welds. 3.5 Prequalified WPS Requirements. aacnnn vn 41 WPS Qualification Variable 41S Overlay Essential Variables forall Processes, 42° PQR—Type, Number of Tet Specimens, and Range of Thiokvess Qu 43° Performance Qualification—Thickness Limits and Test Specimens. 44 Performance Qualifiation—Position and Diameter Limitations... 45. F-Numbers—Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification 46 A-Numbers—Classifications of Stainless Steel Weld Metal Analysis for WPS Qualification. 47 Thicket Limitos foc Overy WPS ind Weding Operator Performance Quai 5.1 Recommended Backing Thickness... 6.1 Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (1Q1) Reguiremet 62 Wire Image Quality Indicator (1D Requirements. 63.101 Selection and Placement. 64 UT Acceptance Rejection Criteria ~ TLL Mechanical Property Requirements of Suds. 72 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Small Diameter Studs. 73 Stud Torque Values (UNC). 74 Stud Torque Values (Metric) B.1__ Equivalent Fille: Weld Leg Size Factors for Skewed T-Join... Fl Suggested Filler Metals for Various Combinations of Stainless Steel and Other Ferrous Base Me 2. Type and Chemical Composition of Stantess Steels and Other Fettous Base MetaS.sumemnneno Hl Weld Classification, oon H2 Nondestructive Testing/Examination Methods 3 Recommended Undereut Criteria.AWS D1 6101 6442007 Figure 24 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 4g 49 410 au lz 4.13(A)Tension Specimens—Reduced Section—Turned Specimens... 4.138) ald als 416 4a7 448 419 420 421 42 423 5a 52 61 62 63 List of Figures Fillet Welds on Opposite Side of a Common Plane of Contact for Cyctically Loaded Structures... Fillet Welded Lap Joint in Tubular Connections... Dovble-Fillet Welded Lap Joint. Transition of Butt Joints in Nontuibular Connections ‘Transition of Burt Joint in Tubular Connections of Unequal Thickness . ‘Weld Metal Delta Ferrite Content... ‘Details for Prequalified Fillet Welds.. Fillet Welded Prequalified Joints Prequalified PIP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular. Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joiats—Nontubular. Prequalified Joint Details for PIP Groove Welds—Tubulat ‘Weld Bead With/Depsh Limitations. . Positions of Groove Weld. Positions of Filles Welds. ‘Test Positions of Welds. ‘Location of Test Specimens on POR Plate or Pipe POR Fillet Weld Specimens Bottom Bjecting Guided-Bend Test lig... ~ Bottom Guided-Bend Test lig. - Aliematve Wrap-Around Guided-Bend Test Sig... ‘Nomogram for Selecting Minimum Bend Radius ‘Transverse Rectangular Tension Test Specimen. ‘Tension Specimens (Longitudinal)... ‘Tension Specimen for Pipe Size Greaer than 2 in. [50 mam] Nominal Diameeer Tension Speciniens—Full Seetion—Small Diameter Pipe 6 in [150 mr or8 in. [200 mm] Pipe Assembly for Performance Qualification —2G and 50 Position. 106 Plates—Longitudinal Performance Qualficatior ‘Transverse Side-Bend Specimens—Pate.. Transverse Face-Bend and Root-Bend Specimens—Platc.. ‘Transverse Face-Bend and Root-Bend Specimens—Pipe . Langitulinal Face-Bend and Root-Bend Specimens—PIate Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Specimens.. - ‘Overlay WPS and Performance Qualification... ‘Chemical Analysis Test... Performance Qualification Specimen Loca ‘Typical Weld Access Hole Geometries ‘Typical Weld Profiles. Radiographic Wentfication and Fole-Type or Wire 10! Locations on Approximately Equal ‘Thickness Joints 10 in, [250 mm} and Greater in Length eevsnsnsnsnsn Radiographic Iientification and Hole-Type or Wire 1Q! Locations on Approximately Equal ‘Thickness Joints Less Than 30 in, (250 mm] in Length.. 1d Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire 1Q] Locations on Transition Joints 10 in, 1250 mm) and Greater in Length sensnnnninsanneresneelFigure 64 AWS 01.6101 642007 Page No. Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire QI Locations on Transition Joints Less Than 10 in, (250 mm] in Length, 145; 65 Hole-Type image Quality Indicator (1QN Desa, ~ 66 Wire Image Quality Indicator. ~ ~ ~ ~ 6.7 Radiographic Edge Blocks. ~ 68 Transducer Crys. 69 Standard Reference Reflector. 6.10 Recommended Calibration Block... 6.11 ‘Typical Alternate Reflectors (Located in Weld Mock-ups and Production Welds) vn SO 6.12 Transfer Correction 150 6.13 Compression Wave Depth (Horizontal Sweep Calibration) 6.14 Compression Wave Sensitivity Calibration. 6.15 Shear Wave Distance and Sensitivity C: 6.16 Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns. 6.17 Seanning Methods 6.18 Spherical Discontinuity Characterist 6.19 Cylindrical Discontinuity Characteristics. 620 Planar Discontinuity Characteristics... 621 Discontinuity Height Dimension 6.22 Discontinuity Length Dimension... 623 Screen Marking... 624 Report of Ultrasonic Examination 7.1 Dimension and Tolecaces of Standard-Type Shear Connectors. 72 Typical Tensile Test Fixture for Stud Welds i 73. Position of Test Stud Welds ammo 166 7A Torque Testing Amangement for Stud Weld nnn “167 75 Stud Weld Bend Fixture 167 Bu Details for Skewed ‘T-oins ~ m Dal Bend Testing Device... semaenemonnsemansnne TT D2 Suggested Type of Deviee for Qualification Testing of Small Seads ssenimnann TT E.l Weld Quality Requirements for Blongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography ‘or Statically Loaded Structures. es E2 Maximum Acceptable Radiographic Images E.3 For Radiography of Joins 1-1/8 in, [30 mm) and Greater, Typical Examples of Random Accepuable Discontinutes.. E4 Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Tension Welds (Limitations of Porosity and Fusion Characteristics) ES Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Compression Welds (Limitations of ES ET LI WRC-1992 Diagram Showing Root Pass Welding of. Filler Metal 0.1 Transducer Positions (Typical). 02 Qualification BlockAWS D1.6/D1.6)42007 ‘This page is intentionally blank. xiAWS D1.6/01.6442007 Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel 1. General Provisions 1.1 Scope code covers welding requirements applicable to stainless ste! structures and weldments subject to design siress, It shall be used in conjunction with any comple- ‘mentary code of specification forthe design or construction of stainless steel structures and weldments. When this code is stipulated in contract documents, conform ‘ance with all provisions of the code shall be req ‘except for those provisions thatthe Engineer (Gee 4.1) ‘oC contract documents specifically modify or exempt, ‘This code is not intended to be used for pressure vessels ‘or pressure piping, 1.2 Base Metals ‘The base metals to be welded under this code shall be stainless steels with the following chemical composition limits: (1) Carbon (C) content equal o or less than 0.5% @) Chromium (C2) content equal to or greater than 105% (3) Iron (Fe) content exceeding the content of any other single element (4) Any combination of the types in 12.2 or with weldable carbon steels or low alloy steels. Free machine {ng steels and steels with intentional additions of sulfur S), selenium (Se), or lead (Pb) shall not be welled, 12.2 Stainless steel base metals may include any of the Following types: (1) Austenitic 2) Ferritie G) Marensitie (4) Precipitation Hardening (austenitic semv-austenitic, and martensitic) (6) Duplex 1.2.3 Base metals may be used in assemblies, the parts of ‘which may be composed of: 1) The same grade of stainless steel, 2) Differem grades of stainless steels belonging to the same type as listed above, {3)_ Different types of stainless steels, weldablecatbon stels of low alloy gels, See Annes F ‘stainless steels and other ferrous base metals. £24 The sales see! base metals may be in any ofthe following forms: (1) Sheet—cold rolled (2) Sheet, plate—hot rolled @) Shapes (4) Tubular products (5) Clad materials. (6) Castings © Forgings 1.2.5 Stainless steels are generally defined by American iron and Steel Instiute (AISI) Numbers, Unified Num- bering System (UNS), and by American Sosiety for ‘Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specifications for prod- ‘uct form, chemical composition, and mechanical properties. Newer proprietary steels may not be covered by ‘standards and shall be identified by chemical composition or other suitable means which clearly define the steel. 12.6 Specified Base Metal, The contract documents ‘shall designate the specifications and grades of base metal to be used. The provisions of this code are not intended to apply to welding base mevals dinner than 1/16 in, [1.5 mm} or 16. Foteroteressetee elds eagleCLAUSE 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.7 Service Temperature Limits. The coniact documents Shall specify service temperature Jimits for dhe weldment, 1.288 Base Metal Prequalification, Austenitic stainless steels whose filler metals normally produce small amount of ferrite (see Table 3.2 for prequalified limits) shall be considered prequalified, provided they are welded with filler metals in accordance with Table 33 and the \WPSs used conform to all the applicable requtements of this code. All other stainless steels or combinations, and WPSs which are not prequalified, shall be qualified in conformance to this code. Suggested filler metals to weld ‘number of stainless stols are shown in Annex F 1.2.9 Use of Unlisted Base Metals, When stainless steel other than one of those listed in Table 3.2 is proposed for welded construction under this code, WPSs shall be established by qualification in accordance with, the requirements of Clause 4, except as permitted in 1.2.9.1. The contractor shall have the responsibilty for establishing the WPS by qualification, 12.9.1 An unlisted base metal which has the same chemical composition and strength a a listed steel may bbe welded with a prequalified or qualified WPS for the listed steel. 1.2.9.2 The Engineer may prescribe additional weldability testing of the unlisted steel. The responsibility for determining weldability is assigned to the party who either specifies a materia not listed in Table 3.2, except as permitted by 1.2.9.1, or who proposes the use of a substitute matecial not listed in Table 3.2. 1.3 Terms and Definitions ‘The welding terms used in this code shall be interpreted in conformange withthe defintions glen in AWS ABOROO1, Siondand Weldng Tems and Défiitions suppmented by Annex Lofts code, Definitions, hich follow, shall also nol 1.3.1 Authority Having Jurisdiction, The organization, political subdivision, office or individual charged with the administration and enforcement of this standard, 1.32 Drawings. Plans, design and detail drawings, and erection plans. 1.3.3 Engineer. The duly designated individual who acts for, aid in behalf of, the Owner on all matters within the scope of the code, 13.4 Contractor. Any company, of that individual representing & company, responsible for the fabrication, erection, manufacturing, or welding, in conformance ‘with the provisions of this code. ‘AWS 01.6)D1.6M:2007 1.3.5 Inspectors 1.3.5.1 Contractor's Inspector. The duly designated ‘who acts for, and in behalf of, tie Contractor on all inspection and quality matters within the scope of the 1.3.5.2 Verification Inspector. The duly designated ‘person who acts for, and in behalf of, the Owner or Engi- neer on all inspection and quality matters specified by the Engineer, 13.5.3 Inspector. When the term “Inspector” is used without further_qualifieatic tor ‘category described above, it applies equally te the Can: tracior’s Inspector and the Verification Inspector within ‘the mits of responsibilty described in 6.1.2, 41.3.6 OEM (Ori nent Manu single Contractor that assumes some oral ofthe respon sibilities assigned by this code to the Engineer. 43.7 Owner. The individual or company that exercises legal ownership of the produet or structural assembl roduced under this cove, “Shall.” “Should.” and “Mav.” “Shall” “should.” and_“may" have the following Significance: 1.3.8.1 Shall, Code provisions that use “shall” are mandatory unless specifically modified in contact documents by the Engineer, 1.3.82 Should, “should” ig used to recom: requirements, 138.3 May. The word “may” in provision allows the ute of optional procedures oF practices chat can be sed as an alemative or supplement to code requte- tment, Those optional procedies that requir the Engi neer’s approval shall either be specified in the contact Conmnctor may use any option without the Engineer's approval when the code does not specify dat the Engic 1.4 Responsibilities 1.4.1 Engineet’s Responsibilities. The Engincer shall be responsible for the development ofthe contract documents that govern products or structural assemblies pro- ‘duced under this code. The Engineer may add to, delete from, or otherwise modify, the requirements ofthis code {0 meet the particular requirements of a specific strue- ture. If atternate requirements are proposed by other par ies such as the Contractor, the Engineer may approve 2‘AWS D1.6701.6M:2007 them based on provided documentation, Altemate requirements shall be hased upon evaluation of suitability for service using past experience, experimental evi- defce or engineering analysis considering material type, service load effects. and environmental factors. All ‘requirements that modify this code shall be incorporated contract documents. The Engineer shall determine the suitability of all joint details to be used in a wetded assembly. ‘The Engineer shall specify in contract documents, as necessary, and 28 applicable, the following: 0) Optional requirements that are applicable only ‘when specified by the Engineer, (2) All aduitional NDT that is not specifically addressed in the code, @) Verification inspection, when required by the Enginess, 4) Weld acceptance criteria other than that specified in Clause 6. G)CVN toughness criteria for weld metal, base metal, andor HAZ, (6) Tests for corrosion, carbide sensitization, ereep, to, Slandards for test methods and acceptance criteria shall be specified in the contract documents, (7) Whether the structure is statically or cyclically leaded. (8) All additional requirements that are not specifi cally addressed in the code, (9) For OEM applications, the responsibilities of the patties involved. 2 bilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing WPSs, qualification ‘of welding personnel, the Contractor's inspection, and performing work in conformance with the requirements ‘of this code and contract documents. The Contractor may, ssubmil 10 the Engineer requests to modify the require: ‘ments of this feasibility and quali 1.433 Inspector’s Responsibilities 143.1 Contractor Inspection. Contractor inspection shall be supplied by the Contractor and shall be performed as necessary to ensure that materials and work ‘Manship mect the requirements ofthe comtact documents, ‘of a specific sructure, established bewween the Engineer and che Verification Inspector, inret showin pan mes tae 5 (CLAUSE 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.5 Approval All references to the need for approval shall be intere ‘preted (0 mean approval by the Building Commissioner or the Engineer, 1.6 Welding Symbols Welding symbols shall be those shown in the latest edi ion of AWS A2.4.98, Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. Special conditions shall be fully explained by added notes or details, 17 fety Precautions This technical document does not address all welding dnd Realth hazards. However. pertinent information can be found in the following documents: 1, ANSI.ZA9,1:2005, Safery in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes 2. Manufacturer's safety titerarure on equipment and materials 3. Other pertinent documents as appropriate, These documents shall be referred to and followed as iequired (also see Annes I, Safe Practices) ‘Note: This code may imolve hazardous material, opera: tions and equipment The code does not purport 10 caress all of the safeey problems associaued with its use Its the responsiblity ofthe user to enablish appropriate ‘safety and heelth practices, The user should detenine he licability of anv regulatory limitations oriar to use 1.8 Standard Units of Measurement This standard makes use of both U.S. Customary Units, 4nd the International System of Unis (SD, The measure. tents may not be exact equivalents: therefore, each sv5- tem shall be used independently of the other without combining inany way, The standard withthe designation ignation D1.6M:2007 uses SI Units. The latter are.shown, within brackets [] oF in appropriate columns in tables ‘and figures, 1.9 Reference Documents Annex G contains a list of all documents referenced ‘within this code, 3AWS D7.6/01.64:2007 ‘This page is imentonally blank. ~ - 4‘AWS D10D1.5M2007 2. Design of Welded Connections PartA General Requirements 2.0 General Stainless stel welded connections shall be designed to meet the loading requirements. However, in order to ‘ensure chat the resultant design is fit forthe imcended pur pose, the Engineer shall also consider other factors (see also 14.1): (1) Corrosion. Necessary design adjustments shall be sade, such as appropriate selection of base and filer metals and application of seal welds. @) Elevated Temperawre, For elevated service tem- perarures, a decrease in short-term and creep strengths of, base and filler metals shall be considered. G) Heat Treament. Whece necessary, heat treatment shall be prescribed. (@) Dissioifer Connections. The Engineer shall not design welded connections of an austenitic stainless steel member to a ferrtic stainless steel, martensitic stainless steel or a earbon/ow alloy steel member without due ‘consideration of a judicious choice of filler metal based ‘on metallurgical criteria. (3) Other factors not mentioned herein, which could adversely affect the welded connection shall be taken Snta account. 2.1 Contract Plans and Specifications 2.1. Plau and Drawing Information, Complete infor- ‘ation regarding base metal specification designation, location, type. size, and extent of all welds shall be clearly shown on the, contract plans and specifications, hereinafter refered to as the contract documents. If the Engineer requires specific welds to be performed in the field, they shall be designated in the comraet documents. ‘The fabrication and erection drawings, hereinafter referred to. the shop drawings, shall clearly distinguish between shop’and field welds, 2.12 Notch Toughness Requirements. If notch toughness of welded joints is required, the Engincer shall specify the minimum absorbed energy with the corresponding test temperature for the filler metal classification to be used, or the Engineer shall specify that the WPSs be ‘qualified with CVN tests. IF WPSs with CVN tests are required, the Engineer shall specify the minimum absorbed energy, the test temperature and whether the required CVN test performance is to be in the weld ‘meial, or both in the weld metal and the HAZ. 2.1.3 Specific Welding Requirements. The Engineer, in the contract documents, and the Contractor, in the shop drawings, shall indicate those joints or groups of joints for which the Engineer or Contractor require a specific assembly order, welding sequence, welding technique or other special precautions. 2.L.4 Weld Size and Length. Contract design drawings shall specify the effective weld length and, for PIP groove welds, the required weld size “(E).” For fillet ‘welds and skewed joints, the following shail be provided on the contract documents. (1) For fillet welds berween parts with surfaces ‘meeting at an angle between 80° and 100°, contraet doo- ‘uments shall specify the fillet weld leg size. @) For welds between parts with the surfaces meeting, at an angle less than 80° or greater than 100%, the con- ‘tract documents shall specify the effective throar. ‘End returns and hold-backs for filet welds, if required by design, shall he indicated on the contract documents. 2.1.5 Shop Drawing Requirements. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate by welding symbols or sketches the details of groove welded joints and the preparation of 5CLAUSE 2, DESIGN OF WELDED CONNEGTIONS base metal required to make them. Both width and thickness of steel backing shall be detailed. 2.15.1 PJP Groove Welds. Shop drawings shall indicate the weld groove depths “S" needed to atain wold size "(E)" required for the welding process and position of welding tobe used. 2.1.5.2 Fillet Welds and Welds in Skewed T-Joints. ‘The following shall be provided on the shop drawings: (1) For fillet welds between parts with surfaces ‘meeting at an angle between 80° and 100°, shop drawings shall show the filet weld leg size, (2) For welds between parts with surfaces meeting at ‘an angle less than 80° or greater than 100%, the shop ‘drawings shall show the detailed arrangement of welds and required leg size to account for effects of joint geom- cexry and, where appropriate, the Z-loss reduction for the ‘process fo be used and the angle, (3) End retums and hold-backs. 21.53 Symbols. The contact documents shall show complete joint penetration (CP) or partial joint penetra tion (PIP) groove weld requirements. Contract documents do not need to show groove type or groove be made for either the stan or end ofthe weld. (2) Curved Welds. The effective length of a curved ‘lot weld shall be measured along the centerline ofthe effective throat. If the effective area of a fillet weld in a hole or slot calculated from this lengths greater than the axa calculated from 2.5.4, then this later area shall be used as the effective area of the filet weld. @) Minimum Length, The minimum effective length of a fillet weld shall be at least four times the nominal, size, or the effective size of the weld shall be considered, nat to exceed 25% of is effective length. ‘The minimum length of an internitent filet weld seg- sent shall be 1-1/2 in, [40 mina] unfess otherwise shown, ‘on approved design drawings. 243 Length and Spacing of Longitudinal Filet ‘Welds. If longitudinal filet welds are used alone in lap Joint end connections, the length ofeach fillet weld shall 7‘CLAUSE 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. be no less than the perpendicular distance between the welds. The transverse spacing of longitudinal fillet welds used in end connection shall not exceed 8 i, [200 mm, unless end cransverse welds or intermediate plug or slot welds are used. The longitudinal fillet weld may be cither atthe edges of the member or inthe stos. 2.44 Fillet Welds Weld Terminations 2441 Unless otherwise specified in this code oF ‘ther contract documents, illet welds connecting attachments need not start nor tminate less than the weld size {rom the end ofthe join. 24.42 Boxing. Fillet welds stressed by forces not paraliel ro the faying surface shall not terminate at corners of parts or members, except as required in 2.4.4.3, but shall be returned continuously, full size, around the corer for a length equal to twice the weld size where such return can be made in the same plane. Boxing shall bbe indicated on design and detail drawings where required. 24.43 Opposite Sides of the Common Plaue. For cyclically loaded structures. filet welds deposited on the ‘opposite sides of a common plane of contact between ‘90 pats shall be interrupted at a comer common to both, welds (see Figure 2.1) 2.4.8 Fillet Welds in Holes or Slots 24.5 Fillet welds in holes or slots in lp joints may ‘be used to transfer shear or to prevent buckling or separation of lapped pars, Fillet weds in hoes or sls are not to be consigered as plug or sot welds. 2.4.5.2 Sizes of holes and slots in which fillet welds are to be deposited shall be large enough to ensure that the fillet welds do not overlap, and the base metal at the fillet weld toes is visible. Should the filet welds in holes or slots overlap, the ‘welds shall be considered as partially filled plug or slot welds (see 2.5). 24,53 Slot Ends, Except for those ends which extend (0 the edge of the part, the ends of the sits in. which fillet welds are to be deposited shall be semicircular or shall have the comers rounded to a radius not Jess than the thickness ofthe part in which itis made. 2.5 Plug and Slot Welds 2.5.1 Plug Weld Spacing, The minimum center-o- center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diameter ofthe hole, PARTS BC AWS D1,601.8M2007 2.5.2 Slot Weld Spacing. The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length shall be four times the width ofthe slot. The minimum center- to-center spacing in a fongitudinal direction on any line shall be two times the length ofthe slot. 2.83 Plug Weld Sizes. The minimum diameter of the hole in which a plug weld is to be deposited shall be the thickness of the part in which itis made plus S/16 in, [8 mm). The maximum diameter of the hole shall be che ‘minimum dismeter pus 1/8 in, (3 mim] or 2-1/4 times the thickness ofthe part, whichever is greater 254 Slot Weld Sizes and Sbape. The minimum width ‘of slot in which a slot weld isto be deposited shall be the thickness of the part in which it is made plus 5/16 in. [8 mn] or 2-2 times the thickness of the member, Whichever is smaller. The maximum width of the slot shall be the minimum width plus 1/8 in, [3 mm] or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the pare, whichever is greater, The ends ofthe slot shall be semicircular. 2.35 Plug and Slot Weld Effective Areas. The effective area shall be the nominal area of the hole or slot in the plane ofthe faying surface. 286 Depth of Filing of Plug and Slot Welds. The depth of filling of plug or slot welds in metal 5/8 in, [46 mm] thick or less shall be equal tothe thickness of the material. In metal over 5/8 in. [16 roma thick, it shall be at least one-half the thickness of the material, but no less than 5/8 in, (16 ram}. The Engineer may specify an altemative limit of depth of filling. Part C Miscellaneous Structural Details 2.6 General These provisions define requirements, limitations and prohibitions for typical welded structurat details, such os filler plates, lap joints, transitions, connections or spices, stiffeners, built-up members/shapes for statically loaded structures, plog and slot dimensions, specific require- iments for cyclicatly loaded structures, and weld combinations, Details shall promote ductile behavior, minimize restraint, avoid undue concentation of welding, and. afford ample access for depositing the weld meta 2.7 Filler Plates 2.7.1 Filler Plate Usage. Fillers plates may be used in: (©) Splicing pat of different thicknesses. @) Connections thet, due to existing geometric align- ‘ment, must accommodate offsets to permit simple framing. 8AWS D1.8/D1.642007 2.7.2 Filler Plates Less Than 1/4 in, [6 mm}. Any filler plate fess than 1/4 in. [6 mm) thick shall not be used 10 fransfer stress, but shall be Kept flush with the welded edges of the stress-carring part. The sizes of welds along such edges shall be increased over the required sizes by an amount equal to the thickness of the filler pit 2.73 Willer Plates V4 in, (6 mm] and Larger. Any filler plate 1/6 in, [6 mra] or more in thickness shall be ‘capable of transferring the stress and shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate or connection material. It shall be welded to the part on which itis fitted, and the Joint shall be of sufficient strength to tansmit the splice plate or connection material stress applied at the surface of the filler plate as an eccentric load, The welds joining the splice plate or connection material to the filler pate shall be sufficient to transmit che splice plate or connec tion material stress and shall be long enough to avoid overstressing tl filler plate along the toe ofthe weld. 2.7.4 Filler Plates Used for Dissimilar Thickness Con- nections. Fot assemblies, in which the thickness is tess ‘han 1/4 in, [6 mm], the Engineer may specify a limit of filler plate thickness less than 1/4 in, [6 mim] as deter rined in 2.7.2 and 2.7.3, In no case, however, shall the thickness of filler plate used as per 2.7.3 be less than the thickness of the thinner of the connected parts. 2.8 Lap Joints 28.1 Minimum Overtap. The minimum overlap of ‘part in stesscarrying lap joins shall be five times the Ahickness ofthe thinner par joined but not les than Tin. {25 min} (se Figures 2.2 and 2.3). 2.8.2 Double Fillet Welded. Lap joins in parts carying axial stess shall be doubie-illet welded (see Figure 2.3) ‘except where deflection of the joint is sufficiently restrained fo prevent it from opening under load. 2.8.3 Double Plug or Stot Welds. Unless lavral defles- tion ofthe part is prevented, they are to be connected by at least cwo transverse lines of plug or slot welds, or by ‘two or more longitudinal slot welds. 2.9 Transitions of Butt Joints in Nontubular Connections Butt joints between axially aligned members of different thicknesses or widths, or both, and subject to tensile stress greater than one-thitd the allowable design tensile stress oF 10 farigue Toads, shall have appropriate ransi- tion of thickness as per 2.9.1 and of widdh as per 2.9.2. paar: CLAUSE 2, DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. 2.9.1 Transition of Thicknesses The slope in the transition of thickness shall not exceed Lin 2-1/2 with the surface of either part (see Figure 2.4), The transition shal] be accomplished by chamfering the thicker part, sloping the weld metal, or by any combination ofthese, 2.9.2 Transition of Width. Pants having different widths shall have a smooth transition between offset edges at a slope of no more than I in 2-1/2 with the edge of either pat oF shall be transitioned with a 2 ft {600 anim] mini- mur radius tangent to the narrower part ofthe center of the but joins, 2.10 Transitions in Tubular Connections 2.10.1 St2e Transition. Flared connections and tube size transitions not excepted below shall be checked for local stresses caused by the change in direction [angle (at the transition. Exceptions: Circular tubes having Dit less than 30, box sections having a/t less tban 20, and wansi- tion slopes for circular tubes and box seetions less than Ving 2.10.2 Transition of Thicknesses. Tension butt joints in axially aligned primary members of different material thicknesses or size shall be made in such a manner that the slope through the transition zone does not exceed 1 in 2-1/2. The transition shall be accomplished by chamtfer- ing the thicker par, sloping the weld metal, or by any combination of these methods (see Figure 2.5). 2.11 Connections or Splices 2.11.1 Tension or Compression Members. Connec- tions or splices of tension or compression members made by groove welds shall have CIP welds, except as specified in 2.11.2. Connections or splices made with fillet or plug welds, except as noted in 2.11.2, shall be designed for an average of the calculated suess and the strength of the member, but not less chan 75% of the strength of the member; or if there is repeated application of load, the ‘maximum stress or stress range in such connection or splice shall not exceed the fatigue stress permitted by the applicable contract specification. 2.11.2 Compression Members with Milled Joints. If ‘members subject to compression only are spliced and full milled bearing is provided, the splice material and is ‘welding shall be arranged. uness otherwise stipulated by the applicable general specifications, to hold all parts in alignment and shall be proportioned to cary 50% of the ‘computed stress in the member. Where such members 9CLAUSE 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS: are ia full-iled bearing on base pats, thee shall be sufficient welding to old all parts securely in place. 2.11.3 Splices in Girders and Beams 2.11,3.1 Splices between sections of rolled beams or built-up girders shall preferably be made in a single transverse plane. Shop splices of webs and flanges in buiteup girders, made before the webs and flanges are joined to each other, may be fovated in a single transverse plane or multiple transverse planes, but the fatigue stress provisions of the contract specification shall apply. 2.13.2 Girders (built-up I sections) shall preferably be made with one plate in each flange, i., without cover plates, The unsupported projection ofa flange stall be no ‘more than permitted by the applicable contract specification, The thickness and width of a flange may be varied by burt joint weiding parts of different thickness or width With ransitions conforming to the requirements of 2.9. 2.12 Built-Up Members in Statically Loaded Structures 242.1 Minimum Required Weldiag. 1F two or more plates or rolled shapes are used to build up a member, sufficient welding (Bilt, phig, or slot type) shall be provided to make the parts act in unison but not less than that which may be required to transmit the calculated stress between the parts joined. 2.2.1.4 Maximum Longitudinal Spacing of Inter- mittent Welds. The maximum longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds connecting two or more rolled shapes, or a shape and a plate, in contact with one another shall not exceed 24 in. [600 mon, 2.12.12 Longitudinal Spacing in Bull-Up Teasion od Compression Members. In builup tension aod fompression members the onginialsectg of ine intent welds connecing plate component to oer omponens or connecting two plate comments 0 cach ‘other, shall not exceed 12 in. [300 mm] or 24 times the bikes ofthe thine late. 2.12.2 Intermittent or Partial Length Groove Welds. Intermittent or partial length groove welds are not per- ‘ited except as specified in 2.123, 2.12.3 Groove Welds in Elements Connected by Fillet ‘Welds. Members built-up of elements connected by fillet welds, at points of localized load application, may have length to participate inthe trans- load. The groove weld shall extend at uniform size for at leas the length cequted (0 transfer ‘he load. Beyond this length, the groove shall be tans tioned in depth o zero overa distance, not less than four are AWS D1.6/D1.6M:2007 times its depth. The groove shall be filled flush before the application ofthe fillet weld. 2.13 Noncontinuous Beams ‘The connections at the ends of noncontinuous beams shall be designed with flexibility so as to avoid excessive secondary stresses due 10 bending. Seated connections ‘witha flexible or guiding device 1 prevent end twisting are recommended. 2.14 Specific Requirements for Cyclically Loaded Structures 2.14.1 Connections of Components of Built-Up Mem- bers. When a meméer is bult up of evo or more pieces, ‘the pieces shall be connected along their longitudinal Joins by sufficient continuous welds to make the pieees ‘actin unison 2.14.2 When the offset between surfaces at either side of the joint is greater than the thickness of the thinner part connected, the transition of thicknesses (sce Figure 2.4) subject to shear or compressive stress shall be made as specified in 2.9.1. When the offset is equal to or less than the thickness of the thinner part connected, the face of the weld shall be sloped no more than 1 in 2-1/2 from the surface of the thinner part of shall be stoped to the surface of the thicker parc if this requires a lesser slope with the following exception: Truss member joints and beam and gitder flange joints shall be made with smooth tran- ions ofthe type specified in 2.9.1 2.14.3 Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds 2.414.3.1 In butt joints, PIP welds subject to tension normal fo their longitudinal axis are prohibited In other Joims, transversely loaded PJP welds are prohibited, unless fatigue design criteria allow for their application, 2.14.32 SMAW and SAW CIP groove welds, made from one side only, are prohibited, if the welds are made: (2) Without any backing. o (2) With backing, other than stainless steel, chat has not been qualified in accordance with Ctause 4, ‘These prohibitions do not eppty to: (() Secondary or nonstress carrying members and shoes or other nanstressed appurtenances, of, (2) Comer joints parallel to the direction of computed stress, between components for built-up members designed primarily for axial smess, 0AWS D1 8/01.6N:2007 2.14.3.3 Intermittent groove welds ate prohibited. 2.14.34 Intermittent fillet wetds are prohibited. 2.14.35 Pug and slot welds 6n primary tension men- bers are proibited 2,15 Combinations of Different Types of Welds If two oF more welds of different type (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are combined to share the load ina single connection, the capacity of the connection shall be caleu- lated a5 the sum of the individual welds determined relative othe direction of applied load, This method of paar CLAUSE 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. adding individual capacities of welds does not apply 10 fillet welds reinforcing PIP groove welds (see Annex A). 2.16 Skewed T-Joints (sce Annex B, Figure B.1) ‘Skewed T-joints which have angles between miembers less than 60° shall be qualified in accordance with Clause 4 to determine effective weld size, Welds in these types of joints should be considered PIP groove welds. Z-loss values for stainless steels have not been determined: therefore, the requirements of 2.16 are necessary in order to find the achievable weld size for given set of proce- dual conditions, u Spat igre et NOARDSR TarCLAUSE 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. AWS D1.6101.64:2007 Table 2.1 Allowable Stresses (see 2.3.2) Suess in Weld “Allowable Suesst-=* CIP Groove Welds ‘Tension normal wo the effetive area ‘The letser of values for base metal or filler met Compression normal to te effective area “The lesser of values For base metal ot filler etl ‘Tension or compression parallel tothe axis ofthe weld ‘Sune as for base metal ‘Sharon the effective area 0.30% nominal tensile strength of filler metal. except shess stress on hase meta shall not exceed 0.40 x yield strength of base metal PAP Groove Welds ‘Tension normal othe effective area (0.30 x nominal tesile stength of filler metal, except tensile stress on base metal shall not exceed 0.60 x yield strength of base etal Compression nonmal othe —_‘Hoint not designed bear 0.5 «nominal tensile strength of weld metal, except compression effective aea stress on adjacent base metal shall aot exceed 0.60 x yield strength of base metal Joint designed to bear ‘The lesser of values for base meta o filler rasta “Tension or compression parallel to the ais of the weld Same a fr base metal ‘Shear parallel to the axis of the weld (0.30 x nominal tensile strength of ter metal, except shear stress ‘om base meal shal no exceed 0.40 x yield strength of base metal Filer Welds ‘Shear on effective area of weld (0.30 x nominal tensile strength af filler meta, excep! shear siest ‘ombase metal shal not exceed 0.40 x yield strength of base metal ‘Tension ov compression paras! othe axis of the weld ‘Same as for base metal : Plug and Stor Welds ‘Shear paraiel 1 the faying surface on the effective area (0.30 > noxninal tensile strength of filler metal, except shea: stress i ‘omhase metal shal nt exceed 0.40 x yield strength of base metal "The streogt fhe various types of als tas indicated in Tob 1.2 begins derease at mperates over 2D (90), The Enginoar should consl soeagt da that indents he allowable surest srvieteriperatres grater than 2007 [IHC] « gy ASME Section (Part D. "In core erbon sels, where filer met is eleced onthe bag of te Sueagl, nanos ele he elecbon of ileal ir redomizanly Sad on ape clra. Ts mayled ovrmah tute cnn eid ar ese seat which al be aes imo acco by Baines « Nonizal tne sength of filer metals for ssinfess sel shaD be detecting follows (1D for covered electrodes, nomial tense sven shall be tat eqused b AWS ASS/AS 9M2006, (2) for ox covetiller etal nome! ese sree shal etal rind n AWS AS2299R, (@) for solid and eet cared ler metals, nomisal ease sengi sl be that required in AWS AS /AS.4M4:2005 for covered electrodes of comsponting composition of weld eal, or fi sh we covered AWS ASAUASAM200 AWS ASWASSM206, A322 mone seg al sesed by Bape, * Yield Suengih of filler metals for sites sels wot specified in pringat AWS AS specifications, For design based on veld eerie, Bagncer sal ae el stress value fr flr mal sseeed,AWS D1 61D1.6M2007 CLAUSE 2, DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. DONOT TE WELDS 0 NOT TIE WELDS ‘TOGETHER HERE ‘TOGETHER HERE. Figure 2.1—Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of a Common Plane of Contact for Cyclically Loaded Structures (see 2.4.4.3) 54 MIN (NOT LESS THAN 1 In.(25 mm) y= THICKNESS OF THE ‘THINNER TUBULAR SECTION Note: 1 = 20 08 requirod Figure 2.2—Fillet Welded Lap Joint in Tubular Connections (see 2.8.1) ie si, x Ly (NOT LESS THAN 1 In. £25 emp) Note: t= thicket member. t= thinnar member. ‘Figure 2.3—Double-Fillet Welded Lap Joint (see 2.8.2) BCLAUSE 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. [AWS D1.6°D1.6N2007 (A)TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE REMOVE APTEAWELOING. 25 ro REMOVE oo AFTER WELOING (®) TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE AND HAMPERING CHAMFER CHAMFER 6EFORE WELOING BEFORE WELDING oN 3 > =“ ; 4 om CHAMFER ‘BEFORE WELDING (C) TRANSITION BY CHAMFERING THICKER PART Figure 2.4—Transition of Butt Joints in Nontubular Connections of Unequal Thickness (see 2.9.1) 14 meansl WELDED FROMTWO SIDES WELDED FROM ONE SIDE CENTERLINE ALIGNMENT OFFSET AUGNMENT Socere Tt > ee CONSTANT ID PREFERRED- RADI BEFORE TAPER WELD IS REQUIRED ® resi ar yma oy opaawen since = Fewove newove i fermen _eigtones a =~ (C) TRANSITION BY TAPER WELD ‘00 oF TUBE ‘oD or Tube a A remove eB on an U2 in, (12 rum} (@) MANSON BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE AND CHAMFERING ——swacune. ano, of mermuns tuxchine BEFORE CUT SMOOTH BEFORE WELDING 2-5 WELDING: (O} TRANSITION BY TAPER BORE (€) TRANSITION BY STRAIGHT AND cunmren cuauren ‘OF WHCKER TUBE TAPER BORE AT THICKER TUBS geroneweiowe = BproRe Natoma as tT "O —— ia eee EF eLDING (CONSTANT 1D SE (CyTHANSTTION BY CHAMFERING THEKER PART (ry mANSTION BY TAPER OD OF THICKER TUBE Noes: 1, Groove may ba of any allowed or qualfod type an otal 2 Tansllon dopes shomn are tho maximum allowed. 3 Im(@), (0) and (E) groove may bo any alowed oF quatiied type and deta, Tanai slopes shown are maximum alowed Figure 2.5—Transition of Butt Joints in Tubular Connections of Unequal Thickness (see 2.10.2) Jocens 14910 Sy SNOWOANNOD GROTAM 40 NaIsEOz BENDAWS D1.9/01.6M2007 ‘This page is imentionally blank. 6 a[REIS D1.6/01.64:2007 3. Prequalification 3.0 Scope ‘The provisions of this clause cover the requirements for the use of prequalified WPSs. WPSs that conform to this, cclatise, or to standardized WPSs of AWS B2.1:2005, Stan- dard for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifca- ton, shall be exempt from qualification. Prequalification covers weldments in thicknesses of 1/16 in. [2 mm] oF 16 gage and greater, designed for supporting mectanical loads undee normal atmospheric corrosion conditions, or under conditions of comparable severity im a temperature range of -100°F to +800°F [~75°C to +430°C). It applies ‘only to nominally austenitic stainless steel base metals and filler metals whose as-welded fusion zoncs normally contain a small amouat of delta fervite (see 3.25) Filler metals used for prequalified WPSs shall equal or exceed the corresponding minimum specified base metal stength and ‘provide resisance to normal atmospheric corrsioa. Atrno- spheric exposure may not require stainless stel: however, some industial and sea coast environments may require additional corrosion raitigation which is not anticipated in this section or code. For corrosion conditions significantly more severe than normal atmospheric exposure, the Engi- neer shall determine appropriate base and filer metals. Prequalification may still be applicable if the selected materials are listed ia Tables 3.2 and 3.3 and as permitted by 1.23.1, Any other materials shall be qualified per the _Fequirements of Clase 4, Note:The use of prequalified joint ora prequalified WPS is | ot izended asa substinue for engineering judgment ix the stability of application wo a welded assembly or connection i Part A General Requirements 3.1 Limitation of Variables for Prequalified WPSs All prequalified WPSs 10 be used shall be prepared, approved, and controlled by the manufacturer, fabricator, ‘ot contractor as written prequalified WPSS, and shall be available to those authorized to use or examine them. ‘The written WPSs shal specify the welding variables for each process. The welding variables set forth in (1) through (7) of this subclause shall be specified on the writen WPSs within the limitation of variables prescribed in Table 3.1 for each applicable process. For an ‘example of a WPS, see Annex M, Changes in these variables, beyond those specified on the writen WPS, shall ‘be considered essential changes, and shall require a new ‘or revised prequalified written WPS, or possibly « WPS qualification. (1) Amperage (wite feed speed) (2) Voltage (3) Travel speed (4) Shielding gas composition and flow rate (5) Position of welding (6) SAW flux trade designation (D) Welding filler metal classification(s) and size(s), 3.2 Combination of WPSs A combination of qualified and prequalified WPSs may bbe used without a new qualification, provided the limitation of essential variables applicable to each process is observed. Part B Prequalified Processes 3.3 General “The following fabrication processes have prequalified starus| and do not require testing to demonstrate applicability. ”CLAUSE 5, PREQUALIFICATION However, WPSs using these processes which do not conform to the requirements of Clause 3 shall be ual fied in conformance with Clause 4, See Annex B for non- fied stainless steel qualification guidelines. 3.4 Welding Processes ‘34.1 Prequalified Welding Processes. Shielded metal are welding (SMAW), ges metal are welding (GMAW), ‘gos tungsten are welding (GTAW) (including autogenous GTAW), and flux cored arc welding (FCAW) \WPSs which conform to the provisions of Clause 3, Parts C.D. EF, G, and H. may be used for prequalified WPSs, and therefore approved for usc without WPS ‘qualification tests (see limitations of Table 3.5). 342 Submerged Arc Welding (GAW). Fluxes for SAW of stainless steels are not presently classified by AWS, Accordingly, fluxes cannot be prequalified by their classification. However, SAW with a flux of a particular trade designation and a specific wire classification shall be considered prequalified for welding prequalified ‘base metals (see 3.6) under the following conditions: (1) Test welds are made under production conditions ‘or are actual production welds, and (2) Test welds are made with that classification of filer metal, and flux of te paticular ade designation, and (G) Test welds exhibit at least a 4.0 Ferrite Number GFN) along the top centerline of the weld bead, and a strength (see Table 3.3) not less than corresponding base ‘metal, Measurements ofthe FN shall be made with an instrument calibrated according to the latest edition of AWS A4.2M:2006, Standard Procedures for Catibrat- ing Magnetic Instruments to Measure the Delta Ferrite Content of Austenitic and Duplex Austentic-Ferriic Stainless Steel Weld Meral Otherwise, SAW with a particular filer metal and flux shall be qualified as prescribed in Clause & and approved by the Engineer. 3.5 Other Welding Processes Other welding processes may be used, provided they are qualified by applicable tests as prescribed in Clause 4 ‘and approved by the Engineer. PARTS 8.6.40 AWS D1.0/D1.6M1:2007 Part C Base Metals 3.6 Base Metals for Prequalified WPSs 3.6.1 Exempt Base Metal. The base metals listed in Table 3.2 may be used in prequalified WPSs: however, WPSs using these base metals which do not conform to the requirements of Clause 3 shall be qualified by cest in conformance with Clause 4. 3.7 Auxiliary Component Base Metals ‘The Engineer may approve unlisted materials for auxiliary attachments or components which fall within the chemical composition range of a listed material to be welded with prequalified WPSS. The filler metal shall belong to the corresponding filler metal group (Table 3.3) based upon equal or greater minimum tensile strength ofthe filler metal, 3.8 Base Metal for Weld Tabs and Backing Weld tas shall be of any base metal group in Table 3.2 Borkings may be used provided they ae approved by the Engineer. Steel for backing shall be of the same base metal group (Table 3.2) a the base metal, unless oer wise approved. Part D Prequalified Filler Metals, Fluxes, and Gases 3.9 Filler Metals 3.9.1 Filer Metals for Prequalified WPS. Table 3:3 lists filler metal groups, based upon suength, which are forthe corresponding prequalified base metal groups of Table 3.2, In the event that base metas from two different base metal groups in Table 3.2 are 1 be joined, filler metal from the filer metal group in Table 33 coresponding tothe tower strength of the two base metal groups in Table 3.2 shall be considered prequalified. 3.9.2 Electrode or Electrode-Flux Combinations. The electrode, including clectrodes for SAW, shall be 2s specified in Table 3.3. SAW electrode-flux combinations can be prequalified as prescribed in 3.4.2, Other SAW 1B‘AWS 01.6/01.6"2007 clectrode-flux combinations shall be qualified according, to Clause 4. 3.93 Filler Metal Removed fram Packages. After filer metal has been removed from its original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its characteristics oF ‘welding properties ae not adversely affected. Filler metals of different classifications shall not be mixed in one ‘container. 3.10 Electrodes for SMAW 3.10.1 Purchasing Requirements, Etecrodes for 'SMAW shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of AWS AS.4/AS.4M:2006, Specification for Stainless Sieel Welding Electrodes for Shielded Metal ‘Are Welding. 10.2 Electrode Storage and Drying Conditions. Electrodes supplied in hermetically sealed containers may remain in the container, once opened, provided that the container is reclosed at once. Otherwise, once the container is opened, the electrodes shall be stored in an ‘oven at 250°F t0 300°F [120°C to 150°C], Electrodes received in containers which are not hermetically sealed, whether by design or by damage, shall be redried according to the manufacturer's instructions, then stored until ‘use in an oven at 250°F to 300°F (120°C to 150°C]. 3.10.3 Manufacturer's Certification. When requested by the Engineer, the contractor or fabricator shall furnish an electrode manufacturer's certification that the electrode will meet the requirements of the classification, and will provide at least 3.0 Ferrite Number in undiluted ‘weld metal when tested with an instrument calibrated ac- ‘cording to AWS Ad.2M:2006. 3.11 Electrodes and Fluxes for SAW 3.11.1 Purchasing Requirements, The bare electrodes (Golid or composite) for SAW of stainless steels shall ‘conform to the requirements in the latest edition of AWS. AS.SIAS.9M:2006, Specification for Bare Stainless Steel Welding Electrodes and Rods. 3,L2 Manufacturer's Certification. When requested by the Engineer, the contractor or fabricator shall fami an electrode manufaciurer’s certification that the elec- toode will meet the requtements ofthe classification or grade, and a flux manufacturer's certification of the ‘composition, Ferrite Number, and mechanical prope ‘obtained withthe particular flux formulation and an electrode ofthe same classification (see 39.2). pero CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION 3.113 Storage Conditions. Flux used for SAW shall be dry and free of contamination from dirt, mill scale, or other foreign material. All flux shall be purchased in packages that can be stored under normal conditions, for a least six months, without such storage affecting its ‘welding characteristics or weld properties. Flux from damaged packages shall be discarded or shal be dried at 2 minimum temperature of SO0°F (260°C) for one hour ‘before use. Flux shall be placed in the dispensing systema immediately upon opening a package or withdrawal from ‘an oven, or, if used from an opened package, the top | in. [25 mm] shall be discarded or dred as above. Flux that thas been wet shall nat be used. 3.11.4 Flux Reclamation 3.11.4.1 Unmelted Flux. SAW flux that has not been rmelied during the welding operation may be reused after recovery by vacuuming, catch pans, sweeping, or ather means, The welding fabricator shall have a system for collecting unmelted flux, adding new flux, and welding ‘with the mixture of these two, such thatthe flux compo- n and particle size distribution atthe welding arc are relatively constant. 3.11.4.2 Melted Flux (Crushed Slag). Crushed slag shall not be considered prequalified. Melted flux or slag removed from a weld deposit may be crushed and used as a SAW flux again. However, it must be recognized that this crushed slag is likely to be 2 chemically and physically different flux from the uamelted virgin flux. It shall therefore require separate cenification testing for the paricular dry mix or lot of crushed slag, according to the requirements of 3.4.2. The crusher, not the original flux manufacturer, shall be considered the manufacturer of flux made from crushed stag, or from mistures of crushed slag with virgin flux. The crusher shall provide cemtfication in accordance with 3.11.2. 3.12 Consumables for GMAW, GTAW, and FCAW 3.12.1 Purchasing Requirements. The filler metals for GMAW, GTAW, of FCAW stall conform to the require- rents of the latest edition of AWS AS.9/AS.9M:2006, Specification for Bare Stainless Steel Welding Electrodes ‘and Rods, AWS A5.22-95R, Specification for Stainless Sieet Electrodes for Flux Cored Are Welding and Stain- Tess Steel Flux Cored Rods for Gas Tungsten Are Weld- ing, or AWS A5.30-97, Specification for Consumable Inserts 38 applicable 3.12.2 Electrode Manufacturer's Certification. When requested by the Engineee, the contractor or fabricator shall furnish the clectrode manufacturer's certification 19(CLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION that the electrode will meet the requirements of the classification or grade. tn addition, if requested by the Engineer for electrodes for GMAW. and for rods or consumable inserts for GTAW welding, the certification shall include typical mechanical properties of the all- ‘eld metal. For electrodes and rods classified according, to AWS A5.22-95R, certification shall indicate that the specimen for the all-weld-metal test will contain at least 3.0 Femite Nomber when tesed with an instrument calibrated according to AWS A4.2M:2006, For filler metals, classified according to AWS AS.9/A5.9M:2006 or AS.30- 91, certification shall indicate a calculated Ferrite Number of atleast 3.0 FN using the filler metal composition and. Figure 3.L 3.12.3 Shielding Gas for GMAW, GTAW, ond FCAW. ‘A ges or gas mixtue used for shielding in GMAW. GTAW, or FCAW stall be of a welding grade having a dow point of 40°F {-40°C] or lower. When requested by the Engineer, the contractor ot fabricator shall furnish the gas manufactur certification that the gas or gas mixture Composition and dew point meet applicable requirement. Part E Weld Sices for Prequalified Joints 3.13 General ‘The provisions of Part E shall be complied with for the determination of weld size and effective throat of welds ‘made with a prequalified WPS. Joint details that depart from the details prescribed in this clause shall be qu: fied in accordance with the requirements of Cluse 4 of this code and their conformance with applicable provisions of Clause 5. Note: The use of weld sites or effective throats other than ‘hase defined in Part E shall be determined by the use of qualifying rests found in Clause 4, Qualification. 3.14 Prequalified Fillet Welds ‘The provisions of this subclause shall apply to joints where the minimum angle between the joined pieces is 60° and the maximum angle ic 135°. 3.14.1 Maximum Leg Sizes. The maximum filet weld size (See Figure 3.2) detaited slong edges of material shall be: PARTS D&E ‘AWS D1.6/D1.6442007 () the thickness of the base metal, for metal less than 11 in, [6 ru) thick @) 1/16 in, (2 mam) less than the thickness of base metal, for metal 1/4 in. {6 mm] or more in thickness, unless the weld is designated on the drawing o be buitt out to obvain full throat thickness. In the as-welded condition, the distance between the edge of the base metal and the toe ofthe weld may be less dian 1/16 in. 2mm}, provided the weld size is cleanly verifiable. 3.14.2 Effective Throat. The effective throat of skewed ‘Tyjint welds (see Annex B)is dependent upon the mini- ‘mum angle between members to be joined and the magnitude of the root opening. Joints with angles between ‘members to be welded of less than 60° are not prequal- iffed. These joints shall be qualified per Clause 4 based ‘upon the WPS, the minimum joint angle and the mini- ‘mum root face or distance between members (see Figure 32). 3.15 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration (PJP) Groove Welds in Nontubular Connections ‘The wold size of a PIP groove weld shall be the depth of Devel less 1/8 in, [3 nim] for grooves having a groove angle less than 60°, but not less than 45°, at the root of the groove, when made by SMAW or GTAW in any position, by SAW in the flat position, or when made in the vertical or overhead welding positions by GMAW or FCAW. The weld size of a PIP groove weld shall be the depth of bevel, without reduction, for grooves having the following as detailed angles: (1) A groove angle of 60° or greater atthe root of the sroove when made by any of the following welding processes: SMAW. SAW. GMAW. GTAW, or FCAW. (2) A groove angle not less than 45° at the root of the groove when made in flat or horizontal positions by GMAW or FCAW. The design weld size of a prequalified PIP groove weld shell not be greater than that shown in Figures 3.4 and 346 for the particular welding process, joint designation, groove angle, and welding position proposed for use in welding fabrication. 3.15.1 Combined Welds. The effective throat of a combination PIP groove weld and a fillet weld shall be the 20AWS 01.61.2007 shortest distance from the joint root to the weld face of the diagrammatic weld (see Annex A). 3.16 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration (PJP) Groove Welds in Tubular Connections ‘The weld sizes for tubular connections shall be deter- ‘mined fiom Figure 3.6, 3.17 Prequalified Flare-Bevel Groove Weld Sizes The effective weld size for flare groove welds when filled flush to the surface of a round bar, a 90° bend in a formed section, ora rectangular rube shall be as shown in Table 34. 3.18 Prequalified Skewed Joints The effective weld size of skewed joints are dependent ‘upon the minimum angle between members to be joined and the magnitude of the root opening (see Anmiex B). 3.18.1 Exceptions. Joints with angles between members to be welded of less than 60° are not prequalified. 3.8.1.1 Qualifications, Joints with angles fess than 60° and more than 30° shall be qualified by macroetch examination in accordance with 4.3.2, The weld size ae- ceptance criteria shal be established by the Engineer. 3.19 Prequalified Plug and Slot Weld Sizes 3.19.1 Plog Wels. The minimum hole diameter shall be the dhisiness ofthe member conning i plus 5/16 in nm The maximum hole diameter shal be the mini um diameter plus V8 in [3 mm] or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the member, whichever is greater. 3.19.2 Slot Welds. The minimum slot width shall be the thickness of the member containing it plus 5/16 in, (8 mm] Or 2-12 times the thickness of the member PARTS a F (CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION the thickness of the member, whichever is greater. The fends of the slot shall be semicircular. 3.20 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) Groove Welds in Nontubular Connections ‘The joints shown in Figue 3.5 for CIP groove welds may be welded without performing the test eseribed in Clause 4, provided the allowable joint configurations are ‘maintained, 3.21 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) Groove Welds in Tubular Connections ‘The weld size of a CIP groove weld shall be the thickness of the thinner part joined. No increase shall be permitted for weld reinforcement (see Figure 3.5). Part F Prequalified Nontubular Joint Details 3.22 General The provisions of this subclause cover the requirements for prequalified status for joints with fille, PIP, CIP, plug, siot, or flare-bevel groove welds in nontubular conn 322.1 Minimum Joint Requirements, Joints meeting the following requirements are designated as prequalified: (1) Conformance with the details in Table 3.4 and Figures 3.2, 3.4, and 3.5, (2) Use of one of the following welding processes in accordance with the requirements of Clause 3: SMAW, SAW, GMAW, GTAW, or FCAW. 322.11 Joints meeting these requirements may be ‘used without performing the WPS qualification tests prescribed in Clause 4. aa fxruzeemrepeyereeCLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION 322.12 The WPS for all joints not meeting these requirements shall be qualified by tests prescribed in Clause 4. 3.23 Partial Joint Penetration (PJP) Groove Welds 3.23.1 Prequalified PJP Groove Welds. PIP groove Welds aro detailed in Figure 3.4. 3.23.1 Definition, Except as provided in Figure 3.5, {groove welds without steel backing, welded from one side, and groove welds welded from both sides, but with- ‘out back gouging, ate considered PIP groove welds for ‘purposes of prequalification. 323.2 Dimensions of Groove Welds. Dimensions of ‘groove welds specified in 3.23.1 may vary on design or detail drawings within the limits or tolerances shown in the “As Detaled” column in Figure 3.4, Fi up tolerances of 5.4 may be applied to the dimensions shown on the detail drawing. J- and U-grooves may be prepared before or after assembly. 3233 Groove Preparation. Groove preparations {detailed for prequalified SMAW and SAW may be used {for prequalified GMAW, GTAW, or FCAW. 3.23.4 Corner Joint Preparation, For comer joints the ‘outside groove preparation may be in eithey er both memn- bers, provided the basic groove configuration is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive melting. 3.24 Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) Groove Welds 3.24.1 Prequalified CIP Groove Welds. CIP groove welds are detailed in Figure 3.5 and are subject to the limitations specified in 3.24.2, 3242 Dimensions of Groove Welds. Dimensions of groove welds specified in 3.24.1 may vary on design or ‘detail drawings within the limits or tolerances shown in the "As Detailed” column in Figure 3.5, Fit up tolerance of 5.4 may be applied to the dimensions shown on the detail drawing, J- and U-graoves and the other side of partially welded double-V and double-bevel grooves ‘may be prepared before or after assembly. Afier batk- ‘gouging, the other side of partially welded double-V ot PARTS F4@ ‘AWS 01.6001 6442007 double-bevcl joints should resemble a prequalified U- or J-joint configuration atthe joint root. 3243 Groove Preparations. Groove preparations = [>| >| >>| >>| >|> [>] > |>>|>]> [> [>| >| Ea SEE mnie noma?CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION ‘ws D1.9/0%.642007 Table 3.2 (Continued) Prequalified Austenitic Stainless Steels (see 3.6.1) ‘ASTM Specification Minium Miniewosn Piss, ‘Tensile Yield Base Sheet, Strength Strength Metal Ally UNS Cast Bas, Bars si (MPa) _Ksi (MPa) Group* Designstion* Nomber__Pipe Pipe _Fortings Shapes Tube Tube Sirs Castings 65450) 25(170) A «30M, ——S3OKCS Aa (65450) 25070) A 316L___—$31603 Aas ‘65 (450) 28 055) A__ CPE Aa "70(490) 25 070) 3041 S000 Raw. KOE. "70,490) 25570) A 3161. S31605 Aa A866. 7090) 28095) ACO ATS, 770,450) 3000) A “C.20 ATS 70,460) 30200) A CF3 Are 7 (90) 30€200)__A___ CFM ATE 701490) 30000) A CRS AT 770480) 30200) A CF-8C ATS 70480) 30 00)__A___ CFM. ATG, 7011490) 30200) A C¥20 ATS "70,(480) 30 (200) AFF KBr "70,450) 30200) & CPPS. ASSL 70480) 30(200)__A___ CFF ASL "70 (450) 30 @00) A CPFEC. ASSL 70,450) 30 200) A CFS ‘ASST 70,460) 30G00) AEF ‘Aas “70 (480) 30200) ACF ‘ASSL 75,520) 30 200) 201 S30100- AaB 7552030000) 301 830100, ASH _A CE TB _ aH _—B 50 s30200- KARA _ASH ASH A OO. 75,520) 30200) 8. 30d $30400 ASS AAO ASIL ASH ABH 775 (520) 30.000) B 304 $3090 aE Aa 75520) 30¢200) 8304 SH_ASSE 775 (520) 30200) 308 S30880- Ra ATS 75526) 30200)B 309 830900. ATS e330 G08 8 ae — $9688 a i5520) 30 00)__B____ 30911 830908, Aa. 75520) 30200) B 3085 830908 Ra _AS ASN _ASS 75:(520)_30(200)__B 3095-0 AS5t 75 (620) 30 200) 6. 316 S31600 ‘AAAS A 54 A OE. "75 (530) 3000) 8 316881640. AAT Bea) 000) 8 Tet ae 75 G20) 30200) B36 ASABE 751520) 30200) 8 ____al6ti__S31635, Baw 75 (530) 30200) 8. 337 $31700- Aas ‘ASABE 56a 300) _8 at att a a "75 (530)_30@00) 830411830100 ‘AAT 775 (530) 30 200) 8. 347 S370 KAA wo AG_ABST 775 (530) 30200) 8 34711 34709 EE Aare 75520) 30200) B. 348 34800 AaB Aa 75 (530) 30.(200)__ 5 3H 34809, Aa 75 (330) 3583) 0G-E7 AES 7(SW)_ 3545) __C___ CFA. Ra 30 (620) 38 (260) D202 S700 XE Sever alloy desgcattons appari both Base Metal Croup A = Group B. The comes Base Maal Group fora given base al depends upon [ASTM Speciation o whih was purchased, ‘Now: Prequalified filer meus foreach Base Nt Group are give te comesponding Filler Metal Group af Tale 3.3 coe 28 aria enessoranrectencves masAWS 01,9701 5442007 CLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION ‘Table 3.2 (Continued) Prequalified Austenitic Stainless Steels (see 3.6.1) "ASTM Specification Minimum Minimum Plate, Tensile Yield Base Sheet, Strength Strength Metal Alloy = UNS Cast Bus, ‘Bars, si (MPa)_Ksi (Pa) co Designation’ Number _Pipe Pipe Forgings Shapes Tube _Tube _ Strips Castings OCI 45.310) 2 $7200 AAT S090) —D 205820500 Aas 90 (620) 50345) DMI S21904, Ads RGD. AO 90 620) $0348) D_XM-10__ $2900, ‘AAT 30620) 30345) __D___XM-17__ 521600, nas '90 (620) 50(343) D___XM-18__S21603. Aa 95 (600) 38 (260) E201-1 820100. Ae 95 (660) 45310) E2012 $20100. A666, 100 (690)_$5 G80) XM-29__s2<000 Aa 100 (650) 55 (80) XM-19.__S70910 Aas * Seyerl allay designations appear n both Base Metal Gronp A snd Group B, The covee Base Metal Group fora gvca base met depends upon Ue ‘ASTM Spectision to whict was purchteed. [Nate: Prequalified ier etals for ech Base Metal Groupe given in he comtsponding Fler Metal Group of Table 3.3. Table 3.2 (Continued) Prequalified Austenitic Stalniess Steels (see 3.6.1) ‘Minimom Minimum ASTM Specification Tewile Yidld Base Bas, Seength Suengh Meal Alay UNS Bills, Asi(Pa)_Ksi(MPa)_Ooup* Designtiont Number Castings Fitings Tube Pipe Pipe Forgings _ Tube 7005) — 9501) A 304 S30003 ‘ATH AT AGI AGIE ASST TO (490) 25111) A 3164 831605 ‘ATA ATI _ASIS_ABIE 70 (490) —30.a00) ACF aa 70 (490) 30:20) A CF-3N4 Ara 7090) _30(a00) ACF ava Tota} 30 Acre "at 30a 300A — ra ‘ATE 73.520) 3020) B34 S300 Aaa_Ag aT 75620) 3000) B soak s30409 ‘ARIS_ASI4 75 (520) 304200) 83000 30540 ‘AGIS—ABIa 75 (30) 30 200) —B 3098 530908 ‘ASID_ASIA 75 (520) 30200) B31 31400 ‘AGI3 AB] ATT 75 620) 30 00)B__ elf s31609 ‘AGIS ASIC 75 320) 30@200)——B—— 317 831700 ‘AGIS_ABla 75 520) 30200) B37 S702 A —ATEABS ABI — 75,30) 10 B39] S301 Aris A T8_AGI3_ABIa sig — 30 — 6 — Sa — SS ‘ABIS_ABIA 75 (300) 30200) B47 834700 RT —ATA_ABI3_ABIA 75 (520) 50 0) Bsa 834708 ‘ARIS _ABA 75 6) 30200) 8 AuSARIA Bish — oa — sian — ‘ASIS_ARIE 75 620) 35045) 8 COM aia 30 (620) 50¢345)——D— Xa-11 $1903 AaS_AwE 30 (620) — 50343) D1. S290 AgIS_Adla 10020) 55 (980) Birt ‘AGIs ASI¢ 100 (80) 35 360) EK 19 20510 ASL] Alt = Sev stloydesgasans appr Bo Bese Mtl Gnap A ad Grp The cane ase Mel Grp fr gve ae aa) paar pooh Wit gqechcatmoshe tment’ a forse pate [Noate:Prequslie ier meals or ech Base Metal Group ave given in he comespondlag Fler Meal Group of Table 3.3. 29 AWreetcamnermny prada tars an ‘tetas sea‘ws 01.6701.64:2007 ‘CLAUSE 3. PREQUAUIFCATION Table 3.3 Prequalified Filler Metal Classifications? (see 3.9.1) AWS ASA/AS.4M.:2006 AWS ASS/AS.9M:2005 AWS A5.22-95R, AWS 5.3097, Filler Metal Group A—70 ksi (490 MPa] Minimar Tersile Steaglt ESI6LXX ERSIGL ESIGLIXX TNSIOL ERI6LSi ROGLTLS ECSI6L : Filer metals of Groups 8, C.D. and Bae aso prequalified for Group A base metals Filler Metal Group B—75 ks (520 MPa} Minimum Tensile Srensth BS0BL-XX BR3OBL. B308LTX-X IN308L B308MoL-XX ER3OBMoL E3OBLMOTX-X INI F30OL-XX TERIOO. B3OOLTXX 309M XX R300MOL ER09LMOTXX ESE ER3IG BSOSLCUTCX, SIGH XX ERSIGH ESIGTXX ESITLXX ERSITL ESILTXX ESMTXX, R347 EMITCX O08. R3OBLTI-S RATT Filler metals of Groupe C,D, ne! are also prequalified for Group B base metals Filler Metal Group C—80 ksi (350 MPa} Minimaam Tensile Strength 307K R307 BBOTTX-X, 1N308 E308. XX ER3OR ER0RTX-X E30GH-XX ER308H1 308MoTX-X E308Mo-XX ERIORMo ESO9TX-X F308-xX ERIO8 E309MoTX-X. E300Cb-XX ER300Mo E3000 XX ER3IT ESI ERIS E318 XX ERIGS-2 E16-8-2-%X Filler meals of Groups D and B are also preaual Filler Metal Group D—90 ks (620 MPa] Minimam Tensile Srengts ELIA, ERIS : Filler metals of Group E are also prequalified for Group D base metals : Filler Metal Group E100 ksi [690 MPa] Minimum Tensile Strength : 1E209-XX R20 ENO-XX R240 * Eleodeclsiieaionc wit igh sion modifiestions Gadicsed by isclsion of" in tbe elassVieation dxgration) ap prequalified along with te conespcdis lowe slicn Ycson Thos. the ERSOES| classification Is prequalified fr the Same base eta asthe ERSDE casita a ‘5 fon Meu coed eleeirodes indented by 2"C™ in gace ofthe "ae prequalied only fer GMAW and SAW process, ag wih the come Sponling shi wie csealoes. Ths, ECBO clasieston toga wth OMAW a0d SAW forthe sane ate metal ot tN 30AWS D1.9001.6M:2007 (CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION Table 3.4 Effective Weld Sizes of : Flare-Groove Welds (see 3.17) Flare-Bevel-Groove Welds Flare-V.Groove Welds SIGR T2R* eer R= ratus of sie surface. 1 “Use ¥8 in (10 mm] far GMAW. Esfecive ste sal be quai for he GMAW shor cic: Ing ester process 31CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION AWS O1.8/D1.6442007 Table 3.5 Prequalified WPS Requirements (see 3.29) vacistic | Position | weldtype | smaw | sawe | cmawet | rcawee | oTAWen® Fille, v4 (6a) [5/16 (80) Fla ‘Groove vateat [50160601 Maximam ool Pass Tat6ar [516801 Blecrode rile vata [sca] wise | ss2 | sn2co, Diameter | Horzcotl - ia (oa) Groove 3i6(4a) | 5/6180) Vertical all seria) | NA Overhead ‘oot al Filet 3000, Groove Weld Root Pass With Opening | within the ‘Witkinshe | Within the songz of angeof | rangeot Maximum Groove Weld | recommended | gy | recommended | recommneoded | See Curent (A) Vrasea) | operation by operationty | operationby | Not all the filler moat the iiesmeal | te filler esl Crening | manutaeauer ‘manufacturer | manuectrer Groove Weld Fi Passes Groove Weld Cap Passes S00 Fat wt | wena] M60) vaste) Maximum Horizontal vat | sti | 316i) waT6) Root Pass All 306 (5) — ‘Venical vets) ¥ 311613) v4 16) in A Overhead ve) 5615) us) Fla vet | v4t6) Maximom Tinpms.” | Horizootl an sows [sist | uta ee Thivkness | Venical 6151 7 in. am] NA Overhead 3160) Maximo [FS aang | uml en | ey | te Single Pass | Horizontal seis) | 56 316 (8 316 385 Fillet Weld Fillet a 6 4 Size Verieal 1a 2) mua | nay | sass) in. (rm) NA ‘Overhead 5618) wie | stew | MeL) Maxinum | all for SAW, Singeras_| Guat, penn, | Anyindil rate iran | Cem, er of wiry | seve} ny | oy | cy {en} | FAH (orsaw) | MY ‘Contin 32AWS 01.8001.66:2007 CLAUSES. PREQUALIFICATION Table 3.5 (Continued) Prequalified WPS Requirements (see 3.29) * in (6a Por fillet welds ad grove wes wih tacking and 3 rot opening of 14 i. (6 em] or mare. Single eeeods. See 3.288). "Pulsed GMAW is prequclfie in al postions except veil dow, Prequalification of st cutngwansier GMAW ime to linn base shin gas ries (teas 854 He by volune) extends al poston, bts inte 6 36 in, (5 em] nama Base meal teks, Preqal- ie enetng tases forall GMAW ate agen toe Reism-deed ad amie to Gone contin st east 3%, hata more Ut 6 ray ‘yolune, of exygen plus carbon dioxide, including no muon thea 3% carbon done. “Gas shielded FAW is prequalified i al posits, except a eral down pruaiicaion is Kine vo 316i. (5 man] moximu base seat thickest. Slt shielded FCAW i prequalified io thet ad rion poston only. Prequalified shiling gases for secrods lassi with gas ‘hieling ar imo welding pad carbon dioxide and mises of argon wth os esthon 20% by volume. cxbon dioxide, Self shielded elecres ‘ae prequalified only witout extered selling gos. «See Figure 3. fox Walt Deplh Linton, * GTAW and Pulse GTAW is prequalified i al welding postion, DCEN only. Prequalified sildng fuss ar reseed o welding ere (or higher rity) aigon, bein, cd aspen hea mines. Prequalified cues sage depends upon tungseaelecuode dmet: (122) 35 ollows: Elecode Diane a ma ‘Cuseat Range, BCEN ‘060 G70) 130 150 0093 482) 230 0-250 250 70250 300 90-350 ors. a) 320 100-400 038656) $00. 150-500 ‘For GTAW the elacrodeis per AWS AS.IZ/AS.L2MCOR, Specific or Tongsen and Tungsten Alloy Eletvodes or Are Welding cd Cuig. * Spilayers when he asim sige pas oer with is exceeded, H= Horie Pore 3ve Ni+ 950 + 20N 40.25 Cu Nias 8 18 20 2 a 2 20 20 L, VA “2 S Ss * S io 2 2 7 se | fe 4 © e S ae & 6: a0 S i“ A KS 16 20 22 24 28 2 30 Greg Gr + Mo +0.7 Nb Note: This clagram ls Kentcal to the WAC-1992 Diagram, except that he sotdticaton mode lines have been removed for ease of use. Figure 3.1—Weld Metal Delta Ferrite Content (see 3.12.2) 16 1“ 0 Nowvournnogua te asnno 0c NE LOLA SHYAWS 01.801.6M12007 FORY> 120° EDGE SHALL BE CUT BACK TO FAGILTIATE, THROAT THICKNESS Notes {thickness ofhinnar part, minimum sz, (CLAUSE, PREQUALIFICATION @ASE METAL LESS THAN BASE METAL 1/4in.[6 mm] Win. (6 mm] THICK = OR MORE IN THICKNESS Oy ® Maximum detalleg size of lot weld etong edges "Tho V16 in. {2 me] distance 990d not be mainiained provided ‘hat the affactive wold sie can bo determined. Figure 3.2—Details for Prequalified Fillet Welds (see 3.14.1) ET muerveio Leg AS ‘SPECIFIED OR SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ‘SOE (UNMATCHED 60x) © sain L FOAL DIHEDRAL, ANLE= @ [Eson] e-1 | e=107 ‘SIDES 100" 1 |e Te SIDE 100-110 |_| te 17st SIDE T0120 | tt | tat 200 tT [at | FULL BEVEL ToE> 120" | ever | sever |s0~-00" GROOVE 1 2 5. Alot opening 010 116i. um} —s00 8.4. Not proqualiog for < 60". 5 2od00 218. ‘Figure 3.3—Fillet Welded Prequalified Joints (see 3.28.3) 35CLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION AWS 01.6/01.0M2007 Legend for Figures 3.4 and 3.5 ‘Syimbels for join types B— batt joint (C= coener joint T= Tioint BC — butt or comer joint TE —T-orcomer joint TC — bua, Tor comer joint ‘Symbols for base metal thickness and penetration L_— limited shckness-complete joint penetration U — unlimited thickness-compiete joint penetration P—panialjointpenetstion Symbol for weld types 6 — single-U-groove 7 double-U-groove 3—doubleN-groove 8 — single J-goove 4—single-bevel-greove 9 — double-}-groove 5 — double bevel groove 10 — flare-bevel groove ‘Symbols for welding processes i not shielded metal arc ‘S— submerged are welding G— gas motl ac welding F— fx coved arc welding ‘Welding processes 'SMAW — shiekled metal arc welding GMAW — gas metal are welding ‘GTAW — gas tungsten ee welding RAW — flux cored metal are welding SAW — submerged are welding ‘Welding positions F— ft H— horizontal Y= verical OH — overhead Dimeasions 1 J- of U-groove Redint PIP Groove Weld Depth of Groove E.E). By= PIP Groove Weld ‘Sizes corresponding to S, S; So. respectively ‘Joint Designation “The lower ase letters, gab, et. are used to diferentiate between joints that would olberwise ave the same joint esignation. 8.5,.8; 36AWS D1.S/D1.6M:2007 CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION ‘See Notas on Pago 70 ‘Squara-groove weld (1) inion) an 1 ” E newroncewent 210 1 The Reece ioe Prpaaton ave Met Tene Teen omnes voting | ot Tecowes | astiup | wong {els azo Free | oairaion t roctopunia | Geo ssss) | Cosy | rocione [ (| nos Su |_Pis | Teper | AeowTe | se [ate [ar [ate Tao aay fan | sre | evens | reremn| sineo | ave | a | te [ane oan | Square-groove weld (1) ‘But Joint (B) +E, MUSTNOT EXCEED tH roo Prepaaion ase Meta Tikkass Trnsae eee | ‘He voting | st eoeaiea | astiup | wetdny {els Seo Process | Designation Tt Root Opaning | (se03.23.2) | (sao 5.4) Positions | (E,+E,) | Notos SunW cum | apn | vmx | nave | ato | am | om | ow | ao aa Figure 3.4—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) 3”CLAUSE 4, PREQUALIFICATION ‘Seo Notes on Page 70 AVS D1.6D1.6N2007 [Single-V-groove wald (2) ‘Butt joint (B) Comer joint (C) ‘aso Motal Thicknoss. Groove Preperation (Uc Unlimited) oot Opening Tolorences: voting | cot infarc’ | asDalod | asFiun Prssts | ossimion | 71__| ts | owmearse| GseS2s3) | Gees) woes Reo] Oine | Tye a sw | ocre | ama ful tetimn | We |e | om | 8 | tue acer | sige | a ar = Taine | aan Saw | screcr | sam ful riven | Oe |i) ow | 8 fatto uw weeo | ink | ft = a ne sua | ecoae | moma ful rimnn | wo | “ae | re | os | at wu” | ik eS Tain soe woe cao Greer Peperton avert Tanest | pny |_—__ reonnce | Tat wing | sat Toa Pace’ | faDwatog | asrive | ‘lang |WolsSz0 Pots’ | peltion t choos Angu | (soaaay | tows) | poate | %e) | noes tao | neo cue ero | atom tuo a | e8 feite ‘SMAW 410°. Fane se GMAW | B-P3-GF 3/6 min, 40,0 All $48; enw sig usw it =o rye Broa ‘M4 min, t= 14min, uo F Si+S: | ak coo” | Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) ‘te apetvan seaming pm MOU RR 38AWS D1.6/D1.6m:2007 CLAUSE 2. PREQUALIFICATION [Srgie-tevergro07a 6) Burt joint (8) Fein) Cornero (c) Base ete Thickness ‘Groove Preparation {U=Unliitog) “Tolerances Ft Opning Porites J eng |i atest’ | Asbaaea | AeFirup | oti [wer sin tie | aaiton re | crates | C5eSS | SE | SNES [EF aes feo] ine | 6 suse | arces | anemn | u | searemin | nmin | “eine | an | ace | Sees |e | Reo] ina | vise [ER “| SMA | ercpece | gemm, | u | te1min | Unimneae |” aime. Bohn FAW east | ston-o | tons | ON | Se eo na me sua | seens | mmm |u| retiemn | sGeo | “Sine e | os feoue woo” Le |S “Fatt an aenal peton T= Saag Baume Tint (7) ee) | Base Metal Thickness Groowe Preperation nied Root Opening Tolerancos Permitted voting | sor usttace” | asoaaied | asriue | ‘ours Bee | alton tz | oneietie | GOSS | OSE | ANS tas RETR ECT su | arces | siemn | u [reaemn | oumiog | Mine | am 1aN aca” | cams | oes. : Sw | BTERES | Fea R20 ne 0] v6 cen ream | srcesr | sewn | ° | Syiemme | Saames | “sine” ite ao cua wen TOPS (4 min. u | te 14min, 4, -0- F Ken saw a= 60" +50", 0" hn Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) SCRE EN ent 39CLAUSE 5. PREQUALIFICATION AWS 01.5/D1.642007 [Single-U-groove watd (6) Burt joint (B) | Corner joint {C) ped t tel bho [Base Metal Thickness: Groove Preperation {U=Uniimitod) | Root Opening Tolerances a wong | sone Jacove Mucus Asawtos | Aceuup | wading. |Wols Sze Prom | Dostraon 1 |‘Groow Arga | (6003282) |_ (en 5<)_| postions |""() | Nows ie, -0-| Ha, -1n6 san 3 7 saw | acee | tama |v ea} ae | om] os Jane SMA + 10°, -0* 410%, -5* sie, -0 | oi, 178 tite’ | “ine ° row | sore | uemn, | u wef ee | ow [os | a sie | dots re cua wie avy | acess | meme | uv swig re |os fat sions: “uot getorman Ven Doxseti gana wa But joint (8) roo Prepraion Bese New! Thetnos | ot Opening Teterancon oot face Parnes | Tet Wolsing: soit Groove Radivs ASFitUp | Wolding | Weld Skee Proves | Dosgnaton 1 Groowe Angi (aon) | Pastors EE | Note care <0 | 3-18 sua : craw | Br 4 ain, core ate av | S+8, faite Main +10", 0 +108, -57_ Sie, <0) 8, 16 wee | Sihe reaw | nore sami sth a | ses | yuo Hoo =o aw | pore smn ati Fe [ses | ai Sone Sanat gestortan Tah. Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) 40AWS D1.6/01.66:2007 CLAUSE 9. PREQUALIFICATION [Srae-aroove weld Bulli (8) "Teint ‘Comer aint (0) aso Metal Thickness Sroow Proparston (U= Unites) [Root Opaning Tolerances oot Face Pormities woidiag | __ soint Goove Radius | AsDetaled | Asritup | Welding | Wold Size Procass | Docignation Te [Groove angie | (6003232) | (6205.4) | Postions | (E) | Notes ang, -0 | 8,16 2) saw +U,-0 ine. SHAW | Tore | anemin | 0 3 | oan a 8 |tate fio -0" | stots 6-0 | 6, 176 . hn. 1,0 ain8 Bors | snemn, | u A] ane a s Fiore | stor i 48,0 | +18, 116 U,-0 ing oaw | Tore | vm, | u ans a s | aro #1070 | toss HUB, -0 | 178, 116 4,-0 sine roaw | porer | vemin | U a] ane al s jaune soi | ston cua 20 16,0 May 0-9 aire. sma | repea | 76min, | U | ome F s | aot Hore | +10" 5° cua 2 “igo 0 ane sma | cee | nem | u a | ots F s |agun sore | ot * Apples to neide comerjaiis. ® Appies ta outslde comer fins, Neod not move than 12h. Figure 3.4 (Continued) Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) ee otaCLAUSE a, PREQUALIFICATION AWS D1 «101 64:2007 S00 Notes on Page 70 joo wa) eats eae Comeriaint ©) Base Mall roe Proparaion “Thicknaes rete ay | Root Open vances (u=vrimied | Root eace Toe Peiminod | Toa Welding | soit Groove Redus | AsDetatee | Asie | Waring |Welé Sia Process | esimaton | Tr | Ts | Groovedrale | (eoos.za2) | (esos) | Postons |(,+&) | notes ne 0 oma vam 3,70 as [bode maw | ereee | amin | u ii ar | ses, [Sok fot sine0 | +1,-110 Foaw » v0 | sins + EER | srcracr | emia | u | Has at | SiS Hors FoaW 7 “6,0 Enaw [erormeor | | me = a8 saw | orese TG, <0 ‘cMaw , Foaw | crest | oumin | u euie | ses [ahh sav 0,5" 16,0 avis saw | tres | amin | u ae ess | out +404 <5 pes toinside comer joins. pis to outside corer jis *Noed net be more tan 172, Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) 2-A8YS 01.5/01.5442007 ‘Soe Notes on Page 70 CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION [ Square-groove wold (1) But joint (8) eA L a_i + sascneauay 03 | ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm. rR NO TOLERANCE Gone Famun ean Mat Tastes Taonnss | 9, viotng | st Tateaies | asta | “iors | wou seo See | oaditon |r _—__|rasropanin | ASS | EUR | eating [PES vee saw [spa ees acer | ea [ate ste aay faaw [sete | swemz | netenn | 20 | | a | 2 lane nd [Squave-groovo wold (1) Butt joint (8) f+ €, must or exceepsrt iL oMENSIONE Wwe Si Papen ase Met sees Teen] pemane | tens wriog | net Tpaiates | arp | eee | el Boo eat’ | vodition |__| oct opening| fe | Gare | Stee TEES | nome Sua Se | eew max reve | ato | atm ar | om | a Sin Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) (Dimensions in Millimeters) SEARS emanate a(CLAUSE 8, PREQUALIFICATION ANS DL8D1 6642007, [Sigi-v-qroove weld @ Burt jin (6) [Comer joie (0) ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm roe Preparaten Root Opening Tolerances Permitted woking | st Tas fees" | Reales | asFiup | ‘welamy |woldsize recess | besgraton | Tr _| Tr | crmmange | one225) | toons) | postions | (2) "| Notes a0 | 028 | oa suey | cee | mn [ul rim | sie |S a | os | te soe | wie Faw a] ae Saw | screcr | smn | wv we | “Se a | os [ate cman soe a r 0 at syw | sceza | arm |v we | e fs fu sore | asa: [Bouse V-groove wala) ure joint (8) SalEa) ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm Groove Preparation Base Metal Tsk 5 penny Tesora fe vol Welding | soit TociFeea’ | AsDasied | asruup | ‘wld | Wold So Proces | Dasignavon T ssroove Angle | (6603232) | feoosa) | Poattons |(E+ED | Notes ome Reo | a0 | 4-2 Su | ars Sin, teem | 300 2 a | 808 | tne acer” | oie | soa FORT m=o | 42-0 | +2 an GMAW | BP3.cF Sin. f29min, | 4u,-0 <2 an | Sye8, | OE AE raw exer | tote | soo ° isa =o 220 ama | pos zonn | tevin | ato | “2 F | ses | an ese | stove | sos Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) (Dimensions in Millimeters) 4AWS D1.8/01.6442007 CcUWSE 2. PREOUALFICATION S00 Nott on 86070 ‘Singlo-bevel-groova (4), ‘Burt joint (B) amy 4, | Comer joint (C} : fot ' AL nen0N8 Wn brellen Base Metal Thickness Prepar (U= Unlimited) Root Opening ‘Tolerances Per ing | sont ‘oaPace" | As Daioa io | ots BESO | edition 1 | Te | conan | (0 race ES note mo | 0 guw | areca | mn |u| ieean | niace an | ae [tobe pa aco ERs cum Fad, | uttnce 7 quit [reese] womn |v | resmn | vipa at oa uw . So e | os Joon "Fora ad al patos Daag terrane was Soran oath oreo) ALL BDIENSIONS Im ve Pion Dawe Metal Ticknoss Ss reperste (0 Uniniiod) Poot Opening Toreranees Permitted | Total ‘Welding. Joint RoctFaco | AsDetalsd | AsFitUp | Welding |Weld Size Prec | persion ta | onovearae | Gases | foe | ASME [ees Reo) a) ‘SMAW rr (3+ Sy) sors | om |u| scene | utinine | “22” | an GTAW a= 45" +10", 0" 410%, -5* s caw | Bros | orn Reo] g-0 | sa@ [ER [8-8 row | arorse | remm | 2] ‘com | vanes | ig. [on [Be m0 [a0] ae ama | rons | aon. [uf stony | acce | “a Fo) Sem | sa | a Figure 3.4 (Continued}—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) @imensions in Millimeters) 4s ‘Srepwolanas encrypt wana one ne Etwratae aed nessaoa(CLAUSE 3, PREQUAUFICATION ‘AWS D1siD1.602007 | Single-U-groave weld (6). Suton) Borertot (0) aged 1 su onan Cle | Base Meta! Thickness Groove Preparation {Us Unimted) | Rast Opa Tolrnase seat fare Parmiod viedng | nt crore Reds ‘asreup | Woldng |Wols see Prete | oecrtton | ty | ty | Summa (eos) | panos [| noes ‘SMAW a2 Saw | acre | ann |v 2 a | os GMAW 410", 5" sa reaw | scree | emn | u 2 mw {os |i. aot sa cum ‘2 aun | ocesa | tain | uv 2 r {os fa nis “Bain gener an Sm, Saag WaT Butt joint (B) ALDINENSIONS Rw Groove Prepnaion bate ea Ttksowss| Fast Opsnha Teianeas an Face emits | 7 kde | Jin wow Fats) AsOealea | Asreup | ‘wou [Wat Seo Process | Designation T Groove Angie | (s003.23.2) | (sae 5.4) Positions | (E1+E,) | Notes Sunn a0 | eo | a2 uw | er emin teem | woe | “e an | sis8 GMAW +10", -0* +10°, 5° a ae wi | FoaW | Bere tomin a3 | 2 “a he Si | ats uw a] ae teean | ata |e sw | sera temin ee ee e | ses] ane ese | te | ac "Baro geer fan 6am. Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) (Dimensions in Millimeters) pie icy oe eamar tent 46AWS D161 M2007 ‘S09 Notes on Pago 70 CLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION. Faint) Sra Laear wld emer Corner jain (6) ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm secoMoi Tinos ia sid wating | dot Geenue| pconwtee | asricup | Wot’ | weiss He | owetion | ts | te [Seaminge | Coosa | Geos | foscom “ES nots ao ea suas . mn | Sa sua | sore | smn fu | tame | we a | os fee ae | Te ast] ee sua . iim | ca \ etn saw | goes | smn | u ey m | os [tes see eo roww | roree | emin | v we a | 6 oe re S| cma 23 row | scree | em | uv wo a | os ite i caw ao aaa | revea | mn | a ite r [os jae a9 = usw wee sue | oes | amin |v whe e | 5 feos He "Applies to inside comarJlns. ® Applias to outsdo comer jos. “Nope not be mare than 12 mm. Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3,23.1) pata oye eer ants (Dimensions in Millimeters) 4“(CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION AWS 01.8101.5!2007 ‘Soe Notes on Page 70 Dactio- groove ward (6) Bat jit (8) Tot) (Corn jot (2) ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm ase Mal Groaee Praparaon ene Root Opsning (w= Unites) _| Foot Opera “elrances ba tas Woting | soit Cicare Padis| As Dated | Asricup | ‘Woldng_ | Wel Sco Process | Designation % Tz | Groove Angle | (see3.232) | (see) | Postions | (E,+E,) | Notas suaw tone suw | arc-ro ama | ar | ses, [heh Foaw . Mt Foaw | ercesare | samin | u ar | srs) [oh FCAW T erc-PoaGF* ‘i tomn, |u| fem F | 85 saw | _opese cua Few | cress | tom | u F | S68 ‘ser saw Tes 20min. | Uv F $,+8, pe to nelde corner fits Applias to outdo corer jl. Need not ba mare than 12 mm. ‘Figure 3.4 (Continued)—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.23.1) ‘Dimensions in Millimeters) 48‘AWS 05.9/101.6M2007 (CLAUSE 3, PREGUALIFICATION See Nolos.on Page 70 [Square-groove weld (1) ‘Burt joint (8) Corner joint (C) T TT tT mes essay a a+ . Ickes == Snr nag ar oe we | amas | ae — Pe act | | Lencpein| 20S | SERS ana atte vamax. | — | R=t, |atasine.-0| st4sva-tasine| al | ako =n sxc ETE ran Ea t a lies cara assure om a Permitied aan oe + ners | SS TE | ee er anes omes 2a fe ets ts ‘apa St ena Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (sce 3.24.1) 49CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION AWS 01.601.644:2007 ‘Sde Notes on Page 70 ‘Square-groove weld (1) ‘Hom (i) . Carre ost) ps BACKGOUGE Jott * Base weil Groove Preparation “ruseaee (u=Unimites, “oerancos vomited weising | sont ‘As Dota ‘AaFijp | ‘Wedng Prose | ossgnaton | tT) | Te | Rootonening | (son 3042) (eons) | positon | nates SHAW SHA Trou _|semax | u ase, [aineazee | ar | ago aw Sur eg | GMAW | Toor |oemac| u | R=oie18 vino | ne—tesv0 [ray —an| He Sw es faire 0 a z saga ngievguer w auton) om BACKGOUGE ZX To f ae tb Base Metal Thickness Groove Preparation {U= Unlimited) Root Opening ‘Tolerances Permitted Welding | sont Pootbaca” | Asbaaiea | asreup | ‘weldng Process | Ducgaaton r Greow Angio_| (eoo3.242) | tecasa) | Postont | Noes swaw [82 v Feowre ste | Weetae 0 suaw | 2 Tan Omigene | ig ing-3 a | ako FeowT2eie [at a ‘cma | 8u0GF | nin] WO Tes (2 Teese) r= Tes v8 a FoAN Temin| 18 in| cuscr | 8 ain] 18 toTRs 18 tates ue) r= 125 14 a Yamin] Vm ; saw | souss | Vann] v0 =o tevin, | r= 18 in, F ‘AUmite by 2 minimum groove depih. Figure 3.5 (Continued)—Prequalified CIP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.24.1) ‘race aie tie en 56AWS D1. 66:2007 (CLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION. ‘See Notas on Page 7 Ragen Tne acxcouse | RSHSIS : Ta nuraaianer Tastee ae oe waivies eer aur eT aaa "rae (Us Unlimited) Growve Preparation visas Tea |eone] feo] Sapa] Pamian vans OO onlin] 1 [open [S650 |] Sama | PTHERSS |e ‘swaw R=00T2s v8 1-28-08 al ahh gue) our | soennou cs GAT | purer | somnwou [ReowIesim nie m ey sar Lesurs pane] — asd iene =o 7h ainiuremnenpocoat apa wa ‘Butt joint (6) T Teen ' ‘aaah | BFSp aeoites | ats eaves vie] wire. -0 a=, 0 | a3 Testa ete O[ Wales —t (esrasva0 [iia | BACKGOUGE Groove Preparetion pe Welcing | doit Root Grow] Root | Groove ‘welding Process | Designation T opening | Anglo | Faco Rous Postions | Notes Suaw | ewe | saeminbU | Amo. . Sab a Rte | cast ities | rasta sae au edhe ‘GMAW in B00 |,. aad SYAY | auecr | weminwu | P28 |a-se|ieteswe al ee sav | 60S [sani R20 ae | to Wemm F ean *Limted by @rislmum groove dopth, Figure 3.5 (Continned)—Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joints-—Nontubular (see 3.24.1) 7|, CLAUSE’3, PREQUAUFICATION ‘AWS 01.8°01.6N42007 5 [Shgle-J-groove wald () Tolerances: Conon ps As Detail ‘As Fits nen SS ec m7 Comer (6) f (s00 3.24.2) {s00 5.4) Bacxcouse [Rasaswie | 116.0 | EST Te o1f8,=0 | Noted 51 ST 4 ae Ta Base Metal Teeknase (Us Unimtec) ‘Groove Proparation seit. Pact] Groove | Rat] Groove | ParmitodWeldng esgnaton | 7, | te | oparing | “Arglo_| Face | Regus |" '"Postons | Notas Bean aeemn | Heo TE| ggg | THT | raat Zam Touse toU wou 518 an8s | sue £38 a mo emi |aeemn.| Reo Te Teta [1-31 m cm | Toate [Semin Semin | RAO eT! | age | IETF | Fe aTh ROH 8 GMAW Benin | Ve min | Hat TE Yeta reat Dore Foaw | Toubser | eg | MoD | ya” | @=90" | Fve | "eae a mao saw | tousas | S8min | neo | nas | 154 | rea F égm. "ised by eminimum prove depth Double rear wos Toieaneos Butt joint (8) at s ‘aDomies | AGF fe (eoo82t2) | (eas) Hesse 6-0 +16, -0 woth -0 [104-5 Tous aie BADKGOUGE Secs Tuas imme ico Paparten wating | oe Tesi] rome | Fost | Seow | Paid eing PES | oadiion | 7 ofting | Sane | Bom | Sate | Psa EC GTAW 19 S182 min. 10 qreswe | °* s16 sae at SH | euvcr | Sm ~O [naotwim | acco | fas | tas a Cimted by &ronimum groove dopt Figure 3.5 (Continued)—Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.24.1) 58 Siateaine Sane Sry wom ana a ‘sorhemanasane esata‘A8YS D1.01.6M2007 CLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION Seo Notos on Pege 70 Baer oeon mes y Tlerances orerjain (cy is ‘As Detaled | As FLU (2009:242) | (2005.4) Fas 5776, as +116,-0 [BACKGOUGE eaHoy 0 | Ae Testis 176, ed as Not imo Tes veo| a6 Basenotes wars Una now Prapeaon vieting | sont Toa | Groow | foot [Gone | Pemitegweting Feces | ooifraton| ts | te | opening | See | Foso_| Seucs | "Senne wan | Tou [ecommwu] | =O [aaas | Te [real A v TedW] gage Tet peat cow | Tem [eotmnee eTE| nae | tote [i230 row aa te eas GW |rusecr | semnwul uv [andwim|eccom | (af | *aa a “Tins enum gone eh Figure 3.5 (Continued) Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.24.1) 59CLAUSE 8. PREUALIFICATION [AWS 01.6/01.6942007 San Note on Page 70 Fae gaa wT Sitio Comers ©) | 7 + > t h a ee fesse) ALLDWENSIONS Bm f. Lerelen esse Meta Tcknoss ioe Pepaaten ‘Oe Gna Toten viorg | om Feveaina | AsFiup Proce’ | oecoraton | - T —_| ts | ostopenna| foodses) | fous SuW | aie | ome [| fen, | otwsao | Aves tuz0 cmv] © Tmax [URE aso |e Se Fem auiaF [tome [=p Ret] 0 setae sav [gure | tome [| met. [ee nse Sameaeore wea sient anckaouce excerr es) + t 1 ALL CIMENSIONS Wm alba roo Peparen ease Met! Mines Towers cumines ecg | Jom AeDeaiee | AsniUp | woidng Prose | oedgnton r ootopenna | (eonsat) | eos | rstor | Notes SMA SAT eat enon Rete | otms2-0 | tesa ar [ake FCAT oma za TEES make AT Toma a2 wastes apa oa ‘omar = a2 re SM rr Fy wa rae Figure 3.5 (Continued)—Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.24.1) ‘Wimensions in Millimeters) cane ce 6‘AWS D1 6/D1.6M:2007 CLAUSE 3, PREQUALIFICATION sneer ee [Square-groove weld (1) joint (1) MN, Comer lat ¢2) bs vcxaoe Dob | ALL OIMENSIONS IN mm Tk = San ai Sea a a _ mn | am ea fe PS [oan |_| n oe oo - aut [var ome |v asm “tate ao" oS BACKGOUGE SNH 1 AL DIMENSIONS Nm nal fe os a, vosry | at ay ae we | atin oes [ER BS | hoe —_ Mat | pace u feowress | viaza—o | Nemes | an [2K a oowee | ae ou | tine | omens fee | te fe | as ownew ——— Figure 3.5 (Continued)—Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.24.1) (Dimensions in Millimeters) 6 EE mee tenesCLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION AWS D1.8/01.6012007 ‘See Notes on Page 70 Seis vaso wk) Taras utente) ‘As Detaled | As FtUp Gooaze | ee 0 | +6-2 CESS a ESE |ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm wotsng | som Porites Weng Procoss_| Designation Pastors SAW | 62a ar Al craw | Bie St oman a GMAW | BueGF ‘AL Al Saw oaes F SAV | BARS. F Singa-Vgioove wal) But cnt ©) JALL DIMENSIONS IN ra too-lkA ‘pave Mal Sor Pepa trcinass ax |, orancas bet Wesding | Joint foatfaco’ [As Dotaiog ‘arp | Welding Procens_| Desigraton 1 sroove Angle | (208 3.24.2) (005.4) | Positions | Notes R=owTess | 1800rT= 50 8225-8) oso Motal Thickness Sroove Prepareton MES Tere | Root Opening Tojoranees Permitted wong | doin Root Fac” | As Dotallog Wieding Process | Designation 7 Groow Angio_| (500.3242) Positions | notes suaw | ua al a totase | ste<2,-0 3 ow 5 = 417282, i GMAW 10", -0° Al * eee | eus-cr v io Azo a ao t= 9m, 36,0 saw | uses | 12min.tou epee | dee | aS F hk “Wind §, 200 table above: 8, 5T—S.+) Lint by 2 minimum groove depth, Figure 3.5 (Continued) Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joints—Nontubular (see 3.24.1) (Dimensions in Millimeters)(CLAUSE 9, PREQUALIFICATION ‘See Notas on Page 70 AWS 01 6001 6M:2007 Single bevel gromve weld A) Tolraneos Putters) As Datsied ‘As FiLUp Goatzes) | usd fa02,0 | wh-2 a= HO | HO at ALL DIMENSIONS Nm ark KN Base ororTcnoas von Welding Joint (U= unio) Sroove mt Permitted Wotding Prose | Dowtinaton T RoaGpering | _ Groove gla eatlong | Wows seat_|—Buea_| Saw Ae6 oar a Ee etaw [baa | erin 025 As e290 a che nave Aes a= at acho ausce | emmy ase aaa a Beko Fea A= 10 23 30" F ek Ae6 ra sw | pues | omniu 5 a F ek Thy Sorts wed Tlernaee ‘ont se faDoiates [camaro | fg Detaled K CPE as AL DIENSIONS 1mm ase an nate Unt 116 In, [6 mn] (608 2.29 and Table 3.5 Noted), dent is welded Wom ona aide only. ‘Cyclic load appicalons lit hese [ons to tho noizoial positon. Beckgouge oo! o sound mall botove walding cacond ida, ool wad from ana elda. Backgouging nat raquired provided adequate gos purging is wsod. 4 Foe GTAW, Si miedo 1, (28 mm] mex. Fill welts may bo used to reinarea cornes and Tits. But and Tyas are not prequalfed for eylealy loaded structures. " Doublogroova welds may Rave graves of unequal depth, But Ihe depth ct he shalloner groove shalbe nat less than one-fourth ofthe {hiciness ofthe thinner part joined, | Doublorgroove vals may nave grooves of unequal dopth. \\Tha orientation a vo mambors the fins may vary from 125° fo 180° provided that the bose jln eonigration (groove ang, root ‘ce, 00% apaning) remain he sama snd hatte dion weld slags mantalnod, | Ta member ofantation moy be changod provdod iat tho groove dimonsiors are malniainoé a¢spociod, ‘Tha arontaton of two mambo indo fons may vary for 48" to 185" or corner Joints and rom 45" to 80° for joins, provided that he basi joint configuration (groove angia, root face, reat opening rarin the samo ar that the design wots sizes mainained, "Fx cumer ai ti ois ore pepo ay ba of bah manbom, pve fa hae ove cotuii 1 ot od and adequate edge dtance is malntalnad io support opoat ul excesslve edge mating, © Allpastion wih slab amperage or hoa ink. > For tube welding, tho dlameter of tube shall bo 1/2 in. (12 mm] min. ‘Consumable Inserts may be used. 0AWS 01.9/01.6442007 CLAUSE 3. PREQUALIFICATION 1.51 MIN 1stMiIN Y= 150-105" ya 105-20" v= 80-75" ‘CORNER DIMENSION Cty 178 In.[S ma) AND #2 21, OR ROOT OPENING & 1/16In, (2 =m) te += RADIUS 1.51 MINOR AS REQUIRED TO FLUSH Tas LINE 15tMN OUT (WHICHEVER TANGENT awe SEES) ‘TOE CORNER SIDE MATCHED Notes: Etfective weld size = ty WP. = Working Point Figure 3.6—Prequalified Joint Details for PJP Groove Welds—Tubular (see 3.28.2) nCLAUSE 5. PREQUAUIFICATION AWS 01.01 6442007 woth OF FACE im C DEPTH wiom "Nota: The weld bead with or depth chal not ba greatar than the sild face, Figure 3.7—Weld Bead Width/Depth Limitations [see 3.29(11)] n[AWS D1.80D1.84:2007 PartA WPS Qualification Requirements 4.1 General 4.11 Qualification of WPSs. This clause establishes the Tequirements for the qualification of WPSs for each ‘welding process listed in Table 4.1 and the documenting ‘of actual welding variables listed on the Procedure Qual- ification Record (PQR). The destructive and nondestructive testing requirements for qualification of the WPS are designed to determine mechanical properties and soundness of welded joints the WPSs exempted (prequalified) in Clause 3, WPSs which are (© be employed in executing contact work ‘under this code shal be qualified prior to use tothe sai faction of the engineer, by tests as prescribed in this clause. Eich manufacturer or contractor shall conduct the ‘ests required by this code to qualify WPSs (see exception in 4.1.3). It is permissible, however, 10 subcontract any or all ofthe work on the preparation of test materials for welding and subsequent work on the preparation of test specimens from the completed weldments for the performance of nondestructive and mechanical tests, provided the manufacturer or contactor accepts full responsibility for the work. 4.13 Previous Qualification Records. At the Engi- neer's discretion, evidence of previous qualification of the WPSs to be employed may be accepted. The acceptability of qualifcation to other standards #s the Ei ‘ncer’s responsibility to be exercised based on the specific stnietures and service conditions. The provisions of AWS B2.1:2005, Standard for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification, nity be used for the qualification of WPSs and personnel. However, in instances ‘when the provisions of AWS B2.f:2005 and AWS DL.6/ ‘Crea renga eae D1.6M:2007 are in conflict, AWS DI.S/D.6M:2007 shall take precedence. 4.1.4 WPS Variables. A writen, qualified WPS estb- lishes the allowabte ranges for essential variables, The WPS is intended to be used to qualify welders and welding operators and provide direction for the welder and welding operator in the performance of production weldments. 4.1.5 Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). A POR, is @ record which contains the actual variables used to weld a test specimen, This record also documents the destuctive and nondestructive (est results and the cert- fying organization. 4.1.6 Position of Welds, All welds that will be encountered in actual construction shall be classified a5 at, bor- izonial, vertical, or overhead in accordance with the definition of welding positions (see Figures 4.1 and 4.2, ‘as applicable). 4.1.7 Complete Joint Penetration Weld Qualification Limitatious, Qualification of WPSs for CIP groove ities forall posi- sat! also qualify for plate and vice versa. Qualification of a CIP -roove weld qualifies fr all PIP groove welds, plug and sot, and fillet welds, Macroetch ests are still required to verify the design weld size and penetration for PJP and fillet welds (see 4.3.2 and 4.4). When backing is used, it shall be of a type compatible with the base metal and the ‘weld meta 4.18 Partial Penetration Groove Weld Qualification Limitations. Qualification of WPSs for PIP groove ‘welds in any position listed in 4.1.9 qualifies fr ll posi- tlons. PIP groove WPSs qualified on pipe shall also gual- ity for plate and vice versa. Qualification ofa PIP groove Weld qualifies for all PIP groove welds, plug and slot welds, and filet welds 4.1.9 Test Positions. See Figure 4.3 for test positions for ‘groove and fillet welds in plate, pi i B(CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION 4.1.10 Mechanteal Testing of Welds. Testing may be performed per AWS B4.0-98 (B40M:2000), Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds. Howeves, instances when the provisions of AWS B4.0-98 (B40 2000) and AWS DI.6/D1.6M:2007 are in conflict, AWS ‘D16IDI.6M:2007 shal take precedence. 4.2 Essential Variables for WPS Qualification 4.2.1 Changes to Essential Variables. Any change to the vaciables sct forth in Table 4.1 shall be considered essential changes and shall require the qualification of a ‘new WPS. When a combination of welding processes is ‘used, the variables applicable to each process shall apply. 4.3 WPS Qualification Requirements 43.1 CIP. Groove Welds. The type and number of test specimens that must be tested to qualify a WPS are shown in Table 42 together with the range of thickness that is qualified for use in construction. The range is based on the thickness of the test plat. pipe, or tubing ‘used in making the qualification. The locations of test specimens are show in Figure 4.4. 43.2 PIP Groove Welds 43.2.1 The type and number of test specimens that ‘must be used to qualify a WPS are shown in Table 4.2, as applicable. A sample weld shall be made using a type of | groove design to be used in construction, except the depth of the groove need not exceed 1 in. (25 mmo). For the macroctch test required below. any type of steel listed in 1.2 may be wed 10 qualify the weld size on any steel ‘or combination of steels for that type. 43.22 In addition to the type and number of tests required by Table 4.2, as applicable, PIP groove welds shall receive thee macroetch cross-section specimens, which demonstrate that the designated weld size (obtained from the requirements of the WPS, ot design specification as applicable) are met. 49:23 If a WPS is not covered by 43.2.2 or ifthe welding conditions do not meet a prequalified status, or if they bave not been used and tested for a CIP weld in a ‘bur joit, then a sample joint must be prepared to make a racroetch test specimen to determine the weld size of| the join. After welding, she excess material is machined ‘off on the 100t side of the joint to the thickness ofthe Weld size. Tension and bend test specimens shall be prepared and tests performed, as required for CIP groove welds (see 45.) Pees SA a tan PART A ‘AWS D1.801.64:2007 43.24 When a WPS has been qualified for a CIP groove weld and is applied to the welding conditions of a PIP groove weld, tee macroetch cross-section test specimens are required, As an option extra length can be added to the first production weld to provide atleast (wo macroetch specimens. 44 Fillet Welds 441 The type and number of specimens that must be tested to qualify a WPS for filet welds are shown in ‘Table 4.2(B) and Figure 45. 441.1 A fillet welded T-jint, as show in Figure 4.5 for plate or pipe, as applicable, shall be made for each WPS to be used in construction. The weldment shall be cut perpendicular tothe direction of welding at locations, shown in Figure 4.5, as applicable, Specimens representing one face of each cut shall constitute a mactoetch test specimen and shall be tested in eccordance with 4.5 and ‘meet the requirements of 4.6.9. As an option, extra length can be added to the first production weld to provide atleast two macroetch specimens. 4.5 Tests Required for Groove and Fillet Welds 45.1 Groove Welds (CIP and PJP}. (See Table 4.2.) () Visual inspection (@) Reducedsccton tension est (3) Transverse guided bend test @) Longitudinal root and fsce guided bend test (optional, se 46.5), 45.2 Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds (1) Visual inspection (2) Macroetch test. 4.6 Types, Purposes, and Acceptance Criteria of Tests for WPS Qualification 4.6.1 Visual Examination, To determine that the final weld surfaces meet specified quality conditions. (All WPS qualification test specimens, except areas designated “discard” shal be visualy examined). 4.6.2 Acceptance Criteria (Visual Examination) (1) The weld shall be free of cracks.AWS D1.8/01.6M:2007 @) All craters shall be filled to the full cross section of the weld. () Undereut shall not exceed 1/32 in, [1 mmm]. Welé reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in, [3 mm}. (2) For CJP without steel backing, the woot of the weld shall be inspected, and there shall be no evidence of cracks, incomplete fusion, oF inadequate joint penetration. ‘A concave root surface is permitted provided the total ‘weld thickness is equal to or greater than that of the base metal (5) The maximum melethrough shall not exceed 1/8 in. Bom). 4.63 Transverse Gulded-Bend Tests (Root and Face- Bend or Side Bend). To determine the degree of soundness and ductility of CIP and PIP weld joints. (CIP and PIP WPS qualification tests shall be guided-bend tested). 4463.1 Each specimen shall be bent in ajig that meets the requirements shown in Figures 4.6 through 49, as applicable or is substantially in accordance with those figures, provided the maximum bend radius is not exceeded. The specimens shall be prepared for testing in accordance with Figures 4.16 through 4.18 and Figures 4.20 and 4.21 4.6.4 Longitudinal Bend Tests (Face and Root Guided Bend). When material combinations differ markedly in ‘mechanical properties (i.e. bending), as shown between wo base materials or between the weld metal and the bbase metal longitudinal bend tests may be used in lew of the transverse face and root-bend tests. The test speci- ‘mens shall be cut, removed and prepared for testing in accordance with Figures 4.4(B) and 4.19. 4.6.5 Acceptance Criteria (Roots, Face-, Side-, and Longitudinal-Bends) 4.6.5.1 The convex surface of the bend test specimens shall be visually examined for surface discontinuities. For aceeptance, the surface shall contain no discontin ties exceeding the following dimensions: (1) 178 in. (3 sum) measured in any direction on the surface, @) 3/8 in, (10 mm}—the sum of the greatest dimensions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/32 in. (1 mia). Dut less than or equal o 148 in. (3 mm]. @) V4 in, [6 mm}—the maximum comer crack, ‘except when the comer crack resulted from visible slag ‘inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, chen the 18 in, (3 mmo] maximum shall apply. Specimens with comer cracks exceeding 1/4 in. (6 mm] with no evidence ‘of slag inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities shall pana CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION be disregarded, anda replacement test specimen from the ‘original weldment shall be tested 46.6 Section Tension Test. To determine the ultimate strength of groove weld joins. 4.6.6.1 Before testing, the least width and correspond ing thickness of the reduced section shall be measured. ‘The specimen shall be ruptured under tensile load, and he maximum load shall be determined. The tensile strength shall be obtained by dividing the maximum load by the cross-sectional aren (see Figures 4.10 through 4.13). 4.6.7 Acceptance Criteria (Tension Test) 44674 The tensile strength shall be no less than the ‘minimum of the specified tensile range of the base metal used, except as noied in 4.6.7.2. In a case in which two ‘base metals of different minimum tensile strengths are used, the specified minimum tensile strength shall be the ‘weaker of the ewo, except as noted in 4.6.7.2, 44.7.2 When weld metal of lesser strength than the base metal is permitted, the range of the tensile strength shall be no les then the minimum of the specified tensile range of the filler metal 4468 Macroetch Test, The weld test specimen shall be prepared with a finish suitable for macroetch examination to determine the extent of fusion and unacceptable discontinuities, and t0 demonstrate that the designated weld size is obtained, 4.6.9 Acceptance Criteria (Macroetch Test) 469.1 The visually inspected macroeich test shall conform to the following: 1) PIP groove welds shall have the designed weld size. ) Fillet welds shall have fusion to the root of the Joint, bus not necessarily beyond, (3) Minimum leg size shall meet the specified filet weld ize, (4) The PIP groove welds and fillet welds shall have the following: (2) No cracks, (©) Through fusion between adjacent layers of ‘weld metals and between weld metal and base metal. (©) Weld profiles conforming to intended detail, but with none of the variations prohibited in Clause 5. (@) No undercut excveding 1/32 in. (1 mm}, 4.6.10 Retest. If any specimen fails to meet the vest requirements, two retess for the same type of specimen 8(CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION may be performed with specimens cut from the same \WPS qualification material, The results of both test spec mens shall meet the test requirements. For material over 1-172 in, {40 mm] dhick, failure of a specimen shall ‘require testing of all specimens of the same type from ‘wo additonal locations in the test material, 46.11 Overlay Requirements 4.6.11.1 The essential variables for all welding processes are described in Table 4.15. 4,6.11.2 See Figure 4.21 for overlay test weldment. 46113 See Table 4.7 for qualification thickness limitations, 46.114 The overlay WPS qualification test shall be subjected to the following tests: (1) Guided bend test (@) Penetrant examination @) Chemical analysis. 46.15 Acceptance Criteria (1) Guided bend test—no open discontinuity exceeding 18 in. (3 mm] measured in any direction on the convex surface shall be permitted in the overlay, and no open discontinuities exceeding 1/8 in. (3 ram] shall be permitted at the weld interface after bending. (2) Penetrant examination—the entire surface of the {est weldment shall be penetrant examined. No linear indication with major dimensions greater than 1/16 in. (2 mm) in a line separated by at least 1/16 in, [2 mai} shall be permitted, No more than three rounded indications with dimensions greater than 1/16 in, [2 mm} in @ line separated by a least 1/16 in, [2 mm). (3) Chemical analysis—the results of the required chemical analysis shail be within the range of analysis specified in the WPS (see Figure 4.22). Part B Performance Qualification Requirements for Welders and Welding Operators 4.7 General -1 Performance Qualification. Welders and welding ‘operators using the welding processes in Table 4.1 shall Ihave been qualified by the applicable tests as prescribed in this clause. The qualification tests described are spe- PARISASB AWS D1.60D1.5M:2007 cially devised tests to determine the welder or welding. ‘operator's ability t0 produce sound welds with a specific welding process. 4.72 Responsibility for Performance Qualification. The manufacturer or contractor shall conduct the test Tequited by this code to qualify welders and welding ‘operators. It is permissible, however, to subcontract any ‘orall ofthe work on the preparation of test materials for ‘welding and subsequent work on the preparation of test specimens from the completed weldments, performance of nondestructive and mechanical tests, provided the ‘manufacturer or contractor accepts full responsibility for the work, The purpose of this requirement is 19 ensure that the manufacturer or contractor has determined that their welders and welding operators using their WPSs are capable of developing the minimum requirements specified for an acceptable weldment. 4.73 Previous Qualification Records. At the Engi- neer’s discretion, properly documented evidetie of previous qualification of welders and welding operators to bbe employed may be accepted, provided the requirements of 4.7.9 are met. Welders and welding operators qualified by standard test to AWS B?.1:2005. Standard for Welding Procedure and Performance Quatificaion, a i in this code, 4.74 Qualification by WPS Qualification. The welder cor welding operator who performs the welding on the WPS qualification test coupons is also qualified within the limits of the performance qualification variables fined in Tables 4.3 and 44, 4.73 Base Metal. The base metal used shall comply ‘with 1.2, Qualification established with any one of these base metals shall be considered as qualification to weld any one of the base metals permitted by this code. For all types of welded joints, the length of the weld and dimensions of the base metal shall provide sufficient material for the test specimens required by this code, With the approval of the Engineer, performance qualification test coupons may be with any of the steels listed in AWS D1.1, Groups I or Hl Qualification established with any cone ofthese base metals shall be considered as qualification to weld any of de base metals permined by this code, 4.7.6 Joint Details. Performance qualification test on plate, pipe or tubing shall be in accordance with the joint tails prescribed by the WPS, 4.7.7 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by the manufacturer or contractor and shall be made available to those authorized to examine them. 4.7.8 Retest For Performance Qualification. In case 2 ‘Welder or welding operator fails (© meet the requirements 16AWS D18D1.6H:2007 of one or more test welds, a retest may be allowed under tho following conditio 47.8.1 Immediate Retest. An immediate retest may bbe made consisting of two welds of each type and position that the welder or welding operator failed. All retest specimens shall meet all the specified requirements. 4.782 Retest After Further Tratning or Practice. ‘A retest may be made, provided there is evidence that the welder or welding operator has had further taining or practice. A complete retest of the types and positions failed shall be made, 4.7.9 Period of Effectiveness, ‘The welder or welding ‘operator's qualification as specified by this code shall be considered as remaining in effect indefinitely unless: (0) the welder or welding operstor has not welded ‘with a process during 2 period exceeding six months, his ‘qualifications for that process shall terminate, or; (2) there is a specific reason to question a welder's abiliy. 4.7.9.1 In the case of 4.7.9(1), the requalification test shall be in any position on pipe, tube or plate, and any thickness or diameter. 47.9.2 In the case of 4.7.9(2), the requirements of 4.7.82 shall apply. 427.10 Test Specimens For Welder and Welding Oper- ator Qualification 47.10.1 The welder or welding operator qualification test shall conform to the thickness, diameter, and position limitations of Tables 4.3 and 4.4. For removal of est specimens, see Figures 4,14, 4.15, and 4.23. 4.7.1 Test Positions For Groove (G) and Fillet (F) Welds, See Table 4.4 for production welding positions (qualified by test positions. 4.7.12 Tack Welding. It should be noted that this code does not recognize tack welders as such tack welding to this code shall be performed only by welders or welding ‘operators qualified to the requirements of ANSUAWS DIG. 4.8 Limitation of Variables for Welder Performance Qualification 4.8.1 Process. A welder shall be qualified for each process used. GMAW.-S (short circuit transfer) shal require a sepatate qualification from GMAW (globular or spray transfer). parr CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION 48.2 Blectrodes. A welder qualified for welding with an electrode identified by F-number in Table 4.5 shall be considered qualified to weld with another elecirode in the same F-number designation using the same process. 4.8.3 Electrode and Shielding Medium. A welder qualified with an approved electrode and shielding medium ‘combination shall be considered qualified 10 veld with the same electrode F-number as clasified in Table 4.5, ‘and shielding medium combination for the process used inthe qualification test. 4.84 Position. A change in the position of welding to cone for wich the welder is not qualified shall requize ‘equalification (see Table 4.4). 4.85 Diameter Limits. A change from one diameter ‘grouping as shown in Table 4.4 to another shall require requalification, 48.6 Weld Progression. When the direction of welding progression is vertical, « change in the direction of welding shall require requaification, 48.7 Backing. The omission of backing or a backing gas in CIP welds welded from one side shall require requalification, 4.8.8 Weld Deposit. A change in the weld deposit thickness forthe process qualified, as prescribed in Table 4.3. shall require requaification. 4.8.9 The addition or deletion of a consumable insert in a CIP, single side, open root weld joint shall require requalification, 4.9 Limitation of Variables for Welding Operator Performance Qualification 49.1 Hlectrode and Shielding Medium. A welding ‘operator qualified with an approved electrode and shielding medium combination shall be considered qualified to weld with the same electrode F-number as classified in Table 4.5 and shielding medium combination for the pro- ‘cess used in the qualification west. 49.2 Extent of Qualification Using Multiple Elec- ‘trodes, A welding operator qualified to weld with multiple electrodes shall be qualified to weld with a single electrode, but not vice versa. 4.9.3 Extent of Qualification for Semiautomatic Weld~ ‘ing, Welders qualified for semiautomatic are welding shall be considered qualified for single electrode machine welding in the same process(es) subject co the limitations of 4.8. The welding operators should receive nCLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION training and demonstrate their ability to make satisfactory welds. 4.94 Position. A change in the position of welding to ‘one for which the welding operatar is not already qualified shall require requalification. 4.10 Types, Purposes, and Acceptance Criteria of Tests and Examinations for Welders and Welding Operators 4.10 Visual Examination, To determine that the final weld surfaces meet specified quality conditions. All pe formance qualification test coupons (except areas desis nated “idiscard”) shall be visually examined. 40.1.1 Acceptance Criteria (Visual Examination) (1) The wetd shall be free of eracks. @) Weld reinforcement shall not exceed U8 in, (3 mm). @) When accessible, the root of the weld shall be inspected, and there shall be no evidence of cracks, incomplete fusion, or insdequate joint penetration. A ‘concave root surface is permitted. provided the total weld thickness is equal to or greater than that of the base metal | Undercutshall not exceed 1/32 in [1 mam 4.10.2 Guided-Bend Test, To determine the degree of and ductility of groove-weld joims. (Groove ‘weld performance qualification west shall be guided-bend tested) 4.10.2.1 Type and Number of Guided-Bend Tests. ‘The type and numberof test specimens that mast be tested 10 qualify a welder or welding operator by guided-bend testing are shown in Table 4:3, together with the range of thickness thar is qualified by the thickness of the test plates, pipe or tubing used in making the qualification, 4.10.2.2 Substitution of RT for Guided-Bend Tests. Radiographic testing of the test weld may be used atthe contractor's option in lieu of mechanical testing with the exception for joints welded by GMAW-S (which must be bend tested). 4.10.2.3 Guided -Bend Test Specimens. For mechanical testing, guided-bend «est specimens shall be pre~ pared by cutting the test specimen as shown in Figure PRAT AWS D1.8/DI.6N42007 be prepared for testing in accordance with Figures 4.16 through 4.20. 4.10.24 Acceptance Criteria for Guided-Bend Tests. The convex surface of the bend test specimens shall be visually examined for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the surface shall contain no discontinui- exceeding the following dimensions: (1) 18 in, (3 mm] measured in any direction on the surface. @) 3/8 in, (10 mm]—the sum of the greatest dimensions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/32 in. (1 mm], bout less than or equal to 1 in [3 mm]. @) U4 in, [6 mmm|—the maximum comer erack, ‘except when the comer creck resulted from visible slag inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the 128 in. [3 mm] maximum shall apply. Specimens with ‘comer eracks exceeding 1/4 in. [6 mm] with no evidence (of slag inclusion or other fusion type diseontiauties shall be disregarded, and a replacement est specimen from the ‘original weldment stall be tested. Failure of this specimen shall requize requalification, 4.10.3 Radiography Testing, To obtain a volumetric ‘evaluation ofthe test specimen. 4103.1 IF radiography is used in Hew of the prescribed bend test, the weld reinforcement need not be {ground oF otherwise smoothed for inspection unless its surface imregularities or junctures with the base metal would cause objectionable weld discontinuities to be ‘obscured inthe radiograph {see 4.10.5). If the backing is removed for radiographic testing, the root shall be ‘ground flush with de base metal, 4.103.2 The radiographic procedure and technique shall be in accordance with the requirements of Clause 6 ‘One (1) in, (25 mm} at each end ofthe length of the test plate shall be excluded from evaluation. 4.10.33 Acceptance Criteria, For acceptable qualification, the weld, as revealed by the radiographs, shall conform to the requirements of 6.28.2. 4.10.4 Macroetch Test. To determine complete fusion ‘and unacceptable discontinuities. (Fillet welds shall be rmacroetch tested for performance qualification.) 4104.1 The test specimens shall be prepared with a finish suitable for macroeich examination. suitable solution shall be used to give a clear definition of the weld (see Annex G). 4.10.4.2 Acceptance Criteria (Miacroetch Test). For 44, whichever is applicable, o form specimens approxi- __accepuable qualification, the test specimens shail con- ‘mately rectangular in eross section, The specimens shall form othe following requirerments: 8AWS D1 8/01.8M2007 (1) Visual examination of the weld shall show (a) Complete fusion. (b) Fillet welds shall have complete fusion to the Dottom of the joint but not necessarily beyond. (©) Nocracks. (The actual weld size shall be equal to or greater than the specified weld size (@) The weld shall not have any concavity or converity greater than 1/16 in. {2 mmm 4.105 Fillet Weld Break Test. The entire length of the fillet weld shall be examined visually and then a 6 in, [150 mm] long specimen (see Figure 45) or a quater- section ofthe pipe fillet weld assembly shall be loaded in sucha way thatthe root ofthe weld isin tension. At least ‘one welding start and stop shall be located within the test specimen, The load shall be increased or repeated until the specimen fractures or hends fat upon itself 4.10.5.1 Acceptance Criteria for Fillet Weld Break ‘Test. To pass the visual examination prior to the break test, the weld shall present a reasonably uniform appearance and shall be free of overlap, cracks, and undercut in excess of the requirements of 6.28.1. There shall be no porosity visible on the weld surface. ‘The broken specimen shall pass if: (2) The specimen bends flat upon itself, or (2) The fillet weld, if fractured, has a fracture surface showing complete fusion to the root ofthe joint with no PART CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION inclusion or porosity larger than 3/32 in, [2.5 mm} in sreatest dimension, and ) The sum of the greatest dimensions of all inchu- sions and porosity shall not exceed 38 in, [10-mmn] in the 6.n, [150 mam} tong specimen, 4.11 Overlay Requirements 4.11.1 The limitation of variables of 48 and 4.9 shall apply for welders and wetding operators. respectively, except welders or welding operators shall be qualified {or unlimited maximum deposited thickness. 4.11.2 See Figure 4.21 for overlay test weldment, 4.11.3 See Table 4.7 for qualification thickness limitations. 4.114 The overlay performance qualification west shall be subjected to the following tests: (1) Visual examination (@) Guided bend test (3) Penetrant examination 4.13.5 Acceptance Criteria (1) Visual examination, There shell be no cracks. trapped slag, visible porosity, or incomplete fusion, The appearance of the weld shal satisfy the qualifier thatthe ‘welder is skilled in using the process and procedure spec- iffed forthe test (@) Guided-bend tests 502 4.6.11 4(1)) (3) Penetrant examination [see 4.6.11.4(2)} pCLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION AWS D1.8/D1.6442007 Table 4.4 WPS Qualification Variables (see 4.2.1) ‘SMAW] GTaw [Gmaw] Fcaw | saw | PAW 10 Base Meta 111A change inte base ea group shown in Table 32 or ta base xTx x metal type if unlisted (Table 3.2) 2A change inbase metal thickness qualiiod yer Table 42 x x [x 20 Filer Metal 2A Achange from one F Number tony ob F Nombe or any By] ‘metal not listed in Table 4.5. x x x x x x 22 change fram ove A‘Numbertoanj oer ANenbercrwactem|y | x | x |x |x | x iy which canst be clastiid as an A‘Number ited in Table 46 23 A change inthe fax wade name ¥ i 24 A change from one flux ade name-lecrode combicaion any x er flux wade same lecrode combination ‘25 _A change indiameter of electrodes) when using an alloy Mux x | x 2.6_A change inthe umber of elecwodes used x |x [x {xf x 227° The adton or deleon of supplemental powdered or granulr il Sy seat ._ ZB_A change from solid or metal cored to ux cored ar vce versa. x |x [x |x i {29 The addon or delean of filler metal x x OA change wo mbular Nx coved or powdered meio vice versa x [x 1 M0. Blearteal 3L_A change inthe ype of welling curent (AC orDC).orpolay. | X | X [| X | & | X 1 32 & change inthe mode of wets wransfer rom globular, spray, and x pulse spre wanafer to shor cre ranafr cr vce versa ‘40 Positions ‘41 Inverical wetting, a change in he progression spesinedtorany | | y | x | x x pas from upwatd to dounivard or vie versa ‘50 Groove Welds 54 Te sttionsdoisnotwomeaierenisarmontning meal! x Tx | x | x | x | x (60 Postweld Heat TreatmeaPreheat {5 Tas lon or eledon of postweta heat wean *[>x]x)x [x |x {62 Tes: coupons receiving a postweld hea! eaten which be upper ransfonmadontemperauseis exceeded. tur mazimumquaiied | | y | y | y | y | x thickness for production welds is 11 times tho thickness ofthe est coupe 3A decrease of mae han 1O0°F (35°C in te probe emperors ‘ualiied. The minimum temperature for weldingsallbe specitee | x | x | x | x | x | x inthe WES 7, Shelding Gos 7A change from single sbielding gas wo any oer single shielding gus or 0 mite of shielding gues, ora change in specified 8 ‘esceniage compasiion of ling ga mitre, or omision oF ‘Bieking gas 72 The adiion or deletion of a ilding eas 80 Se steeuomumenmyrun emerANS 01.6104 6042007 (CLAUSE 4. QUALIF;CATION Table 4.18 (Supplement to Tabte 4.1) Overlay Essential Variables for all Processes (see 4.6.11.1) SMAW | craw [GMAW Faw] saw | PAW TO Base Metals TI A change in he base metal group shown in Table 3.2 oF n base ‘metal ype if unlisted (Table 3.2) 2 A change in ase metal thickness qualified pet Table 42 20. Filer Metal 2. A change from one F-Number to any other F Number ort any filer] ‘metal not isto in Table 4.5 » * * 22 A change from one A-Number o any other A-Number or ta chem- [sry which canuot be classified as an A-Number listed in Table 46 23, A change ine fax wade name 2A A change from one flux rade name clecwode combination any cher fx trade name-electode combinstion 2S_A change in diameter of alectode(s) when using an alloy fuk 26 A change in the umber of elecwotes wsed 2.7 The addiion or deletion of supplemenal powdered or granular filer metal 2.8 A change from solid or metal cored to flux cored or vice versa 2.9 A change to mibular fx cored or powdered metal or vie versa 2.10. change from maliple layer to single layer, orreduetion inthe ‘umber of layers * ot |oe)>e] oe foe foe] oe foe] oe 30 Blectrieal 3.1” A change inthe type of welding curent (AC oF DO), oF polar, 532A change Inthe mode of meta sansfer from globular, spray, and pulsed spray transfer to shor circuit wausfet, ot vice veces bd 33, An increase of more than 10% in the welding curent beyond ie range specified ‘40 Positions 4.1 a verdcal welding, a change in the progression specified for any Ps ftom upward co dosnwand or vice versa ‘50. Postweld Heat TreatmentPreheat 5.1 The addition or deletion of postweld heat Geaument ‘52 Test coupons receiving a postweld eat treatment in which wh upper ‘sansformation iemperate is exceeded, the maximum qualified ‘hikes for production welds is 1.1 times the thickness ofthe test ‘coupon 53 A decrease of more than 1OO°F (55°C) in he preheat temperature ‘qualified. The minimum termperature for welding shal be specified inthe WPS 60 Shielding Gas ‘611A change from a single ielding gas to any oer single shielding £85 oo aire of shielding pases, ora change in specified percentage composition of shielding gas mixture or omission of| shielding gas ‘62 The addition or deletion of shielding gas‘CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.6/01.66:2007 ‘_PQR Type, Number of Test Specimons, and ange of Thickness Qualified (see 4.3.2.1) i (A) Groove Welds: 5 ‘Renge of Thlekness Quali. tat “Type and Number of Tests Required " Thickness T of Test Pate or ‘Macroeich for Pipe Wall. ia (me Min Max Weld Sie (EP _Tewsimm Side Bend Fice Bend Root Bend 116038 2W O,incwsive 6G) oT 3 2 2 2 OrerMeoaM ove 10020 ——aN81S) aT 3 2 * 2 e $34 an over (20a ove] 3619] United 2 4 Parl oi pexeraton groove wel eal. Fear (side bend arto face en 149 700 ends, (B) Filet Welds (ee 44) Sizes Qualified Macrocich Test Tea Specimens Required PlawPipe Speciment Filer Weld Size __Numberof Welds per WPS (468469) Thickness" Filler Weld Sire Single piss, mar set ineseh posidontobeured 3 faces Unlimited — Me, tested single piu Tie _ be Wed inconsiuction 5s and smaller ‘ete 4.5) “Mtiple pas, min size w 1 in each positon to be wad fees ‘nimi Min exes mips ‘bud in consiution pas and smaler Single pss, max size Vinesch postlonio eused 2 aces except for4F Unlimited Max. tex sagle Pipe Tues _be sed in constuction GeeTabledty and SFA feces req) pass and smaller ewe 4.5) “hip pass, min size nach pon o be wed 3 faces (except for 4FUnlimited Min, ested multe ‘ested in contimetion GeeTabledty) and Sha faces req'd) pass and lager {Te aininum iickoess qualified 6 UB i. ma] Al eld! et pigs aud pts ball be willy inepeced pr 462 * See Table 43 for smal pipe eter il weld te.AWS D1 8101.6M:2007 CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION Table 4.3 Performance Qualification—Thickness Limits and Test Specimens (see 4.7.4) “THiskowss( of Qualified “Type and Number of Tests Required sited Weld end Tess)** seins 0 of Dero: (Guided Bend Tess Test Coupon, imum Type of Foot? in (ma) in (mm]_Maximum.in, _Side Bend _Face Bend _Root Bend Groore Upio FEO), inchswe 16 PI 2 = T T Groove (Over 38 (10) but 10 2 - 1 1 es han 34 (20) Grcore 34 20) and over 1B(3}__Max.tobewelded 2 = = To ually for positions SC a6 6G, ro rout-bend and tw fce-bsd pecizens,o Tou sle-bendspemzens as wppiabls Welder qaiffestons nied 10 mais WPS Lins. See Figures 4.4, 415, and 4.23 fr spect loelions, “Groove Weld ess qualify filet welds witha the Umiation of Tables 43 and 'Noe-Two arte ppe ex coupons of itera hekeses and llferet dares may be used deme tho weld ntl hcknes saad 28d Mt wicknece may beappled to prauetion welde tothe sales pipe dameser for which he welder qualified ‘Small Pipe Diameter Fille-Weld Test Ouiside Diameter of Test Coupon, in (um) Maximum Outside Diameter Qualified, in (mm) ‘Thickness Qualified! ess han 125) ‘Size welded ro) 125) t0 fess than 2-748 (73)° 105) and over atl 2.1/8 073) and over 2718 (73) and over All 5277803) OD. sequivalen oNPS210 Gp * Welder quaifcations isd to minimum WPS ls, cy ia nen nh ts RNa?(CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION AWS D1.6/01.6M2007 Table 4.4 Performance Quallfication—Position and Diameter Limitations (see 4.7.4) Plate and Pipe Over 2¢in. Pipes 24m. Weld Poston? {600 mm) 0. 160mm) 0.0, Plate and Pipe Fillet 16 F P F 16 Ru Pat ao 36 EY r RiLy Flate—Groove a6 Fo P RO 36 and 4G Fe ‘al 26,36, and 46 ai Bw al iF = — P 2 = = Fe Phte—File ae = = Rive ae = = FLO BR and = = ‘ale 16 F F Rit 26 Ra Rue Ra Pipe—Croove 56 FY.0 RV,0° al co ‘al ‘ale at 2G and 50 a ale All IF = = F oF = = Ru Pipe—Fie, aR = = RH F = = Fito. Ey = = all * Postion of wang ie Borzoi Ve Vere = Oversd 2 Pige 227 7 an] NPS sd oer shee ‘sie Dimas Chale Fa ‘Test WeldnestPpe Disc fe Growre ier Test (70D. Sir welled over “a 1 oskhougb2-78 73} OB. 1 (25 and over all Ove2.78 731 2278 781904 over a Bue‘AWS D1.6/D1.6142007 CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION Table 4.5 F-Numbers—Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (see 4.9.1) ‘Stainless Steels (Fete, Mavtesiie, Austenitic, and Duplex) = "AS Speci Nabe : 7 ELAS f Abdo tan sens dpe f s /AS.4 austenitic and duplex. i 6 ASO, A518, AS.28 6A 6 asiaste Table 4.6 A-Numbers—Classification of Stainless Stee! Weld Meta! Analysis for WPS Qualification” (see Table 4.1) ime _TeetWoget eee Tate Cwonte-Mwenie OS TOSS OR ae ; Greien-Fere 015 1Mdoano) 400 tem 3 : Cromiun-Nicket «015 es03n00 400 TsIsm 2401.0 2 Gueniun-Neckel 030 25003000 400 15003700 250100 ta i ofan ‘Naber designation, te aowiaalchencal compotion ofthe weld deposi sal be Indicated on the WPS and onthe POR. Table 47 Thickness Limitations for Overlay WPS and Welding Operator Performance Qualification (see 4.6.1.3) ‘A. Overlay WPS ‘Thickness of Qualified Base Meta, in. (run ‘Test Weldment Base Metal Thickness (1) n(n) Min, Max ingest <1 As} T ‘Untied 1125) and over 1125) Untied ', Welding Operator Performance for Overlay ‘Qualifies for ‘Base Metal Thickoes, in. (nam) ‘Weld Meat Thickness “Test Weldmest Base Metal ‘Tickets (Pin (md Min, Max Min Max inepyst <1 as T ative Leslee ws Uainied Mir aey_——_ Dd sematangmumentee, .enmuit ranseaseterne aad A NE an ea 98 (OTP 398) SpPAg 2A0014 Jo suoNsog—T"p any (0) vopiod eaverejs a way vossoup oso) u painszoU s1PIOK ox }0 628) ‘2190 veges jo o(fus oun 170410 Bujooy LeU "soseeI2u) oBUE Cire UA YIU Ul Te) 8) 120489 vopDOND 4) suid Aigeyenu| cae} ouy Jo ojo! J (0) wosod eaueleies OU} “ojo oan fo xe ovp uBnona seeTEd \olah pls eu 0 e095 eosbronta oc) !a;pUBdved Our = Aa peuIWEleD | eDe) aly 7 LOAML Jo OUR eUL C “ado eoubinjs [ean ou PAUHO aud sovesea4 jOTIOY OY LOH) posnedoU ey ste o UoNeUU CU “E ‘oNEepEuEO Lop Pam ei mo}oq |] WORE] SKE S| UEP aoLeejaeIUCALOY eut “L 280i0N OBE 8.0 080.08 3B 092 01,08 coves a owen i 0g 008 : op re 0981.0 9 peswero, : 0820102 vom ‘ast ot 00 s0.0 8 ewoayo4 012 008 sao v or ES) amy 0 woouou, eouasey wae vomited ‘pray aroar5 Jo SuORISOG 6 UORERARL, SLAM Sixy anna WOULNSA, r ‘OHOd SLIWIT SIey 2002: W9'ba/8'L0 SikY Nouvolsrno"¥ asmv19‘AWS D1.6/01.6412007 CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION | aug cis | ron ‘AXIS LIMITS FOR D Axis urs FORARB oc. Le a HORIZONTAL PLANE, Postion Fat Horigantat ory ‘Ovenosd c O10 80" nae > 7B Ie or 125" 10 235° Vertical E 80" 1080" ‘0°40 360" Figure 4.2—Positions of Fillet Welds (see 4.1.6) ‘Erna seemed wa an tm forkeamsewee nanreouCLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION PLATES HORIZONTAL, ‘AWS D1 5/01.6§2007 PLATES VERTICAL; ‘AXIS OF WELD HORIZONTAL (A) TEST POSITION 16 (B) TEST POSITION 26 PLATES VERTICAL; PLATES HORIZONTAL AXIS OF WELD VERTICAL {C) TEST POSITION SG (D) TEST POSITION 4a (A) Groove Welds in Plate—Test Positions Figure 4.3—Test Positions of Welds (see 4.1.9) 88. SeanaAWS 01.601 6442007 ob PIPE OR TUBING HORIZONTAL AND ROTATED. WELD FLAT (218%), DEPOSIT FILLER METAL AT OR NEAR THE TOP, (A)TEST POSITION 1@ ROTATED a PIPE ORTUBING HORIZONTAL FIXED (216*) AND NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING. (WELD FLAT, VERTICAL, OVERHEAD. (e) TEST PosiTiON sa. ‘CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION PIPE OR TUBING VERTICAL AND [NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING. WELD HORIZONTAL (215°). {B)TEST POSITION 26 1515" 45°35" LS PIPE OR TUBING INCLINATION FIXED (45* 25°) AND NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING, (©) TEST POSITION 5G (B) Groove Welds in Pipe or Tubing —Test Positions Figure 4.3 (Continued)—Test Positions of Welds (see 4.1.9) 89(CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION AWS D1 6/01 64-2007 AXIS OF WEL THROAT OF WELO HORIZONTAL AXIS OF WELD HORIZONTAL ~ NOTE: ONE PLATE MUST BE HORIZONTAL (A) FLAT POSITION 1F (@) HORIZONTAL POSITION 2F ‘ARIS OF WELD VERTICAL ‘AXIS OF WELD HORIZONTAL NOTE! ONE PLATE MUST BE HORIZONTAL {C\VERTICAL POSITION 3 (D) OVERHEAD POSITION 4F (C)—Fillet Welds in Plate—Test Positions Figure 4.3 (Continued)—Test Positions of Welds (see 4.1.9) 90‘AWS 01.6/01.6442007 (TEST POSITION 17 FOR FLAT POSITION. (ROTATED) (B)TEST POSITION 2F FOR HORIZONTAL POSITION (IKED) (O)TEST POSMON aE FOR OVERHEAD POSITION (FIED) ‘CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION Co I (c) Test posimion 2F FOR HORIZONTAL POSITION (ROTATED) aa ( (E)TEST posITION 5F FOR MULTIPLE POSITION (FIRED) (D)—Fillet Welds in Pipe or Tubing—Test Positions Figure 4.3 (Continued)—Test Positions of Weltis (see 4.1.9) 16 (LEP 998) adie 20 aA |e UD Uo SuaumToadg ys04, Jo MonEDOT—Fp ams a1e]g—suoumpodg asreasuwsy YOd (¥) (wu oz} u 01 fu 911 ge woy sessaurona 0) sn 6a ose AeA MONI [wae 02" 9 J6N0 OTIC 10 “yoru fue o2) Uwe 2 [uns 2-4 91 etd 10s 30510 SHI GuVOSIO tt Nanso3dS ONae 301s anioaus ove 3015 == Gisaseee — I] NaMIOadS NOISNSLNOWOR6 aaoNaTH 's081d SIH Quvosia, sore wasan'sa sv Nawioads GN38 100u IaWWO3d5 NOISNE: "2Oala SiH Quvasia | prea os os of Nouyoun¥no F SenoAWS D1.6/D1.54:2007 (CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) —> DISCARD THIS PIECE SST Pra == LONGITUDINAL FACE BEND SPECIMEN 6 (150) MIN, 2 (60) MIN. 5 (150) MIN. 30 (760) ha. 6 50), 2 (80) MIN, 6 (150) MIN, [LO “biseanpriag rice) | + 0a win —-}- rans —-] All mensions in inches [nilimatars). (B) PQR Longitudinal Plate Specimens—Plate Order of removal of test specimens from welded test plate for Iongitudinal bend tests. Figure 4.4 (Continued) —Location of Test Specimens on PQR Plate or Pipe (see 4.3.1) 93 ‘Sten atone en eae amSou CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION ‘SECTION TENSILE FACE, Root: foot BEND TNHORIZONTAL FIXED POSTION} 7 XN FACE Root BEND BEND REDUCED SECTION TENSILE or pie 1/15 I. (2 et 4 in [20 mm] wall ickness, AVIS 01.8/01.64:2007 REOUCED, SECTION TENSILE HORIZONTAL PLANE {WHEN PIPE IS WELDED “INHOAIZONTAL SIDE. Sipe BEND. BEND SECTION TENSILE For pipe ovar 24 in (20 mm] wall thickness. May also bo ‘used for hickrsses from 38 in (10 en 0 ¢4in. [20 mm. (C) POR Pipe Specimens Figure 4.4 (Continued)—Location of Test Specimens on PQR Plate or Pipe (see 4.3.1) 4AWS D1.61.64%2007 ‘CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION 41n.[190 | J ovscaro Sa siatsomm un LA wt a ten. 00 mnt waengeron rest K Ke ice MIM MUTTPLE We = wea SioLE use FuLeY WELD Pass MILLET WELD in. 160 m4 seo seo a S7 ‘oneTAUCTION eonsreucrion DETAIL A—PLATE TO PLATE ASSEMBLY INCHES MILLIMETERS Wels wed Ske Tame, Terns Ske Tmint Tein a6 a2 a8 5 2 5 ue a4 us ° 2 6 3n8 1 ane a 2s 8 38 1 3a 10 ea 10 1 1 a 2 Ey 2 8 1 8 6 ea 6 a 1 wa 20 2 20 >a 1 1 >20 Fa 2s "Winer the maximum plato trieknoss used in production I oss than the value shown inthe tabi, the maximum {hlokness ofthe prodetion places may be aubstivtad for T1 and T2,, Figure 4.5—PQR Fillet Weld Specimens (see 4.4.1) 95(CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.6/D%.6M:2007 DIRECTION OF BEND MACRO SPECIMEN \V4 SECTION BEND/EREAK WAXIMUM FILLET SIZE = [START AND STOP OF WELD NEAR CENTER OF BEND T= WALL THICKNESS DETAIL B—PIPETO PLATE ASSEMBLY DIRECTION OF BEND 7 1H SECTION BENDIBREAK sem MAXIMUM FILLET SIZE © 1 ‘T= WALL THICKNESS OF LOWER PIPE in Tet 16m. (2 mam] MIN 78 mn} ‘START AND STOP OF WELD ot NEAR CENTER OF BEND DETAIL ¢—PIPETO PIPE ASSEMBLY Notes: 1. Ener pipe-plate or pips-to-pipe may be used as shown. Al dimanstons in Inches (rkmeters, Figure 4.5 (Continued)—PQR Fillet Weld Specimens 96‘AWS 01,8101.542007 CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION FIMIN = 274 in (20 mm] Lam, 2A + 2(7 + 16 ln 2 rom) Notas: 1. Ethor hartonod and groasad shouldars or hardoned roller re to rotate cll be used. 2, The shoulders of rots shall have a minimum bearing longi of 2 tn (60 mm] fx placement of Ue spectmans. 5. Tho shoulders o ears ena oigh encugh above ne Bolom of he astng¥Q so tate specimon wil clear th shouldor or roller: when the plunger isin he low pesto. 4, Tho plunger sallbe tite wih an epproprita base and provision for altachment toto tstng machina and shall be designe to mine Imive defection or misalignment. 6, Tho shoulogr ar valle supporia may be made adjustable in the horzontal recon so that specons of varlous thickness may be tested inthe sare ig. 6. Tho hour oot uppers ohat bd to abesa dasigrad to mana he shutors or ors contre ae gna with pact the plngr, end minimiza dflacion or misaigrmant 7. The plunger rls, A, shall ba detarmined from ine nomogram In Flute 48, Figure 4.6—Bottom Ejecting Guided-Bend Test Jig . - 7 ‘Sipe vm sr we tenn Sirhan hoees saeCLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION ‘TAPPED HOLE To SUIT TESTING MACHINE: {as neauneD f= AS REQUIREO———| PLUNGER MEMBER, 914 to ng |-a-+| ‘AeI8.01.6101.644:2007 12 in SHOULDER HARDENED. 1 | 127 mm AND GREASED Hen ‘9/4 in. [19 mam) z yea (28.6 min) 6.34 in, ca am di, [6.4 mm} Sart In. 1133.4 em] HARDENED ROLLERS 7 1-12 in (984 ram) ian, IN DIAMETER MAY [60.8 mm 19 mam) BE SUSSTITUTED 13-708 in bie Taiz [1905 m—a]_ | FOR JIG [6.4 mn] EMBER 9 In [228.6 mm} SHOULDERS: ‘Spasiman Trikes, Bio Radius, D in. em In em in mm 3 35 wa 190) 7 302 T or Bate BaTei6 Figure 4.7—Bottom Guided-Bend Test Jig (see 4.6.3.1) ec SSS tte 98‘AWS D1.6°D1.6:2007 CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION NG 11.6 em) ROLLER ANY DIAMETER T = SPECIMEN THICKNESS A WELD Notes: 1. Rass A shall be as specified, or as determined tm the nomogram In Figure 48, Dimensions not shown ar tne option of he de- yes exop tae nium wid lhe compencis chal be 20 rn. 2, Ils essen to havo adoquate righty £0 that to [fg wll nol deflect during tating. Th spacimon chat ho fim clamped on ona on ‘Sotnat i does ot si curing th bending operation. 13, Test speci.ens shallbe removed frome ig whan the over olla traversed 180" ora he staring point. Figure 4.8—-Alternative Wrap-Around Guided-Bend Test Jig (see 4.6.3.1)oS eESA renner oot ae (Te'9"p 995) supSY pusg MUAY Supoa/9g 40) uTEOMION—F'p Bandy "402 19 woqevoye wo ue yjou Au2 56 pesn 09 Aew UoRMBUcTa soz EpMaId i Uy SB ‘eEp UIMCCLIOY ain Bune LOUM “E {ta 9-w pune pe pea (0) 2 voqesuag (e -twu yol-u pois sseusong uauneds ‘mogo| $8 | UaueimeDeus jo f2einome aaenbeu “2 ‘oye peads ‘o}qrapdde ou 2 ‘woudbe oxqupene ‘seouujezoroUL ou Aa poNEDp se exeqe UoND abs! OXY IM eNyEA Aue 99 Aes su ‘Setu UeUEds ex roranoH UAH OL] uO ARUN 0g ws} FUER eu 1} SUELDEGS iq TELA PapueLLLOSS AIoUeE 6} '510N, {wu zz] v 272.04 pInom Lope “np puag ewrudosdée Ln eULEIp ct popvERD AUR Ed rk) ecoun vaonteq wae som 9 Ra unl 14] 1/26] UOW|20dS oJ "40z Fo uONeBuOye UnurTIW © EONGDIODUESY O}4UEKS y IsuaLaMrmind aNyS3HON NI SNOISNaWIG TY 1L— relouse1 ‘eel ex —J helover] (2) xe — (ews tex) 98 —J busie weezn—f busi tox1xe— [uu] u'SSaNHOWHL NBAIDAES [uu] S3HOMI € ‘sriave avaa (love m— isle @an— fain] ° 2002 010010 SHY Nouyalanyno asnv19AWS 01.6/01.64:2007 (CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION , a, ee” v We 94 I (20.m MIN. Le | Le vain 2in, [6 mm) 14 in (6 mm 150 mmm {Sm 2 \ ‘T= SPECIMEN THICKNESS OR THICKNESS OF TEST WELDMENT (1) PER NOTE 3. Notas: 11 Thin shoot mata belng tested tonds to tear and break near the shoulder. In such cases, dimension © shal bo no greater than 14/3 fines. 2 Wald rantreemont and bechng chip, Hany, chal be removed Tush with the sulace ofthe spaclman. 5: inn otc. ofa os wakinert suc hat woul poi a gpocmen wi he capacy sation fe arab {ast equipment, he spacen shal be parted tough its hckness into as many specimens as required. 4. The engin of te reduced sections shal be equol to the wih of Ore wides! portion of te weld lus 1/4 in, [8 en].on each side, igure 4.10—Transverse Rectangular Tension Test Specimen (see 4.6.6.1) 101 Seen Sit acorns Reciran nts ore?(CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION ANS D1.6/D1.6M12007 in, [25 mm] R TYP) 125 We 7 an Lon renin — ata 101.50 mn) APPROX. THICKNESS OF THE PLATE SECTION AS PER APPLICATION SPECIFICATION. ‘T = THICKNESS OF TENSILE SPECIMEN AS PER APPLICATION SPECIFICATION, imensione ‘Specimen ‘Specimen 2 m nm ~ 7m Wows 72085 et 1502 0725 wea Baw of wad 050 poe Tapp (0.75 opprex 20 spp ‘Ge nominal wih ol secon 18. 40 20 50 Notes: 4, The weld reinforcement and backing, I eng, shal! bo removed. 2 The wath, 8, of weld may be varied to approximately WI2 by selecting an sppropriats specimen thickness, T, ands locaton swihin te wale ‘8, The mth maybe ais win reason o aoommadura he approximate a8 = Wits not passe w mete roquroments ote, “4. The grip secton ofthe specimen shall be syrmstcal, withthe centarne ofthe reduce section within 18 in. 18 mm, Figure 4.11—Tension Specimens (Longitudinal) (see 4.6.6.1) 102AWS D1.8D1.82007 ‘CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION WELD TO BE APPROXIMATELY CENTER OF GRGE LENGTH, * qr i" ] « Sen FoR ALTERNATE S>ECIMEN, 10. (25 mm R > © +A a Vacate te MNiMutt A Saioutr wecessany ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN (REDUCED- TO OBTAIN PARALLEL FACES: Innes (ma er=Rs) Seonow Oven Toe nepuceD SeeTON, Spacer No. Women) San Ranh i ed 7 “ae ves re s04) Vine el epron 2] 2 ave vee p08 1 + rst epoo, ele . 3 12116 [25 22) 1-472 [40] epprox. hak 1184 (0.5] bad 1m 22 [502], 2-45 (67) 4 12218 00231 2 solar. ‘tioon hatin 82 [2004], 9 (230) sits 1th wed iniement ad back, tery, hal be rncved fu wih fe socinon. E Maas Speen Seu oetbo woe tesemm wal Meander 98 Fo 8: Ontyatsseion the apse mye fanaa, £ iRoom et wal incense spctioncoseatcona areas may be cacusted by mukphing W and =. Tin cme of tet specimen as povided orn he eetcans speciation 6: Thereduee secon shat be pra utr 89"0%n [028m andmay hav © ads tperin We rn enc oar he ce ‘i adsl more han. [28 svar an cate 2 ‘Tha gp section ofthe speciman shall be symmetrea, with the cartorEna ofthe reduce sacton within 19 i. (9 ram Figure 4.12—Tension Specimen for Pipe Size Greater Than 2 in. [50 mm] Nominal Diameter (sce 4.6.6.1) tos a toramieermanreAWS 01 8/D1.6M12007 ‘CLAUSE 4 QUALIFICATION wep nenroncan Ee ee one 1 | ovat i e 3] relinw alr Ean I NOTE: FOR 2in. (50 mm] NOMINAL DIAMETER OR SMALLER, Figure 4.13(B)—Tension Specimens—Full Section— ‘Small Diameter Pipe (see 4.6.6.1) “ 105CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION [AWS D1 D1.64:2007 TOP OF PIPE §¢ POSITION REMOVE 5a ROOT END SPECIMEN FROM THIS AREA: REMOVE 56 FACE BEND FROM THIS AREA REMOVE 1 FACE: aN 1 ROOT ‘BEND SPECIMEN FROM THIS AREA. HORIZONTAL — REFERENCE UNE FOR 5G POSITION PIP IN FIXED: VERTICAL POSITION FOR 2G TESTS PIPE IN FIXED HORIZONTAL POSITION FOR 5G TESTS. REMOVE sa. AEMOVE 56 ROOT FACE BEND BEND FROM THIS AREA FROM THIS AREA Figure 4.14—6 in, [150 mm] or 8 in. [200 mm] Pipe Assembly for Performance Qualification—2G and 5G Position (see 4.7.10.1] - 106(CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS 01.8001.6M:2007 — l NT Standard Dimension (i) @ wo 2 0505 Spocmen 0.389 Spacimen 0.168 Specimen ‘ACLength, reduced section ‘See Note a ‘See Note ‘S00 Nowe 4 (95000010 0.350.2.0.007 e128 = 0.003 Racks of let 10, mio. 14, 3, BeLength of and seton 1-88, appre. 1-178, epprax. 172, approx. (C~Diamotor of ond sation wm we va ‘Standard Dimension ~ co) @. 12.88 Spaclman 97 Specimen 6.4 Spaciman 4.78 Specimen ‘A engih, reaucod seaton ‘See Noted ‘Bee Nato ‘Gee Netea ‘See Noted O—Dameter 17 2028 92010 642019 4702008 Radius of fet 88, min. 6.4,min, 45,min. 32, min. (8-Length of end section 9, aprox. 20.8, opprex. 22.2, apr. 127, epprae, (C—Diamater of end saction 130 127, 95 8a Notes. 1 Use maximum clameter specimen (a) (b). () 07 (toa ean be eu trom tho eecton. 2, Wed shouldbe in cantar of reduced section, 53. Wore only a cngle specimen ls requle, te contro! to spaciman shouié bo midway borweon the surfaces ‘4 Reduced Section “A should nol be loss then wid of weld pus two fos "D - 5. The ends may be ol ary ehape tol the holders ofthe testing machine In such a way that tho feuds apple aly! Figure 4.13(A)—Tension Specimens—Reduced Section—Turned Specimens (see 4.6.6.1) an‘AWS D1.6/01.64:2007 CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION DISCARD THIS PIECE DISCARD THIS PIECE SOE BEN SheCMEN SIDE BEND SPECIMEN DISCARD THiS PIECE | 5 in 125 mm) atin. ——+| BACKING, BACKING, FUSED FUSED, (8) PLATES — 1/1670 3/4 In. [2 mmTO 20 mm] (8) PLATES — OVER 3/4 In. [20 mm] AND PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION ALTERNATE 2/870 214 in, (10 mm TO 20 mn] PERFORMANCE GUALIFICATION LONGITUDINAL ROOT SEND SPECIMEN: DISCARD 1 la LONGITUDINAL FACE BEND SPECIMEN- (28 em MIN. come ED. * sn [950 me] aN. BACKING ruses vn (Comm) [dom DISCARD in {26 mm) a8 (©) PLATES — LONGITUDINAL PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION Figure 4.15—Plates—Longitudinal Performance Qualification [see 4.7.10.1] 107 Sipe ry pond ed an eS SStrkosonaicews worsenCLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION ANS D1.8/D1.8442007 RADIUS 1/8 in (8 min] MAX, Ti in po-----4 yee ny BH6 te 1-12 T / 7 j S112 Notes a and b see L = nen +pcRE09 «38 9 ae a ithe thicknoss, T, of a slgl-greova weld joint excoods 1-1/2 in. [40 mur, the spociman may bo cul into approximately equal sips be twaor 2/4 in [20 rm] and1-472 in. (40 ren wide. Each sip shall be tes by Bending to tn sarvo rads as detained by the nomo- sgrarln Figure 49. ithe pata thicknas, To! a double-groove wald oltexsoads 1-12. [40 mm). foot of tie welds cantared none of hs sips. Thasa strips shall be Dant to he 43. Notas: "The specimen may be thermally eut bu, in thls ease, at oes 19 In. [3 mm] ot msteisl shal be mechanically removed fom Ho thor smaty cut surece. 2, Tho Waid roilocoment ard backing, I any, shell be mechericaly romoved Mush with the specimen suas. 13. The dlamotor ofthe tos plungar chal a equal to at excaod the weld width. If thls requirement cannot be met, grester thickness, T, shal bo chosen in accordance wih the nomogram i Figura 48 4, Allongiuarsl suraces shal boo rougher than 125 miroinchos (9 yen) AMS. 1's rot recommended tha he fay ofthe sutace ‘eughrass be ofented pall to thelongludnal ane of tho spacime.. ;pacimen may be cut into muline ships so tothe radlus as dterminad by tne nomogram in Figure Figure 4.16—Transverse Side-Bend Specimens—Plate (see 4.10.2.3) 108 ‘Sinema sn pr on cata seeruscyosmeceranets ooacer‘AWS 01.6001 642007 (CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION. CORNER RADIUS CORNER RADIUS 18 in [9 eam] MAX. 128 In. [3 mm] MAX. | I | ' 1 > 6 na x, +] 7 an J. Er FACE BEND ROOT BEND Tin <8 23 Tam Lam 10 T tT >10 10 ROOT BEND Not ‘1 Tho specimen may be thermaly cut but in this caso, atleast 1/9 in. [3 mm] of mato shall bo machanicaly ramovod fom tho thermally cut surtace. 2. For elad metal naving an elongation requirement of at oat 25%, tho epacimonthicknats,t, may bo roduced when using a band- the nomogram in Figue 43. radius testing jg. The specimen thickness shall comply wit pecimion should bs reduced toa constant tckness based on thinner 3. Mo weld fine bce metas wah cerent exes base meta 44. The weld ctinforeament and backing. any shall be mechenicaly removed fash with Uv specimen surfaces. '5, The damotor ofthe tos plunger sal bo equal oor exoeed the wold wid. I ths roquifomant cannot be mel, egrosrtisknass, 7, hallbe chazon in aocerdanie wit ho eomagtam In Figur 48 6. Alllongiudnalsurtoces shal be no rougher than 125 micolnches [3 ym RIMS. 11s not recommended nat the ly ofthe surtaco ‘eughnese bo orentad paral othe longludnal axis ofthe specimens Figure 4.17—Transverse Face-Bend and Root-Bend Specimens—Plate (see 4.10.23) eee 109 Seibdimecntctas nie uswerosscastentes omar(CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION AWS D1.8/01.6M2007 ‘CORNER RADIUS. U8 In (3 mm] MAX. aa (h [40 ea} | LA | ssn + \ee RY FACE BEND, ROOT BEND We sT s 88 238 iam Pets tO T TT >10 ‘0 ROOT BEND Notes: ‘1. The spacimen may be thermally cut bu, in tls ease, of last U8 In [3 mm] of mataril all bo mochanially removed from tho ‘harmaly cut sua. the wee ois base metas win ciferet thicknesses, the spacimen chould ba reduced toa constant tickness based on te thinner base mota- lhe back ofthe joints recessed, is sufaco of the specimen may De removed toa depth nol exceeding the racess. 3. The epeciman width shal be 4, except that i shal not exceed [8 where ID is tm side dart ol he pipe. ‘The wold ramercoment are backing, any, shall be mechariealy removed Eush wilh the spackmen surfaces. The slameter ofthe teat plunger eral da oqual oor axcond tho Weld wath Hh roqurement cannot be Mel, 8 gfester Nckness,T, shallbe chesen n accordance wth the nomogram in FIVE 48. Al longitudinal surfaces shall bo no rougher tan 125 merohches (8 uml RMS. Its nat recommended tat tho ley ofthe surface ‘roughness be oxentad paral othe fongugnal aes ef he specimon. Figure 4.18—Transyerse Face-Bend and Root-Bend Specimens—Pipe (see 4.10.2.3) HO eens Crowes rome pen mito are Sottraewn sare assetAWS 01.6901.8h42007 CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION CORNER RADIUS 1/0 in. [9 mm] MAX. FACE BEND ROOT BEND =10 T 210 0 Notes: 4 The specimen may be theemaly ext bun this eas, a east Vin, [3 nm ol material shal be mechanical removed fram the thermal ut surtace. 2, Ite weld ine Daze metal win dlforont teknessas, the specimen shouldbe reduced toa constant thicknoss based onthe thinner base metal 6 enforement en basking, if any shal ba mechanically removed fush with the specimen surfaces. be no rougher than 125 micrinchoa [3 pm] FMS, I fs nol rooormended Mat Ove fay of tha sutace Figure 4.19—Longitudinal Face-Bend and Root-Bend Specimens—Plate (see 4.10.2.3) mtCLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION nOor BEND TEST SPEOMEN ‘AWS D1.8701.6442007 £ hin Wom cin esem i ti E 12 n.(40 mm) t sein (40 vom 15116 in (24 mm fe 175 mm] MAIN, }+-—— an. (75 mm) i, RADIUS 18 In. [3 mm} MAX. ‘THE PORTION BETWEEN FILLET WELDS MAY BE WELDED IN ANY POSITION. pan come MAXIMUM SIZE SINGLE: ASS FILLET WELD 3/8 in. [10 mm] Notes: 1. Tho backing bar chat bo 28 in, by 2 in. [10 mm by 60 am minimum unless tha 10st weld Is to bo inspected raclographicaly a whieh ‘ezsa tna backing basal bo 2/8 ir. by in. (10.mem by 75 mm) mimi. The backing bar shall bein Intent contact with Do Das plate. 2 The tas itary. sal b stn! rh equ ure pacman. Spacinan satbe removed macht Yom me fest piate. 3. The vod wnforcomert and backing bar shall be removed mochanialy, fuss wih tho base plate. 44, Alongiucinal suracas shall be no rovghor than 128 mleroinchos [3 yn] FAAS. I fe not racommended thatthe fay of tho surtace ‘eugnnass be oteniod pace tho longitudinal as of ine spec. Figure 4.20—Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Specimens (see 4.10.2.3) iAWS D1.8/01.66:2007 (CLAUSE 4, QUALIFICATION TRANSVERSE, SIDE BENDS. CLAD AREA exam, {150 «50 ml hin ‘ein {950 ema a ‘T= BASE METAL THICKNESS: ‘Note:The cumber of passes shown is lustrave ony Figure 4.21—Overlay WPS and Performance Qualification (see 4.11.2) CHEMISTRY SAMPLES [AS WELDED SURFACE: PREPARED SURFACE OAIGINAL TEST ‘COUPON "When chemical analysis is cancucted on the as-woldod surface, ha dstanca from the approximate tyson ng to te final as-welded suraco shall acome ihe minimum quelled ovetay thickness. The chemical analysis may be performed dieclly on te as-welded surface aron chips of materia akan rom the aewelded sure einen a chemical analysis is conducted alter material has been romaved fr the at-voldad euraco, the distance from the approx ‘ale fusion ine to the prepared surface shal become tha minimum quatfed overlay thickness. The chemical analysle may bo made d raclly an the prepared surtace of tom chips removed tom the prepared surfaca, ‘When a charncal anda toes conducted on mato‘l romoved by a horizontal dil sample, the dstenco from the approximate fusion {ing the upponoat si of tha dried cay shad becoma the minimum qualiad overlay ihekness, The chamies| analyse shall be performes on chips at matoral removed trom the dren eat. Figure 4.22—Chemical Analysis Test [see 4.6.11.53)] 13 Seneca Saar nba Siiorremswonessanu(CLAUSE 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS 018/01 642007 FRACTURE SPECIMEN TO BE REMOVED FROM LOWER 90 DEGREE SECTION IN POSITION SF Figure 4.23—-Performance Qualification Specimen Locations (see 4.7.10.1)}AWS D1S/D1.62007 5, Fabrication 5.0 General ‘This clause applies general requirements for the fabrication, assembly, construction or erection of stainless stee! products within the scope of this code. The fabricator, ‘contractor or erector (hereafter referred to jointly as the contractor) is cautioned that this code is not a design. ‘handbooks it does not eliminate the need for competent ‘engineering judgement of the designer. 5.1 Responsibilities ‘The contractor, and individuals employed by the contractor, working in accordance with this code are responsible for the quality of work and items they produce. They shall evaluate the quality of their work prior to release for subsequent stages of processing or fabricationerec- ton inspections. Fabrication/erection inspections shall be {in accordance with Ciause 6 of this code and as pre seribed in contract or engineering specifications 5.1.1 Processes and WPSs. Welding shall be performed either qualified or prequalified WPSs, and shall meet the requirements of Clause 3 or Clause 4 of this ‘code. as applicable. 5.1.2 Environmental Conditions, Welding shall not be perforined on surfaces that are wet, or in wind velocities that would adversely effect the shielding properties of the welding processes used. 5.1.21 Preheat temperatures shall be sufficient to remove moisture from the joints to be welded, asa mini- ‘mum. Specific preheat and imerpass temperatures are largely dependent on the material types and thickness to bbe welded. Both prehest and interpass temperatures shall be inaveordance with the approved WPS or as otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. ‘5.13 Base Materials, The materials used shall be con- sistcat with good manufacturing and inspection practices. Also see Clause 1 ofthis code. S.1.3.1 Base material discontinuities or defects that exceed material specifications are: unacceptable unless repairs are approved by the Engineer. If repairs are approved they shall meet the requirements of 5.2.2, 5.23, 0r5.13 as applicable. 5.1.4 Filler Materials and Fluxes. Certification, storage and handling of filler materials and fluxes chall be controlled as specified in Clause 3, Part D. Filler mate- Fials removed from the original packaging in which the filler materials were received shall be protected ard storage shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5.2 Preparation of Base Metal Corrosion resistance properties of materials and the ser- Viee conditions that fabrications will be exposed 1 should be considered prior to the actual fabrication. It ‘may be necessary o remove surface oxides from the hase metal prior to the welding. Surface oxides may be removed by mechanical methods, chemical cleaning, or other means opproved by the Engineer. Contact with lead, zinc, or lead or zinc compounds shall be avoided. due to the potential for hot cracking. Where pining corrosion, crevice corrusion, intergranular corrosion oF siress corrosion cracking are anticipated, special fabrication considerations should be specified in the contract, documents. $2.1 Surface Preparation. Acceptable methods of atrial or joint preparation or repairs may include ‘machining, thermal cutting, gouging, chipping or grind ing, Surface conditions shall be within the limits of 5.2.2 Grinding disks, saw blades, files or other cutting tools, that have been used on carbon steels shall not be reused on stainless steels Grinding shall be done with sn iron- fee abrasive wheel. ‘82.1.1 Surfaces on which weld metal is to be deposited (including adjacent surfaces) shall be clean, free us(CLAUSE 5. FABRICATION from organic contaminants and surface oxides. Surfaces shall be free from material discontinuities including fins, tears, laminations, and eracks that would affect the quality or strength of weldments (02 5.22.1). 5.2.1.2 Grooves produced by thermal cutting, gouging cr grinding shall have surfaces equivalent to those specie fied in 5.2.1.1 above. Groove profile dimensions, as specified on the WPS shall be maintained unless alter- ite tolerances are approved by the Engineer. Suitable access tothe root area shall be provided as applicable. $22 Cutting Requirements. Cutting equipment shall be adjusted in such a way as to make smooth cuts. ‘Notches or gouges on cut surfaces (edges) not exceeding, 1/16 i, [2 mm] for materials less than 5/8 in. (16 mm] ‘or 10% of the material thickness (T) for materials 5/8 in. [16 mm] or greater need not be repaired unless specified by the Engineer or contract specifications. Notches or ouges exceeding the above limits shall be repaired as specified below. 5.2.2.1 Notches, gouges, or other material discontina- ities may be repaired by grinding or machining provided the depth of the notch or gouge does not exceed the lesser of 1/8 in, [3 mm} or 20% of the material thickness. Repairs shall be blended smoothly into the surrounding surfaces to a slope not exceeding 1 in. in 4 in. [25 mm in 100 ram. 4.22.2 Notches or gouges exceeding 5.2.2.1 shall be repsired by excavation and welding in accordance with 5.13 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Repaired surfaces shall be eleaned to bright metal after completing the repair. 5.223 If discontinuities other than notches or gouges are observed during the cutting operation the indications shal be explored and repaired as required. Excavation of ddofective areas shall be limited co a depth of 7/3 without Prior approval ofthe Engineer. 5.224 Defect excavation or cepairs exceeding T/3 ‘may be done only with prior approval and direction from the Engineor, Defect exploration or repairs anticipated to ‘exceed a depth of T shall be examined by methods specified by the Engineer 10 determine the extent of the defect before exceeding a depth of T/3. Welded repairs ‘hall be aecomplished in accordance with 5.13. 5.23 Mill Induced Discontinuities, Mill induced discon- ‘inuities observed on the plane surface of material (not cut edges) shall he evaluated, explored, or repaired as specified in applicable material or contract specifications. $2.31 Evahation of mill induced discontinuities shall be performed by ultrasonic examination in aceor- AWS D1.611.6m:2007 dance with Clause 6 of this code, or as directed by the Engineer or contract specification, 5.23.2 Unacceptable surface defects may be removed by grinding, gouging or machining, provided the remaining thickness of the section is within material specifica tions, and the depression, after defect removal, is blended uniformly into the surrounding surface. Appro- priate NDT methods shall be specified by the Engineer to assure complete defect removal. 52.3.3 Welded repaits of base metals, when requiced ‘or specified shall be accomplished in accordance with 5.13. As an alternative to repairs, the contractor may replace the materials in question, 5.24 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes. All beam ‘copes and weld access holes shall be free of notches or sharp reentrant comers. Beam cope radii and access holes shall provide a smooth transition past the points of tangency of adjacent surfaces. S2A,1 All weld access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall, where practical, have a length ‘from the edge ofthe weld preparation or edge of backing (es applicable, 1.5 times the thickness of the material in which the hole is made. The size and shape of access hholes shall be adequate for deposition of sound weld metal and provide clearance for weld tabs (see Figure 5). $242 Reentrant comers or cut materials shall be formed to provide a gradual transition witha radius of 1 in, [25 mm] where practical. The reentrant corners may ‘be formed by mechanical or thermal cutting, followed by arinding, if necessary, o mect the surface requirements 0f 522. 5.3 Assembly ‘$3.1 The Engineer and contractor shall refer to design drawings, contract specifications and Clause 2 of this, code as a basis for the detail drawings. All connections shall be fabricated in such a manner as to maintain cam- pliance with this code and contract specifications. 53.2 Assembly and joining of patts to fabrications or buil-up members, and welding of reinforcing pans to ‘members shall be done using procedures and sequences that will minimize distortion and shrinkage. Insofar as practical, all welds shall be made in a sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding while the welding progresses (see Clause 2). Joints or groups of joints for which it is especially iroportant that welding sequence and technique be carefully controlled to. minimis 116AWS D1.8/01.6M:2007 shrinkage stresses and distonion shall be clearly identified on the applicable drawings. 5.33 Tis the responsibility of the contractor to prepare ‘WSs and employ fabrication methods capable of pro- ducing welds meeting the quality requirements of this code. All welders shall be qualified per Clause 4. A ‘welding sequence and distortion control program shall be prepared by the contractor and evaluated by the Engineer prior tothe start of welding if shrinkage or distortion is ‘expected to affect the end use of the fabrication. 53.4 In assemblies, joints expected to have significant shrinkage should be welded before joints expected to hhave less shrinkage. They should also be welded with as litle restraint as possible. 53.5 Welding of martensitic materials where conditions of severe external shrinkage restraint are present shall be ‘welded continuously to completion, or toa point that will censure freedom from cracking before the joint is allowed 0 cool below the minimum specified preheat and inter- ‘ass temperature. 523.6 Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held in position by bols, clamps, wedges, uy lines, strus, and other suitable devices, or by tack ‘welds until welding has been completed. The use of jigs ‘and fixtures is recommended where practical. Allow- ‘ances shall be made for warpage and shrinkage. 53.7 All welded shop splices in each component part of 2 cover-plated beam or built-up member shall be made before welding component parts to other component parts of the member. When making subassembly splices, whether in the shop or field, the welding sequence should be reasonably balanced between the web and flange welds as well as about the major and minor axes of the member, 53.8 Edges of built-up beam and girder webs shall be cut to the prescribed camber with suitable allowance for shrinkage due to cutting and welding. 53.9 Conections to meet camber tolerances shall be in conformance with procedures approved by the Engineer. 5.4 Assembly Tolerances 4.1 Parts tobe joined by fillet welds shall be brought into alignent. Fivup separations 1/16 in. [2 msm) or greater are acceptable provided the filler weld size is increased by an amount egual to the separation. Fit-up separations greater than 3/16 in, (5 ram] are unacceptable ‘without prior approval by the Engineer and desnonstra- tion thatthe required effective throat has been attained CLAUSE 5, FABRICATION S-4.L1 The separations berween the faying surfaces of Jap joints, plug and slot welds, and but joins landing on ‘backing shall not exceed 1/16 in. [2 mm} 54.12 Where dimensions in rolled shapes do not permit alignment within specified limits (after staight- ening), corrective actions shall be approved by the Engi- neer. The use of filler plates is prohibited except as specified on drawings or specifically approved by the Engineer. When approved, he use of filler plates shall be in accordance with 2.7. 5.4.2 Parts joined by groove welds shall be brought into alignment, The root openings between parts shall be in accordance with Figures 3.4, 3.5, or 3.6, or an approved WPS as applicable. Tolerances for bearing joints shall be in accordance with the applicable contract specifications, 5.4.3 Parts joined at butt joints shall be carefully aligned. Where parts are effectively restrained against bending due to cecentticity in alignment, offsets which do not exceed the lesser of 10% of the thickness of the thinner part joined, or 1/8 in. [3 mm) are permitted a a departure from the theoretical alignment. For correcting misalignment, parts shall not be drawn in to a slope greater than 1/2, [12 mm] in 12 in, (300 mn]. Measurement of offsets shall be based on the centecline of parts unless otherwise shown on the drawings. In the case of cubutar products, measurement of offset shall be based on misalignment of intemal surfaces. ‘5.4.4 Root openings greater than those permitted in Fig- lures 3.4, 3.5, or 3.6 or the approved WPS, but not greater than twice the thickness of the thinner part or V2 in, [12 mm}, whichever is less, may be corrected by welding to acceptable dimensions prior to joining the parts by welding. 54.5 Root openings greater than permitted by 5.4.4 may be corrected by welding only with approval of the Engineer. 5.4.6 Heat shall not be applied to form parts or improve alignment unless approved by the Engineer. 5.5 Distortion of Members Members distorted by welding may be straightened by mechanical suaightening methods specified and approved by the Engineer, This clause of the code does not prohibit, but makes no provisions for the use of heat straightening of stainless steels with the following encep- sion: Ifheat straightening is used, iti the Engineer's te sponsibility to determine the effect that tue heat has on corrosion resistance properties of the materials and external stresses ofthe fabrication. Heat straightening temper- sures should not exceed 600°F (315°C) for ferritic, 17(CLAUSE 5. FABRICATION martensitic or duplex steels, 800°F [430°C] for austenitic stainioss steel; and the aging temperature for precipitation hardening stainless steel. 5.6 Groove Weld Backing “sa When wie, sed metal backing shall be the ull $engih ofthe welded joi Metal backing materials sal ‘be te same base metal ype as was quale and ited inthe WS Allhacking shall be recnoved less per ted to remain in place by detail dravings, specifications cor the Engineer. 5.62 Groove welds made with metal backing shall have the weld metal fused thoroughly with the backing and shall be welded in 2 manner that meets the quality requirements ofthis code. Recommended nominal thicknesses of backing bars to prevent melt through are shown below in Table 5.1. 5.63 Nonmetallic or nonfused metallic backing, if used, shall be completely removed when the welding is com pleted, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. The back side of the welds shall be properly prepared by stinding or other suitable means for visual or specified nondestructive testing (NDT). Weld profile requirements (of 5.11 shall be applicable to the back side of such joints. 5.7 Tack Welds and Temporary Welds 57.1 Tack welds shall be subject to the same quality requirements asthe final welds. 5.72 Tack welds to be incorporated into the final weld shall be made with weld Gller materials meeting the requirements ofthe final weld and shail be cleaned thor- ‘oughily with stainless ste! wire brushes or iron free abrasive wheels. 8.7.3 Tack welds not incorporated into final welds shall bbe removed unless otherwise permied by the Engineer, ‘5.7.4 Temporary welds shall be subject to the same WPS ‘requirements as final welds. Temporary welds shall be removed unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. 8.7.8 Temporary weld removals shall be made flush with Permanent materials and the surfaces examined by meth- ‘ods specified by the Engineer or contract documents. AS ‘8 minirnun, visual examination shall be performed to assure permanent materials have not been gouged, nicked ‘or otherwise damaged. cote AWS D1.61D1.6442007 5.8 Peening 5.8.1 The ute of manual slag hammers, chisels, and light- ‘weight vibrating tools forthe removal of slag and spatter is permitted and is not considered peening, 5.82 When approved by the Engineer, peening may be used on intermediate weld layers to mechanically luce ‘and control the residual stresses and distortion created by ‘welding. Care should be taken to prevent overlapping or cracking of the weld or base metal. Pesning on the root, ‘or coves passes of welds, is prohibited untess specifically approved by the Enginecr. $83 To prevent sharp impressions, peening (when approved), shall be done by mechanically striking surfaces of intermediate weld beads ot layers with a suitable tool having a minimum radius of « 1/8 in. (3 mm unless otherwise approved, ‘5.84 The Engineer shall specify the required preheat (if any) and interpass temperanutes prior to pening. 5.9 Weld Termination ‘59.1 Welds shall be terminated at the end of joints in a ‘manner that will ensure sound welds and ina manner ‘consistent with Clause 2 ofthis code. Weld tabs aligned in such a manner to provide an extension of the weld joint may be used. ‘89.2 Backing or weld tabs shall be of a base metal type which is compatible with the material being welded, ‘unless the design or contract documents specifically dic- tate otherwise. 5.9.3 All weld tabs need not be removed unless required bby detail drawings, contract specifications or by the Engineer. 5.10 Weld Cleaning In all cases where brushes ar used, the brish wires shall be made of stainless steel macrials. Grinding, if required, shal be done with iron free abrasive wheels. S.10.1 Before welding over previously deposited weld metal, all slag or other foreign materials shall be.completely removed from the weld and adjacent base metal. This requirement shall apply not only to successive beads but also tothe rater area when welding is resumed after any interruption. 5.10.2 Slag shall be completely removed from al finished welds. All welds and adjacent base metals shatl be leaned by brushing or other suitable means after welding 18‘AWS D1.6°01.582007 is completed, Spatter remaining after cleaning that is considered harmful othe finished product shall be removed. ‘5.10.3 Arc strikes shall be removed by grinding or other suitable means. Cracks or blemishes caused by are sirikes shalt be ground to @ smooth contour and examn- ined visually to assure complete removal. Other nondestructive testing (NDT) methods may also be specified by the Engineer or in contract documents, 5.11 Weld Profiles S.L1.1 The sizes, lengths, and locations of welds shall be as specified by design requirements and devail drawings. Unless otherwise specified by contract or design requite= ‘dents, weld length tolerances shall be ~O, +25% or 6 in [150 mm), whichever is less, provided that the over- length welding does not cause interference with other ‘members, All welds shall be free from cracks, overlaps, and other unacceptable profiles exhibited in Figure 52. ‘Undercut shall not exceed the requirements of 6.28 and 629. S.L12 Fillet Welds. Fillet weld profites may be slightly Convex, at, or slightly concave. Convexity of individual, ‘weld passes on multiple pass fillet welds need not be ‘measured provided the completed weld is sufficiently fice from coarse ripples, abrupt cidges and valleys, and the reentrant angle a the fillet weld toe is not less than 90°, 5.11.3 Figures 5.2(A) and (B) show sypical examples of fillet weld profiles. Figure 5.2(C) shows typically unacceptable filler weld profiles. Measurement of fillet weld sizes shall be determined by the leg size for conver ‘Welds, and the theoretical throat size for concave welds.” S.114 Fillet weld leg sizes may be equal or unequal as specified by design or detail crawings. Unequal leg fille welds produced where weld symbol(s) indicate qual leg fillets ere acceptable (provided the einimam specified size is met) unless specifically prohibited or cause inte- ference with mating members. 5.115 Groove Welds. Groove welds shall be made with ninimum weld reinforcement unless otherwise specified. Reinforcement shall not exezed 1/8 in [3 mm] in bright and shall havea gradual transition to the plane of, ihe base metal surface. Individual passes on multiple ass welds shall be transitioned info previous passes in such a way as fo avoid coarse ripples, and abrupt ridges and valleys. Figure 5.2(D) shows typical groove weld profiles. Figure 52(F) shows typically unaccepeable ‘eld profiles. CLAUSE 5, FABRICATION 5.16 Finishing of groove welds in materials 1/8 in. B mm] thick and greater with a reduced finished contour of flush shall not be reduced by more than 132 in LL mm] or 10%, whichever is less. In materials less than 18 in. [3 mn] thick, no reduction exceeding 10% shall, be permite 5.11.7 Weld finishes and architectural requirements shall bes specified in the contractor detail drawings. 5.12 Weld Metal Removal and Repair 5.121 Removal anil Repair of Welds, The removal of rejectzble weld metal or portions of the base metal may bbe done by machining, grinding, chipping, plasma, or ait carbon arc gouging. The provess(es) used for removal shall be controlled in such a manner that the adjacent ‘weld metal or base metal is not nicked, gouged or wit out substantial removal of the base metal. Oxyfuel gos ‘gouging isnot permitted. 5.12.2 The affected surfaces of materials shall be cleaned thoroughly t0 bright mecal by mechanical means before rewelding. Chemical cleaning to remove residual surface ‘oxides is also permitted. If chemical cleaning is used, the chemical's characteristics should be evaluated by the Engineer for safery, corrosion and weldability effects. 5.12.3 Repaired or replaced welds shall be performed using qualified or prequalified WPSs. Repaired or replaced welds shall be re-examined by the same methods and quality acceptance eriteria originally used unless ‘otherwise specified by the Engineer. 5.12.4 During the welding operation, Ure contractor has, the option of repairing an unacceptable weld, by removing the defective area or by replacing the entice weld, ‘Welds found rejectable by NDE methods after welding is. ‘complete shall be repaired as described in 5.12.3, 5.13 Base Metal Repairs by Welding 5.13.1 Priot to the repair of base material defects the extent of defects shall be determined. Defective areas, shall be prepared for welding by grinding, gouging, of ‘other suitable means. Surface conditions shall meet 5.2.1,52.1.1,0F5.2.1.2 requirements, as appliceble prior to repair welding. 5.13.2 Base metal defects shall be completely removed to sound metal. Prior 1o making welded repairs, the defect removal areas shall be inspected as specified by the Engineer. Joint geometries, including applicable tol- cerances, shall be essentially in conformance with the WPS approved for use in the repair. ngCLAUSE 5. FABRICATION 5.13.3 Areas to be repaired by welding shall be thor- ‘oughly cleaned as specified in 5.12.2, 5.13.4 The WPS used in making repairs shall meet the requirements of Clause 3 or Clause 4 of this code, as applicable. 5.13.5 After completing the welded repair, the repaired areas shall be examined for fusion and base material damage (such as undercut). [f visual inspection of the repaired areas is acceptable, they shall be biended ‘smooth, flush and uniformly into the sumounding surfaces, Blending may be done by grinding or machining. ‘Chemical cleaning, if required, shall be specified by the Engineer 5.1346 Repaired arcs shall be inspected by an appropri- te NDT method or as specified by the Engineer. Accep- tance criteria of welded repairs shall be per appiceble tmerial specifications, contact quirement and Clause 6 of this code. 5.14 Mislocated Holes Mislocated holes that have been punched or drilled in base materials may be left open or filled with stainless steel bolts when approved by the Engineer. Where resto- ration by welding is necessary for structural or other rea- sons che welding shall be performed in accordance with the applicable subolauses of 5.13. 5.15 Inaccessibility of Unacceptable Welds If work has progressed to a stage that has made an unacceptable weld inaccessible, or has created new con- Sanna AWS 01 6101. 64:2007 ditions that make comection of the unacceptable weld dangerous or ineffectual, the weld repair shall be made by removing welds or members until the unacceptable weld is accessible for repair. In lien of the above, unacceptable welds may be compensated for by pecforming additional work as approved by the Engineer 5.16 Postweld Heat Treatment and Recommendations Tn the selection ofthe proper sess-rlieving or solution annealing treatment, consideration must be given to the specific material used, fabrication procedures involved, tnd to the design and intended Function of the fabrication ane assembly. 8.16.1 All welds and adjacent surfaces of base metals that are subject 40 Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT) shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to PWHT. 5.16.2 Materiats that have been subjected to PWHT shall be cleaned and visually examined after heat treatment, os ‘2 minimum, unless otherwise specified. 5.16.3 Postweld heat treatinent of the 200 and 300 series, is necessary only to dissolve precipitated carbides or siress relieve components used in conditions where stress comosion cracking is of concern, Postweld heat treat- rent of nonprequalified welding of ferti, martensitic, duplex and precipitation-hardenable stainless steel weld rents is discussed in detail in Annex B. Refer to this ‘Annes for more information. 5.164 PWHT stall be performed in accordance with the WPS, eg.. range of PWHT temperatures, holding times, and heating and cooling rates, 120AWS D1.8101.6M:2007 Table 5.4 Recommended Backing Thicknesses (see 5.6.2) Recommended Bact Thviness rn PAW Bin. 3 mam] sMaW Mi6in. (5m cmaw M6in. [5 mm} FAW Vain. (6am) saw Vain. (6) ‘Now: Use of commercially available tales sea backing for pipe and bing Issecepuble. m1 ‘CLAUSES. FABRICATIONCLAUSE 6. FABRICATION AWS 01.6/01.64:2007 BACKING IF USED? BACKING IF USED® RADIUS PRECUT BY DRILL ORHOLE SAW 315tyy pe aitin (comm ANGLE OF 215%) SLOPENOT CRITICAL Rp NEED NOT BE TANGENT 2 ly2ai4in NOTCHES PROHIBITED (20mm) (Cp OPTIONAL METHOD FOR MAKING CORNER RADIUS. (A) ROLLED SHAPE OR (8) FILLET WELDED SHAPES GROOVE WELDED gHAPESS ‘For martensitic ste!s,gind and inspect thermally cut edges of access holes prior Io making web and flange spice gtoeve welds. pecion matheds shall be apeciied bythe Englnoar, "Reds shall provide smanth,netch fea tansion « Aecess oponing made afer welding Web to ange. /Acosss opening made Defore welding web to ange. Weld net retumed tough opening, ‘These aro typeal datas to joints welded rom one se eins fused mela backing. Aterative joint detas should also be considered. Figure 5.1—Typical Weld Access Hole Geometries (see 5.2.4.1) I ‘Name rst pre ee an Sota‘AWS D1.8101.562007 (CLAUSE 5, FABRICATION i I I va in sue Ty Ty TH 1 f i fesue| fe sue | j-sve -| ke sue~| CONCAVE TYPICAL) CONVEX YIGAL (0) DESIRABLE FLLETWELD PROFILES (or eatiy aocEPTABLE PLLETWEL PrOnLES Nota: Except a outside welis in corner js, tha resnirant angle batween the weld face and the base mela al the Weld toe or ‘ho wale f2¢88 of adjacent wold bead shal nat be less than OD° (alsa gaa 5.132). BDaAKR AA INSUFFICIENT EXCESSIVE Excessive INSUFFICIENT INCOMPLETE a THROAT convex: == UNDERCUT Lee Size" FUSION (©) )TYPICALLY UNACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES “SEE 5.11.2 AND NOTE ABOVE. “THIS MAY NOT BE A ORFICIENCY IF UNEQUAL LEG FILLETS ARE SPECIFIED, — , T ak i n= aur Jon coun Spare BUTT JOINT (TRANSITION) — UNEQUAL THICKNESS PLATE (D) TYPICALLY ACCEPTABLE GROOVE WELD PROFILES ‘Note: Relnlorcemant {A} shall not excoed 1/8 in [3mm] (388 5.115). PSs S55 EKG excessive INSUFFICIENT EXCESSIVE ‘OVERLAP. ‘CONVEXITY THAOAT UNDERCUT SEE SANA SES BANS SEES115 SEE S.11.1 AND AND 5.118 CLAUSES. (©) TYPICALLY UNACCEPTABLE GROOVE WELD PROFILES IN BUTT JOINTS: Figure 5.2—Typical Weld Profiles (see 5.11) 13 staan en pene rebar HS SettrReamteneessseoutAWS 01.6701.644:2007 ‘This page is intentionally blank. 124Part A General Requirements 6.1 General 6.1.1 For the purpose of this code. quality contrat and quality assurance are separate inspection functions. 6.11.1 Fabicationfrections the responsibilty ofthe ‘contractor. The contractor shall perform inspection and testing at least (othe extent specified in this clause and additionally as necessary to assure conformance withthe requirements of te contract documents. 6.1.4.2 Verification is the prerogative of the owner. ‘The ower may perform inspection and testing necessary to verify that an acceptable product is being furnished in accordance with the provisions of the contract documents. Verification inspection and testing should be scheduled to minimize interference with production inso- fat a8 possible, 6.1.2 Inspector—Definition 6.1.24 The fabricetionerection Inspector isthe person who acts for and in behalf of the conuactor on peston, testing, and quality matters within the scope of the contract documents, 6.1.22 The verification Inspector is the person who acts for and in behalf of the Engineer and oweer on all matters within the scope of the contact documents and the limits of authority delegated by the ower. 6.1.2.3 When the tem Inspector is used without futher qualification, itis mandatory for fbricatiowerection and ‘optional for verification as defined in 6.1.2.1 and 6.1.2.2, 6.2 Inspeetion Personnel Qualification 62.1 All fabricasonveretion Inspector responsible for acceplance or rejection of materials and workmanship Shall be qualified as follows: AWS 01.601 64-2007 Inspection (1) The Inspector shail be an AWS Certified Welding, Inspector (CWI) qualified and certified in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, Standard for AWS Cortifcation of Welding Inspectors, ot (@) The Inspector shall be qualified by the Canadian Welding Bureau (CWB) to the requirements ofthe Cara- dian Standard Association (CSA) standard W178.2, Cer- Aifcation of Welding Inspectors, oF G) The Inspector shall be an engineer or technician who, by waining and experience in metal fabrication, {inspection and testing is acceptable to the Engineer. 62.2 An Inspector, previously certified as a Welding Inspector under the provisions of AWS QC1 or CSA standard W178,2, Level Tl or If, may serve as an Inspec- tor for this work, provided there is acceptable docurmen- tation that the Inspector has remained active as an Inspector of welded fabrication since last being certified, ‘and there is no reason to question the Inspector's ability. 623 The Inspector may be supported by Assistant Inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under the supervision of the Inspector. Assistant Inspectors shall be quslified by caning and experience to perform the specific functions 10 which they are assigned. The work of Assistant Inspectors shall be regularly monitored, generally on a daly basis, by the Inspector {624 Inspectors, Assistant Inspectors and personnel performing nondestructive testing (NDT) shall have passed an eye examination, with or without corrective lenses, to prove (J) near vision acuity of Snellen English. or equivalent Jaeger, at not less than 12 in, (300 mm], and (2) far vision acuity of 20/40 or better. Vision tests are required every three years, oF less if necessary. 1o demonstrate adequacy. 6.2.5 The Inspector shall be fumished with complete detailed drawings showing the size, length, type, and location of all welds 10 be made. The Inspector shall be famished with the portion of the contract documents 125CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION which describes material and quality requirements for the products 10 be fabricated or erected, or both. In Aukltion, Inspectors not familiar with stainless steel welding should review this code, the contract special provisions and their supervisor's special instructions, as applicable, 62.6 The Inspector shall be notified in advance of the start of fabricationferection operations subject to inspec tion and verification, 62.7 NDT Personnel Qualification. Personnel per forming nondestructive testing shall be qualified in accordance with the American Society for Nondestruc- tive Testing’s (ASNT) Recommended Practice No. SNT- TCA, or equivalent, Cenification of Level I and Level individuals shall be performed by a Level Il individ ual who has been certified by (1) ASNT, of (2) has the education, training, experience, and has successfully passed the written examination prescribed in ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Only individuals qualified for NDT Level Mor individuals qualified for NDT Level I and working. under the direct supervision ofan individual quoified for NDT Level IT may perform nondestructive testing. Spe- cial training for qualification may be needed for personnel pesforming UT to meet the additional requirements of 6.14 of this code. 6.2.7.8 The Engineer shall have the authority to verify the qualifications of fabricationerection Inspectors and. NDT personnel to specified levels by retesis or other means. 62.72 Personne! performing nondestructive tests under the provisions of 6.2.7 are not required tobe qualified under the provisions of 6.2.1 but shall have adequate vision as required by 6.2.4 and mectthe requirements of 627. 6.3 Inspection and Verification of Materials ‘The Inspector shall make certain that only materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents ave used. This includes review ofthe mill test reports, if required, and visual inspection. 6.4 Verification of Procedure Qualification Record (PQR), Welding Procedure Specification (WPS), and Performance Qualification GA1 The Inspector shell make certain all WPSs ate prequalified per Clause 3 or qualified in accordance with PaATA AWS 01.6/01.644:2007 Clause 4 of this code. The Inspector shall make certain that each WPS is weiten and available vo the welders and Inspectors for reference. {64.2 The Inspector shall permit welding to be performed only by welders and welding operators, who are qualified in accordance with the requirements of Clause 4, and shall verify theic qualifications authorize them to use the WPSs specified for the work, or shall make certain ‘that each welder or welding operator has previously demonstrated such qualification under supervision acceptable to the Engineer. 64.3 When the quality of work by a welder or welding ‘operator appears 10 be below the requirements of this code, the Inspector may require thatthe welder or welding operator demonstrate an ability to produce sound ‘welds by means ofa simple test or by requiring complete sequnlificaton in accordance with Clause 4. 644 The Inspector shall requice requalification of any welder or welding operator whose qualification is not ‘current by the requirements of this code. 64.5 When qualifying welders and welding operators, the Inspector, at his or her discretion, may observe the performance qualification tests. 6.5 Inspection and Verification of Work and Records 6.8.1 The Inspector shall make certain that che minimum size, length, and location of all welds conform to the requirements of this code and to the detail drawings and that-no unspecified welds have been added without approval. 6.5.2 The Inspector shall verify, at suitable intervals, that electrodes are used only in those positions and with the type of welding eurrent and polarity for which they are qualified or prequalified. 65.3 The Inspector shall observe, af suitable intervals, the joint preparation, assembly practice, welding tech: niques, and performance of each welder and welding ‘operator, to make certain applicable requirements ofthis ‘code ate met. The Inspector shall examine the work to make certain that it meets the requirements of Clause 5 and 6.28 or 6.29, a8 applicable, The size and contour of ‘welds shall be measured using suitable gages. Accep- tance eriteria different from those specified inthis code may be used when approved by the Engineer. 65.4 The Inspector shall identify with a distinguishing mark or adequate document contr, as approved by the Engineer, all pars or joints that the Inspector has inspected and approved.‘AWS 01.101. 62007 65.5 The Inspector shall keep a record of qualifications ofall welders and welding operators ll WPS qualifca- tions or other tests that are made, the control of welding materials and equipment, and such ether information as say be required by the Engineer. 65.6 When nondestructive testing is required, the Inspector shall ascertain that procedures and techniques are in accordance with 6.8. The verification Inspector may view the making of nondestructive tests, examine and evaluate the test results, approve satisfactory welds or reject unsatisfactory welds, and inspect the preparation and sewelding of unacceptable welds. 6.5.7 The Inspector shall record the location of inspected. areas and the results ofall nondestructive tests, together ‘with detailed descriptions ofall repairs made. Inspectors shall identify with a distinguishing mark or other record- ‘ng methods all parts or joints that they have inspected and secepted. Any recording method which is mutually agreeable may be used. Die stamping of cyclically Joaded members is not permitied without the approval of the Engineer. 6.6 Obligations of the Contractor 6.6.1 The contactor shall allow access to the project fab- ricetion facility by represematives of the Owner. The contractor shall cooperate with such personnel and provide ready access to fabricationferection inspection secords and fabrication or ervetion areas, as applicable. 66.2 The contractor shall be responsible for visual inspection and nondestructive testing specified in 6.8 and necessary correction of all deficiencies in materials ‘and workmanship in accordance with the requirements of Clause S and as provided elsewhere in contract documents. 646.3 The contractor shall comply with all requests ofthe Inspector to comect deficiencies in materials and work- ‘manship, as provided in the contract documents. 6.464 In the event that fauity welding or its removal for rewelding damages the base metal so that, in the judg ‘ment of the Engineer, its retention is not in accordance ‘with the intent of the contract documents, the contractor shall remove and replace the damaged base metal or shalt ‘compensate forthe deficiency in a manner approved by the Engineer. 6.6.5 If nondestructive testing other than visual inspeetion is not specified in the original contract agreement but is subsequently requested by the owner, the contrac- ‘or shall perform any requested testing or shall permit any testing to be performed in accordance with 6.7. The CLAUSE 8. INSPECTION ‘owner shall be responsible forall associated costs ineluding handling, surface preparation, nondestructive testing. and repair of discontinuities other than those listed in 6.28.1 or 6.29.1, whichever is applicable, at rates muta- ally agreeable between owner and contractor. However, if such testing should disclose an attempt to defraud or ‘gross nonconformance to this code, repair work shall be done atthe contractor's expense. 6.6.6 The contractor shall schedule nondestructive testing to facilitate attendance by the verification Inspector. ‘The verification Inspector shall be advised by the contractor of operational and nondestructive testing sched- bles and scheduled changes. 6.7 Nondestructive Testing Nondestructive testing is not a mandatory part of this code, unless specified ia contract documents. When NDT is required, this code provides standard require- iments, unless others are specified in contract documents, “The nondestructive testing procedures as described in this code provide reasonable assurance of weld integrity; however, it appears that some users of the code incorrectly consider each method capable of detecting all injurious defects. Users of the code should become familiar ‘ith all the limitations of nondestructive testing methods to be used, particularly the inability to detect and charac terize planar defects with specific flaw orientations. (The limitations and complementary use of each method are explained in the latest edition of AWS BI.10, Guide for Nondestructive Inspection of Welds.) 627.1 When nondestructive testing other than visual is 10 be required, it shall be so stated in the information fur- ntished to the bidders. This information shall designate the categories of welds to be examined, the extent of examination of each category, and the method or meth= ods of testing. 6.2 Welds inspected by nondestructive examination that do not meet the requirements ofthis code or alternate acceptance criteria per 1.7 shall be repaired in sccordance with 5.12. 6.73 When radiographic testing is used, the procedure ‘and technique shall be in accordance with Part B ofthis clause. 6.74 When examination is performed using tadiation imaging systems, the procedures and techniques shall be in accordance with Part D ofthis clause. 6.78 When ultrasonic testing is used, the procedure and technique shall be in accordance with Past C of this, clause. a7 ‘Sine rsa ae es aa rn(CLAUSE 8. INSPECTION 6.166 For detecting discontinuities that are open to the surface, dye penetrant inspection may be used, provided itis suitable for stainless stel. The standard methods set fonh in ASTM E165 shall be used for dye penctrant inspection, and the standards of acceptance shall bo in accordance with this code, whichever is applicable. 6.7.7 For detecting discontinuities that are open to oF just below the surface, magnetic particle inspeetion using ‘yoke type equipment may be used on feritic or martensitic stainless steel, and some, but not all, precipitation hardening alloys. The standards set forth in ASTM E 709 shall be used for magnetie parucle inspection, and che standards of acceptance shall be in accordance with this code, whichever is applicable. 6.8 Extent of Testing Information furnished tothe bidders shal clearly identity the extent of nondestructive testing (ypes, categories, or location) of welds to be tested. Ser Annex A for non- mandatory recommended inspection procedures, as applicable 648.1 Weld joims requicing testing by contract specification shall be tested for their Full length, unless partial or spat isting is specified. 6.3.2 When panial testing is specified, the location and lengths of welds or categories of weld to be tested shall be clearly designated in the contract documents. {68.3 When spot testing is specified, che numberof spots in cach designated coegory of welded joint wo be tested 2 stated length of weld or a designated segment of weld shall be included in the information furnished tothe bidders. Each spo est shall cove atleast 4 in (100 mm] ‘of the weld length. When spot testing reveals indications of tejectable discontinuities that require repair, the extent ‘of those discontinuities shall be explored. Two additional spots in the same segment of wld joints shall be taken at locations away from the original spot. The loeation ofthe ‘addtional spots shall be agreed upon between the con- ‘wactor and the verification Inspector. ‘When either ofthe two addtional spots show defects that require repair, the entire segment of weld, as defined by the Engineer, represented by the ociginal spot shall be completely tested. Ifthe weld involves mote than one seg- ‘ment, two additional spots in each segment shall be tested at locations agreed upon by the contractor and the verif- cation Inspector, subject to che foregoing interpretation. 6.48.4 Prior io testing, nondestructive test personne! shall, be fumished of have access to relevant information, including weld joint geometries, material thicknesses, PARISASB [AWS D1.6D1.6N2007 and welding processes and any weld repairs used in making the weldment. Part B Radiographic Testing of Groove Welds in Butt Joints 6.9 General 69.1 The procedures and standards set forth in Part B are to govern radiographic testing of welds when such Inspection is required by the contract documents as pro- Vided in 6.7. The requirements listed herein are specifically for testing groove welds in butt joims in plste, Shapes, and bars by Xray or gamma-ray sources, The methodology shall conform to ASTM E 94, Guide for Radiographic Testing, and ASTM E '42, Method for Controling Quality of Radiographic Testing, and ASTM. E747, Practice for Design, Manufacture, and Material Grouping of Wire image Quality Indicators (101) for Radiology, and ASTM E 1032, Method for Radiographic Examination of Weldments. 69.2 Variations in testing procedures, equipment, and acceplance standards may be used upon agreement between the contractor and the owner. Such variations include, but are not limited to, the following: radio- ‘graphic testing of fillet, T, and commer welds; changes in source-to-film distance; unusual application of film; unusual hole type image quality indicators (IQl) applica tions (inctuding film side hole type 1QN); and radio~ ‘graphic testing of thicknesses greater than 6 in. (150 mm] film types, densities, and variations in exposure, devel- ‘opment, and viewing techniques, 6.10 Radiographic Procedures 6.104 Radiographs shall be made using a single source of either X- or gamma radiation. The radiographic sensitivity shall be judged based on hole type IQI image or ‘wire image quality indicators (QD. Radiographic technique and equipment stall provide sufficient sensitivity to clearly delineate the required IQIs an: the essential holes or wires as described in 6,10.7, Tables 6.1 and 62, and Figures 6.5 and 6.6, Kdentifying leters and numbers shall show clearly in the radiograph 6.10.2 Radiography shall be performed in accordance with the applicable safety requirements. 6.10.3 When the contract documents require the removal Of weld reinforcement, the welds shall be prepared by 128 Sra‘AWS 01.8/01.6442007 ‘grinding as described in 5.11.6, Other weld surfaces need not be ground or otherwise smoothed for purposed of radiographic testing objectionable weld discontinuities to ‘be obscured in the radiograph 6.10.3.1 Weld tabs shall be removed prior to radio ‘graphic inspection unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 6.10.3.2 When required by provisions of the contact documents, steel backing shall be removed and the surface shall be finished flush by grinding prior to radiography. Grinding shall be as described in 5.11.6. 6.10.33 When veld reinforcement or backing, oF both, is not removed, of wire IQ! alternate placement is not used, steel shims when extended at Teast 1/8 in {3 mum] beyond three sides ofthe required hole type [Ql or wire 1Q1 shall be placed under the hole type 1QI or ‘wit IQI so thatthe total thickness of ste! between the QI and the film is approximately equal to the average thickness ofthe weld measured through is reinforcement and backing. 6.10.4 Radiographic film shall be as described in ASTM E94, Lend foil screens shall be used as described in ASTME 94, Fluorescent screens shall not be permitted, {6.10.5 Radiographs shall be made witha single source of radiation centered as near as practicable with respect 10 Jength and width of that portion of the weld being ‘examined. 6.10.1 Gamma ray sources, regardless of size, shall bbe capable of meoting the geometric unsharpness limitation of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Cade, Section V, Amtile 2. 6.10.52 The source-to-subject distance shall not be fess than the total length of film being exposed in a single plane. This provision does not apply to panoramic expo- stues for tubulars made under the provisions of 6.9.2. 6.10.53 The source-to-subject distance shall not be less than seven times the thickness of weld plus reinforcement and backing, if any, nor such thatthe inspec- ‘ion ration shall penetate ‘any portion of the weld represented in he radiograph at an angle greater than 26- 1/2°from a ine normal to the weld surface. 6.10.6 X-ray unis, 600 kvp maximum, cobalt 60, and i dium 192 may be used as 2 source far all radiographic inspection provided they have adequate penetrating ity. Other radiographic sources shall be subject to the approval of the Fnginees. 6.10.7 IQK Selection and Placement. IQIs shall be selected and placed on the weldment inthe area of inte ‘et being radiographed as shown in Table 6.3 pare CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION, 6.10.8 Welded joints shall be radiographed and the film. indexed by methods that will provide complete and continuous inspection of the joint within the limits specified to be examined. Joint limits shall show clearly in the radiographs. Short film, short screens, excessive undercut by scattered radiation, ot any other process that obscures portions of the total weld length shall render che radiograph unacceptable {6.10.81 Films shall have sufficient length and shall be placed to produce at least 1/2 in, (12 mm] of film, exposed to direct radiation from the souree, beyond each free edge where the weld is terminated 6.20,8.2 Welds longer then 14 in, [350 mm] may be radiographed by overlapping film cassettes and making a single exposure, or by using single film cassettes and making separate exposures, The provisions of 6.10.5 shall apply. 6.10.83 To check for backscatter radiation, a lead symbol “B" 1/2 in, [12.7 mm] high, 1/16 in. (1.6 me] thick shall be attached to the back of each film cassette. If the “B” image appears on the radiograph, the radiograph shall be considered unacceptable. 6.10.9 Film widths shat! be sufficient to depict all portions of the weld join, including the heat-affected zones, and shall provide sufficient additional space for the requited hole type IQIs ot wite 1QI and film identifi cation without infringing upon the area of interest in the radiograph, 6.10.10 Quality of Radiographs. All radiographs shall be free from mechanical, chemical, or other blemishes to the extent that they cannot mask or be confused with the image of any discontinuity in the ares of interest in the radiograph, Such blemishes include, but are not limited to: ) fogging Q) processing defects such as sueaks, water marks, ‘or chemical stains @) scratches, finger marks, crimps, dirtiness, static marks, smudges, or tears (@) 106s of detail due to poor screen-to-film contact (5) false indications due to defective screens or inter- ‘al Faults 6.10.11 Density Limitations. Transmited film density through the radiographic image of the body of the required 1QKs) and the area of ineret shal be 1.8 mini- ‘mum for single film viewing for radiographies made with an X-ray source and 2.0 minimum for rediographs mace with a gamma-ray source, For composite viewing of double film exposures, the minimum density shall be 129CLAUSE 6, INSPECTION 2,6, Each radiograph ofa composite set shall have a mi imum density of 1.3. The maximum density shall be 4.0 {for either single or composite viewing. 6.10.11.1 The density measured shall be H&D dene sity. H&D (radiographic) density is a measure of film blackening, expressed D=log bil where: D=HAD (radiographic) density Jo= light intensity on ue film, and 1 light transmitted through the film 6.10.11.2 When weld wansitions in thickness are radiographed and the ratio of the thickness ofthe thicker section to the thickness of the thinner section is 3 or ‘greater, radiographs shall be exposed to produce single film densities of 3.0 to 4.0 in the thinner section. When this is done, the minimum density requirements of 6.10.11 shall be waived unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, 6.10.12 A radiograph identification mark and two loca- dn identification marks shall be placed on the steel and each radiograph location. A coresponding, radiograph identification matk and two. Jocation identification ‘marks all of which shall show in the radiograph, shall be rroduced by placing lead numbers or letters. or both, ‘over each of the identical identification and location ‘marks made on the sisinless steel to provide a means for matching the developed radiograph to the weld, Addi- tional identification information may be pre-printed no Jess than 3/4 in. (20 mm] from the edge of the weld or shall be produced on the radiograph by placing lead fig- tures on the stainless steel. Information required to show on the radiograph shall ‘include the owner's contract identification, initials of the radiographic inspection company, initials of the fabricator, the fabricator shop order number, the radiographic ‘emification mark, the date, and the weld repair number, if possible. 6.10.13 Edge Blocks. Edge blocks shall be used when radiographing burt welds greater than 1/2 in, [12 mm] thickness, The edge blocks shall have a Tength sufficient to extend beyond each side of the weld centerline for a ‘minimum distance equal to the weld thickness, but no less than 2 in, {50 mm], and shall have a thickness equal to or greater than the thickness of the weld. The mini- ‘mum width of the edge blocks shall be equal to half the ‘weld thickness, but ot fess than I in. (25 mm. The edge blocks shall be centered on the weld with a snug ft against the plate being radiographed, allowing no more han V/16 in. (2 mm) eap for the minimum specified length of the edge blocks. Edge blocks shall be made of PARTS 8 C ANS D1.6/D1.8M:2007 radiographically clean stainless steel, and che surface shall have a finish of approximately 125 yin. (3 ym oF smoother) in accordance with ANSVASME Bd6.1-2002, ‘Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay) (ee Figure 6.7 for application). 6.11 Acceptability of Welds ‘Welds inspected by radiographic examination that do not mect the requirements of this code, or alternate acceptance criteria per 1.7, shall be repaired in accordance with 5.12, 6.12 Examination, Report, and Disposition of Radiographs 6.12.1 The contractor shall provide a suitable variable intensity iumvinator (viewer) with spot review or asked spot review capability. The viewer shall incorpo- rate 4 means for adjusting the size of the spot under ‘examination. The viewer shall have sufficient capacity to properly illuminate radiographs with an H&D density of 4.0. Film review shall be done in an area of subdued light. 6.12.2 Before a weld subject to radiographic testing by the contractor forthe owner ig accepted, all of its radio ‘graphs, including any that show unacceptable quality prior to repair, and a report interpreting them shall be submitted to the verification Inspector. 6.123 A full set of radiographs for welds subject 19 radiographic testing by the contactor for the owner, including any that show unacceptable quality prior t0 repr, shall be delivered 10 the owner ypon completion ‘of the work. The contractor's obligation to retain radio- araphs shall cease: (I) upon delivery ofthis ful eto the ‘owner, or @2) one full year after the completion of the contactors work, provided the owner is given prior ‘writen notice. Part C Ultrasonic Testing (UT) of Groove Welds 6.13 General 6.13.1 The procedures and standards set forth in Part C are to govern the ultrasonic testing of groove welds and 130 ‘SeenAWS 01.8/01.6412007 heat-affected zones in austenitic staintess steel, when such testing is required in accordance with 6.7 ofthis ‘code, The basic UT procedure, instrumentation and oper- ‘ator requcemens contained in this Part C are necessary to ensure maximum accuracy in discontinuity evaluation and sizing. For maximum control of discontinuity sizing, ‘emphasis has been placed upon: the UT procedure which must be written and qualified: UT technician speci requirements; and UT instrumentation and calibration requirements. AWS recognizes the inherent limitations and inconsistencies of ultrasonic examination for discon- ‘inwity characterization and sizing, The accuracies obtainable are required to be proven by the UT technician using the applicable procedures and equipment. Pro- cedure qualification results shall be fumished to the Engineer. AWS makes no clini for accuracies possible ‘when using the methods contained hereit 6.13.2 Variations in testing procedures, equipment, and acceptance standards not included in Part C of Clause 6 ‘may be used upon agreement with the Engineer, Such variations include other types of stainless steel, other thicknesses, weld geometries; transducer sizes, Frequen- cies, couplant, coated surfaces, testing techniques, etc. ‘Such approved variations shall be recorded in the con- ‘act records, 6.13.3 Base Metal. These procedures are not intended bbe employed for the procurement testing of base metals, However, welding related discontinuities (racking, lamellar tearing, delaminations, etc.) in the adjacent base ‘metal which would not be acceptable under the provi- ‘sions of this code shall be reported to the Engineer for ‘disposition, (6.14 UT Operator Requirements 6.14.1 In satisfying the requirements of 6.2.7, the qualitie cation of the ultrasonic testing operator shall include @ specific and practical examination which shall be based on the requitements of this code. This examination shall require the ultrasonic operator to demonstrate ability to apply the rules of this code in the accurate detection and disposition of flaws. 6.14.2 The ultrasonic operator shall prior to making the examination, be furnished or have access «o relevant information regarding base metal type, weld joint eom- try, material thickness, and welding processes used in raking the weldment. Any subsequent record of repairs ‘made to the weldment shall also be made available tothe “ultrasonic operator SS acre sre wn aa Paar CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION 6.15 UT Equipment {6.15.1 The ultrasonic instrument shall be the pulse echo type suitable for use with transducers oscillating a fre quencies between I and 6 MHz. The display shall bo an “A” scan rectified video trace or other display acceptable to the Engineer or owner's Inspector. 6.15.2 The horizontal linearity of the test instrument ‘shall be qualified over the full sound path distance to be used infesting in accordance with 6.15.9.1 and 6.15.1 6.18.3 Test instruments shall include intemal stabilization so that after warm-up, no variation in response ‘ereater than #1 dB occurs with a supply voltage change ‘of 15% nominal or, inthe case of a battery, throughout ‘the charge operating life. There shall be an alarm or meter (o signal a drop in battery Voltage prior to instru ‘ment shutoff due to battery exhaustion, 6.84 The test instrument shall have a calibrated gain control atienuator) adjustable in discrete | oF 2 dB steps ‘over a range ofa least 60 4B. The accuracy of the atten- ‘nto settngs shall be within plus or minus 1 dB. The procedure for qualification shall bo as described in 6.15.9.1 and 6.1592, 6.15.5 The cyclic range of the instrument's display shall be such that a difference of 1 dB of amplitude can be easily detected on the display. 6.15.6 The optioum transducer size and frequency shall be selected by the UT technician in accordance with the ‘writen procedure. The transducer size may be as small, a 1/4 in. (6.4 mm the frequency up to 6 MHz. Selec tion shall be based on the weldment design, material type, and discontinuity size rejection/acceptance require ments defined by the contact specification, 6.157 Suaight beam (longitudinal wave) search unit transducers shall be round or square. 6.15.8 Angle beam search units shall consist of a transducer and an angle wedge. The unit may be comprised of | the to separate elements or may be an integral unit, 6.15.8.1 The transducer crystal may be round, square ‘or rectangular in shape. If rectangular, the maximum width to height ratio shall be 1.2 to 1.0 and the minimum ‘Width to height rato shall be 1.0 to 1.0 (cee Figure 6.8). 6.15.2 The search unit shall produce a sound beam in the material being tested within 22° ofthat required by the writen procedure 6.15.83 Each search unit shall be marked to clearly ingicate the frequency of the transducer, nominal angle. of refraction, and index point. BhCLAUSE 6. INSPECTION 6.15.84 The dimensions of the search unit shall be such that the distance from the leading cdge of the search unit to the index point shall not exceed 1 in, (25 mm}. 6.15.9 Equipment Qualification 6.18.9.1 The horizontal linearity of the test instrument shall be requalified after each 40 hours of instrument use in each of the distance ranges thatthe instrument will be used. The qualification procedure shall be in accordance with 6.15.10. 6.18.9.2 The instrument's gain control (atenuatoe) shail meet the requirements of 6.154 and shall be checked for comect calibration at two month intervals in socondance with 6.15.11. Allemative methods may be used fr calibrated gain control attenuator) qualification if proven at least equivalent with 6.15.11 6159.3 With the use of an approved calibration block, each angle beam search unit shall be checked after each eight hours of use to determine thot the contact face is fla, tht the sound entry point is correct and that the beam angle is within the permined plus or minus 2° tol france. Search units which do not meet these require- ‘ments shall be corrected or replaced. 6.15.10 Horizontal Linearity: Procedure Note: Since this qualificetion procedure is performed witha straight beam search unit which produces longiu- dinal waves wih a sound velocity of almost double that ‘of shear waves, itis necessary to double the shear wave distance ranges to be used in applying this procedure. Example: The use ofa 10 in. [250 mm] screen calibration in shear wave would require a 20 in. [500 mm] screen calibration for this qualification procedure, The following procedure shall be used for instrument qualification. (1) A straight team search unit shall be coupled ‘meeting the requirements of 6.15.6 to the ITW or DS block in Position G, T, or U (see Annex H Figure H-1) as necessary to attain five back reflections in the qualifieae ‘ion range being certified. The last of the five back re- ‘lctions shall be located within the 80 to 100% portion of the screen with (Q) The first and fifth back reflections shall be ad {usted to their proper locations with use of the distance calibration and zero delay adjustments, @) Each indication shall be adjusted to reference level with the gain or attenuation control for horizontal location examination (4) Bach intermediate see deflection location shail be conrect within 2% of the screen width. maT AWS D1.8/D1.6M2007 6.15.11 dB Accuracy: Procedure Note: In order to attain the required accuracy (1%) in reading the indication height, the display must be gradu- led vertically at 2% intervals at horizontal mid-screen. ‘These graduations shail be placed on the display between 60% and 100% of screen height. This may be accomplished with use of a graduated transparent screen overlay. If this overlay 1s applied as a permanent part of the tlrrasonic unit, care shall be taken that the overlay does not obscure normal resting displays. (1) A straight beam starch unit shall be coupled, meeting the requirements of 6.15.6 at the DS block shown in Anmiex O Figure 0.2 and position “T." Annex O Figure 0.1. (2) The distance calibration shall be adjusted so ¢hat the first 2 in, (50 mm] back reflection indication (here- afer called “the indication”) is a horizontal mid-sercen, {@) The calibrated gain or attenuation control shall be adjusted so thot the indication is exactly at or slightly above 404% sereen height. (4) The search unit shall be moved toward postion U, sce Annex O Figure 0.1, until the indication is at exactly 40% screen height (5) The sound amplitude shall be increased 6 dB with the calibrated gain or attenuation control. The indication level theoretically shall be exactly at 80% screen height (6) The dB reading shall be recorded under “a” and sctual % sereen height under "b” from step 5 on the certification report (Annex O Form O-1, Lie 1). (1) The search unit shall be moved funher woward position U, Annex O Figure O.1, until the indication is at exactly 40% screen height. @) Step 5 shall bc repeated. (©) Step 6 shall be repeated: excep, information shall be applied to the next consecutive line on Annex © Form O1. (10) Steps 7, 8 and 9 shall be repeated consecutively Until die fall range of the gain control (attenuator) is reached (60 dB minimum). (11) The information from columns “a and “b shall be applied to equation 6.15.11.1 of the nomograph do- sctibed in 6.15.11.2 to calculate the corected dB. (12) Corrected 4B from step 11 to column “e™ shall be applied (13) Column “c* value shall be subtracted from Col- ‘umn "a" value and the difference in Columa “d.” dB cero shall be applied. Note: These values may be either positive or negative ‘and so noted. Examples of Application of Forms 0-1, 0-2, ‘and O-3 are found in Annes O. 132AWS D1.6°01.6142007 (14) Information shall be tabulated on a form, inchud- jing minimum equivalent information as displayed on . Form 0-1, and the unit evaluated in accordance with in- * struments shown on that form. | U5) Form 0-2 provides a relatively simple means of | evaluating data from item (4), Instructions for this eval= £ vation are given in (1.6) rough (18) { (16) The dB information from column “e” (Form O-1) stall be applied verticaly and dB reading from column “a” (Form 0-1) horizontally as X and Y coordinates for plotting a dB curve on Form 0-2, (7) The longest horizantal length, as represented by the dB reading difference, which can be inscribed in a rectangle representing 2 dB in height, denotes the dB. range in which the equipment meets the code requirements. The minimum allowable range is 60 4B. oe Equipment that docs not mect this minimum re- ment may be used, provided corection factors are developed and used for fiw evaluation ouside the i sthunient acceptable linearity range, or the wold testing and flaw evaluation is kept within the acceptable vertical linearity range of the equipment. Note: The dB error figures (Column “d") may be used as correction factor figures. 6.15.11.1 The following equation is used to calculate decibels: 4B, ~ 48) =20xLog & or AB, = 20 x Log ( ’) +B, As related to Annex O Form 0-1: 4B, = Column a 4B, =Columa e 5% = Column» ‘b= Defined on Form 0-1 6.15.11.2 The following notes apply to the use of the rnomograph in Annex © Form 0-3: (1) Columns 2, b, c,d, and & are on cenification sheet, Annex © Form O-. 2) The A, B, and C scales are on the nomogeaph, ‘Annex O Fort 0: G) The zero points on the C scale must be prefixed by adding the necessary value to correspond with the i 10, 20, 30, ete. paar CLAUSE 6. NSPECTION 6.15.11.3 Internal Reflections: Procedure (1) Calibrate the equipment in accordance with 6.18. (2) Remove che search unit from the calibration block without changing any other equipment adjustments. @) Increase the calibrated goin or atenuation 20 dB more sensitive than reference level (4) The sereen area beyond 1/2 in, (12 mm] sound path and above reference level height shall be free of any indication. 6.16 UT Procedure AIL UT shall be performed in accordance with a writen procedure which shall contain, as a minimum, the fol lowing information regarding the UT method and examination ecbnigues: (U) The types of weld joint configurations to be examined (2) Acceptance criteria for the types of weld joins 10 be examined 3) Type of UT equipment (manufacturer, madel and serial number) (4) Type of transducer, including frequency, size, shape, angle and type of wedge (6) Scanning surface preparation and couplant requirements (6) Type of calibration test block(s) with the appropriate reference reflectors (7) Method of calibration and calibration interval (8) Method for examining for laminations prior to weld evaluation (®) Weld root index marking and other preliminary ‘weld marking methods (10) Scanning pattem and sensitivity requirements (11) Methods for determining discomimity location, ‘eight, length and amplitude level (12) Transfer correction methods for surface roughness, surface coatings and part curvature, if applicable (13) Method of verifying the accuracy of the completed examination, This verification may be by re testing by UT, by others (audits), other NDT methods, riacroetch specimen, gouging or other visual echniques, as may be approved by the Engineer 133CLAUSE 6, INSPECTION (14) Documenvation requirements for examinations, Including any verifications performed (15) Documentation retention requirements (16) Test data supporting the adequacy of the procedure (17) Date, approval of procedure by the Engincer/ Level IT ‘The written procedure shall be qualified by testing mock- ‘up welds made by the same welding process and made from the same type of material, joint configuration and ‘material thickness, which represent the production welds ta be examined. The mock-up welds (Figure 6.11) shall be sectioned, properly examined, and documented to prove satisfactory performance of the procedure. The procedure and all g data shall be approved by an individual who has been certified Level IIT in UT by testing in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A and who is further qualified by experience in examination of the specifi types of weld joints to be examined. 6.17 Reference Standard ‘The calibration block shalt be of the same base metal type (Gee'1.2) and heat treatment condition as the mate- ‘ial that will be used in production. The standard reflector shall be a 1.6 mm diameter side drilled hole or equivalent. The reflector may be placed in any design of calibration block, weld mock-up or actual production part atthe option of the user. Orientation and tolerances for placement of the reflector are shown in Figure 6.9. Caution should be used in drilling the hole to make certain the hole is drilled with a sharp bit and is done by ‘machine, not by hand. A recommended calibration block is shown in Figure 6.10. Alternate possible uses of the reflector are shown in Figure 6.11. When placed in weld mock-ups and sections of production weldments, the reflector shall be in locations where its difficult to direct sound beams and through areas of fargest expected metal ‘grains, thereby ensuring detection of discontinuities in all areas of interest. 6.18 Calibration Methods Calibration methods described herein are considered acceptable and are to be used for accomplishing these UT procedures. The code recognizes that other calibra- ‘ion methods may be preferred by the individual user. If other methods are used, they shall be atleast equal tothe ‘methods recommended herein. The standard reflector 5B above SSL= SeeFigueEé, See Figue B7 SSL (see 6.18.1 and Figure 624) none allowed ‘Annex E tizes heigh), through 5 dB above Othrough 5 4B above ‘Annex E SSL= 34 in. {20mm} $8L= V2in (12mm) Level 2—Berween the SSL and 2 in. (50 mn] Middle 12 of weld= See FigueE6, See Figure? the DRL (see Figure 6.24) ‘Tin. [50 mm) ‘Annex E (Uillizes heignn, ‘Top and bottom 1/4 of | ‘Annex E weld = 3/4 in. (20 mm) Level 3 Equal tor less than the i i i DRL tree Pure 62) Disregard (when specified by the Engineer, record for information) e 143CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION AWS D1.61D1 642007 CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, ALTERNATE WIRE 101 ‘AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION PLACEMENT’ (LOCATION OPTIONAL, SEE 6.10.12. S HOLE-TYPE IQ! OR WIRE 101 ON SOURCE SIDE. 344 In {20 mm} sin (190) MIN (TYP) HOLEATPE 101 oR WIRE (GION SOURGE SIDE LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE. PLACED DIRECTLY OVEN THE NUMBERS MARIEED ON THE STEEL FOR THe PURPOSE OF MATCHING Fuurro weLo ArTER PROCESSING (SEE 6012) ‘CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD. {NNO FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION (eGATION OPTIONAL) SEE6 0.12. NOTE: ALTERNATE SOURCE SIDE [Ol PLACEMENT PERMITTED FOR TUBULAR APPLICATIONS AND OTHER [APPLICATIONS WHEN APPROVED GY THE ENGINEER. Figure 6.1—Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately Equal Thickness Joints 10 in, [250 mm] and Greater in Length (see 6.10.7) HOLE-TYPE 101 OR WIRE Ia! ON ‘CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, ‘SOURCE SIDE MAY BE PLACED AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION ANYWHERE ALONG AND ON (LOCATION OPTIONAL), SEE 6.10.12. EITHER SIDE OF THE JOINT: w aS 918 In [10 mur) MIN ay (4 in [20 me MIN ve) ALTERNATE WIRE 101 PLACEMENT LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE: PLAQED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED (ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING FILA TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (GEE 5.10.12), ‘CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION (LOCATION OPTIONAL), SEE 8.10.12, NOTE: ALTERNATE SOURCE SIDE IO! PLACEMENT PERWITTED FOR TUBULAR APPLICATIONS AND OTHER, APPLICATIONS WHEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, Figure 6.2—Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire [QI Locations on Approximately Equal Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in, (250 mam] in Length (see 6.10.7) 144AWS 01.601.6M:2007 CLAUSE 6, INSPECTION HOLE-TYPE 101 ‘OR WIRE 101 0N 978i, [19] MIN TYP) MEASURE T2 AT 34. (20 evn] Ma (TY) POINT OF MAXIMUM ‘THICKNESS UNDER HOLE-TYPE ial ‘ORWIRE IG) PLACED ONSLOPE n LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE PLAGED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED ‘ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (SEE 6.10.12), CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, AND FAQRICATOA IDENTIFICATION. (LOCATION OPTIONAL}, SEE6.10.12, NOTE: ALTERNATE SOURCE SIDE 101 PLACEMENT PERWITTED FOR TUBULAR APPLICATIONS AND OTHER APPLIGATIONS WHEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. Figure 6.3—Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations ‘on Transition Joints 10 in. {250 mm] and Greater in Length (see 6.10.7) HOLE-TYPE I! OR WIRE Ia! ON ‘SOURCE SIDE MAY BE PLACED ANYWHERE ALONG THE JOINT ALTERNATE WIRE (01 PLACEMENT MEASURE T2 AF POINT OF MAXIMUM “THICKNESS UNDER HOLE-TYPE 101 ‘ORWIRE IO! PLACED ‘ON SLOPE w LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE. PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED ‘ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (SEE 6.10.12). ‘CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION (LOCATION OPTIONAL), SEE 6.10.12, NOTE: ALTERNATE SOURCE SIDE IOI PLACEMENT PERMITTED FOR TUBULAR APPLICATIONS AND OTHER APPLICATIONS WHEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, ‘Figure 6.4—Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints Less Than 10 in, [250 mm] in Length (see 6.10.7) 145 Soins x muonsncomaces neurCLAUSE 6. INSPECTION AWS D1.8/01.6M:2007 4 TDIA (INIMUM SIZE 0.049 in. {1.02 mr) “TIA (MINIMUM SIZE 0.010 in, (0.25 mm) 27 DIA (MINIMUM SIZE 0.920 n. [0.51 mm PLAGE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS HERE: rm DESIGN FOR Idle UP TO BUT A. NOT INCLUDING 180. Table of Dimensions of OF ay Tol Thickness ‘and Holo Diameter a 5 © ° a FE Tolerances 1.500 780 098 0280 ‘0500 0.250 30.0005 20015 20015, 0.015 018 20.018 20080 ase 1500 0.780 0.498, 0250 0500) 0.350 20.005 20015 20015, 20016 20015 20015 30030 60179 2350 1378 0750 oars 7.000 0375 ‘20005 200%0 26030 20080 29.090 20.080 30.090 Table of Dimensions ofa (nm) Tar Tansee ‘and Hote Olamster Number A 8 © D e F ‘olorarcos 320 3810 1905 4113 835, 1270 635 30019 20.38 2038 2038 2038 3038 3080 2180 38.10 1905 Try 1270 5 0.08 39:38, 038 2038 20.38 20.89 soe 2215 ‘3492 1.05 382 2540 282 3018 3200 3080 20.80 2080 3080 2080 Notas 4d We 5 trough 8a ol 17,27, ang aT. 2 Hols shal be te and normal ho 0 Do nt eka. Figure 6.5—Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (IQ1) Design (see 6.10.1) (Reprinted by permission of the Amorlcan Socloty for Testing and Matertats, copyright) ene 146AWS D1.6/01.644:2007 CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION ENCAPSULATED BETWEEN TWO SHEETS OF 0.030 in. (0-76 ma) CLEAR Vin PLASTIC. ‘SWIRES EQUALLY SPACED. FOR SETS A 8.8, THE MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN THE AXIS OF WIRES IS NOT Less THAN 9 TIMES THE DIAMETER AND NOT MORE THAN 0.2 in.{S mm) MINIMUM 1 in 28 mm FOR SETS A AND B, MINIMU2A 2 In 50 rn) FOR SETS C ANDO LenoTH FOR SETS CD, THE MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN THE AXIS OF WIRES IS NOT Less THAN 3 TIMES THE DIAMETER AND NOT MORE THAN 0,79 in 20 mm) LEAD IDENTIFICATION. MATERIAL GRADE- BET IDENTIFICATION LETTEAS. NUMBER Image Qualty Indltor Sieos ‘Wire Diameter, in. fo] ‘SoA ‘S18 Sate gad ‘ccoszfoea | c.orlozs) | osszpey | 010 (25) (0006 (0.11 oorsjoss) | oo4or.o2) | 0.125102) cos (0.13) | o.016104) posoit27 | 0.160 4.08), ocess|0.18) | o.0eojest] | o.xesits) 2015.11 0.008 (0.2) ors joss) | o0soj203) | 05/5.) oor(2s) | ooxieen | o.t00 5) 03218) Figure 6.6—Wire Image Quality Indicator (see 6.10.1) (Roprinted by permission of the Amerlean Society tor Testing and Materials, copyright.) 17CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.6001.8M:2007 T=MAX. WELD ‘THICKNESS AT JOINT ar wiots—-—| HEIGHT Figure 6.8—Transducer Crystal (see 6.15.8.1) MBAWS D1.8/01,814:2007 (CLAUSE 6, INSPECTION ye0Smm — dade 205mm 2'SPp2 1mm — SPa=SPyx trem 2. The above olarances should bo considorad as appropsato. Tho reflector should, In alleasoa, ba placed in s manner fo peril max: ‘ing he rofeeton ant UT Ineeation. Figure 6.9—Standard Reference Reflector (see 6.17) Noo: Dimenslons shouldbe require to accommodate search units for the sound path cllenoasrequited. Figure 6.10—Recommended Calibration Block (see 6.17) 149CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION AWS 03.60D1'644:2007 a @ GROOVE WELD WITH BACKING PARTIAL JOINT PENETRATION GROOVE WELD v (cy ©, GROOVE WELD IN A CORNER JOINT GROOVE WELD IN ATWOINT Figure 6.11—Typical Alternate Reflectors (see 6.17) ‘(Located in Weld Mock-ups and Production Welds) Procedure: Place wo eimlar anglo beam saarch unis onthe calibraton block or mock-up to be used inthe poston shown abeva, Using ‘through transmission methods, maximize the Indication obtained and obtain a dB value ofthe Incieation, Trensfr the same two sosreh Unis tothe part to Bo examined and orient in the same crecion In which scanning wil bo pertormed end obtain a8 valve of ndcalons 28 expleined abovo fom at feast three locetons. The dierence In dB between ths callbation bieck of mockup and the averege oft ‘oblained frm tho part to bo examin should be racordod and sed te adjust the standars sons. Figure 6,.12—Transfer Correction (see 6.18.1) 150[AWS D1.8”D1.6N:2007 CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION Figure 6.13 Compression Wave Depth (Horizontal Sweep Calibration) (see 6.18.2.1) Pp i q oe —=- 3 2 } 3 Figure 6.14—Compression Wave Sensitivity Calibration (see 6.18.2.2) ALTERNATE BLOCK. 151CLAUSE 8, INSPECTION AWS 01 6001 64:2007 Vin tet2tn arin wat (27 mm] (88. mm) 163.5 mm) 127mm) «DEPTH «DEPTH DEPTH sin (36: mm) [254 mm Vin $-¥2in.2-42in [927 mmm] (88:4) [695 mm] DEPTH BELOW THE SURFACE EXAMPLE: OELAVED TECHNIQUE FOR DISCONTINUITIES BETWEEN 1-12 In ~2.1/2 [38.1 mm83.5 mm] FOR GREATER ACCURACY ‘OF DETERMINING DEPTH LOCATION ‘AND HEIGHT MEASUREMENT. ~ DELAYED | | Lin, evn. (98.1 em) (635 mm) Figure 6.15—Shear Wave Distance and Sensitivity Calibration (see 6.18.3.1) 152AWS D1.8701.82007 CLAUSE 8. INSPECTION MOVEMENT A MOVEMENT C. MOVEMENT B. Notes: 1. Testing patie are el sysmatieaaround the waldaxis vn the exception of pattorn D which is conduct aely over in weld axl, 2. Testing rom both sides ol ho weld axis ls tobe mado wherever mecnanicaly posse. Figure 6.16—Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns (6.19) 153 Sere, eswaucrenconten een oeCLAUSE 6. 1NSPECTION AWS 01.6/01.6M:2007 ‘COMPRESSION WAVE ‘WELD GROUND FLAT ‘WELD GROUND FLUSH. (PREFERRED) SHEAR WAVE je Fixen —>| DISTANCE, WHEN FIXED, ACCESSIBLE DISTANCE fo oes 1 Denote scanning, otharwisa search unit should be at a fixed distance from the wald white scanniny Ae) A) Sores 2, Cross-section canning Ia shown. Is assumed tat scanning wl also be postormed completly down the langin of he wee ‘tha minimum of 25% overlap to ongure 100% covaregs. Al scanning posilons shown ray nat bs raquired fr Tul coverag Optional posons are glven In ease tha! lnaccoseBlly provens uae o! some postions. Figure 6.17—Scanning Methods (see 6.19) 154AWS D1.8/D1.6M:2007 ZEA. Crt RY CLAUSE 8. INSPECTION tf] & 8 c Note: Amplitude and depth aro unchanged when the search unit {a mainiainad ata constant dstance trom and moved around the econtinuty. Figure 6.18—Spherical Discontinuity Characteristics (see 6.20.2.1) [SAME ANGLE Boa S$ SIDE VIEW « Arpitude drops off apidy asthe sserch unt positon Is charged ftom a normal ineidant angi wih the eiscontnuy. e 0" 70° ‘Ampltude romains unchanged (assuming aqua! sanctity callration land aelustment for atonuaon),cltanco changes with angio (loss ‘allovated o be the same) a3 sound Is meved around the éizconnly a c ‘Ampitude drops raplly crowing ite or no discontinuity Iaeation ‘ith the same angle bul distance changes as the seerch unl Is moved. Towards and away from the eooertinly. Figure 6.19—Cylindrical Discontinuity Characteristics (see 6.20.2.2) 158CLAUSE 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.8101.6142007 a 8 © Ampltvde ops off rapicy asthe search unt posilon is changed from a narmelinckfan! angle wih the alscartinuty. ‘SDE VIEW + ‘Amplitude drops aight at fst movement af search uit then dope ‘rapidly. An envelope of movement along tha baso tno shows discontinuity eight as search Is moved towards and amay Ir the dlecontnty. Figure 6.20—Planar Discontinuity Characteristics (see 6.20.2.3) Determine eiscontnuty A orientation Indleaton height ‘Move search unit to end B unit 8 _— {ndleaton drops to V2 of height ‘near tho ond. Mark scanning surtace i adjacent to search unit reference k ‘center boam reforence mark. Move search unit to end C and © repeat 8, cbove.Inazaton length () Is the dstance batween both marks WELOMENT REFERENCE MARK =Total longth of dlscontuty ‘iscontinulty location elong the weld i rom the welsment ceerence mark. Figure 6.21—Discontinuity Height Dimension (see 6.21.2.1)[AWS 01.6/03.644:2007 CLAUSE 6, INSPECTION A 8 c 80 60 ro vcs mete it vo ence ne so ant nyt wegen ee ese soe as meee ee eee eee wae retete ns oat Dewy tn stam san stn merida hey ceo Figure 6.22—-Discontinuity Length Dimension (see 6.21.3.1, 6.21.3.2, 6.21.3:3, 6.21.3.4) om roan may be marked to chow SSL estabished during vty eallration wth tho DAL locatod 6 a8 Rigure 6.23Screen Marking (see 6.23.2) 157CLAUSE 6. NSPECTION ANS D1.80D1.64:2007 Page. ot Project. Report No Weld LD. Thickness. Class. UT Procedure No. Technique UT instrument, Search Unit No. Angle Freq. Size RESULT (dently and deseo each discontinuity) No Location trom ter Longin | Hoight Comments ‘Sketch (dently each dlscontintyllsted above) NDT Tech Contractor Dato Examined ‘Approved Dato Approved, Figure 6.24—Report of Ultrasonic Examination (see 6.25) 158‘AWS D1.801.6442007 7. Stud Welding 7.1 Scope Clause 7 contains generat requirements for the welding of stainless steel studs to stainless steel and low carbon fercitic steels, and in addition it stipulates specific requirements: (1) For workmanship, pre-production testing, operator qualification and application qualification testing ‘when required, all to be performed by the contractor. () For fabricationferection and verification inspection of stud welding during production. 3) For mechanical properties of stainless steel studs, and requirements for qualification of stud bases, all cests and documentation to be fumished by the stud” manufacturer Note: Approved stud materials; see 7.2.6. For base materials see 7.2.7. 7.2, General Requirements 7.2.1 Stud Design, Studs shall be of suitable design for arc welding to stainless stel and low carbon steel members with the use of automatically timed stud welding ‘equipment. The type and size ofthe stud shall be as specified by the drawings. specifications, or special provisions. For beaded studs, see Figure 7.1. Alternate head configurations shall be permitted with proof of mechanical and embedment tests confirming full strength devel- ‘opment of the design, and with the approval of the Engineer. 7.2.2 Are Shields, An are shield (ferrite) of heat resistant ceramic or other suitable material shail be Furnished with each stud, 72.3 Flax. A suitable deoxidizing and are stabilizing flux for welding shall be furished with each stud of SAG in, (8.0 mm) diameter or larger. Studs less than SAG in. {8.0 mm] diameter may be furnished with or ‘without ux 7.24 Stud Bases. A stud bese, o be qualified, shall have passed the test prescribed in Annex D. Only studs with qualified stad bases shall be used. Qualification of stud bases in conformance with Annex D shall beat the man- vufacturr’s expense. The arc shield used in production shall be the same as used in qualification tess, or as rec- commended by the stud manufacturer. When requested by the Engineer, the contractor shall provide the following snform (1) A description ofthe stud and are shield, (2) Certification from the manufacturer that the stud ‘base is qualified in conformance with Annex D. G3) Qualification test data, 72.5 Stud Finish. Finished studs shall be produced by ‘heading, rolling, or machining, Finished studs shall be of ‘uniform quality and condition, free of injurious laps, seams, fins, cracks, twists, bends, or other injurious dis continuities. Radial cracks or bursts inthe head of a stud shall not be the eanse for rejection, provided that che ‘racks or bursts do not extend more than half the distance from the head periphery to the shank, a8 determined by visual inspection. Heads of shear connectors or anchor studs are subject to cracks or bursts, which are names for the same thing. Cracks or bursts designate an abrupt interruption of the periphery of the stud head by radial separation of the metal, Such interuptions do not adversely affect the structural strength, corrosion resistance, or other func tional requirements of headed studs. 7.2.6 Stud Material, Stud shall be made from cold «drawn bar stock conforming to ASTM A493, Specifica- tion for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Reds for Cold Heading and Cold Forging or ASTM A216. Specifia- tion for Staintess Steet Bars and Shapes. Tac following 300-Series alloys may be used; XM-7, 304, 305, 30%, 159CLAUSE 7, STUD WELDING. 310, and 316 or the tow carbon version thereof. Other “Type 300 series alloys may be used withthe approval of the Engineer: however, Type 303 shall not be used. ‘Where studs arc 10 be cyclically loaded, they shall be (ested and furnished in the annealed condition. 7.2. Base Materials. Base materials to be stud welded shall be of a alloy acceptable per 7.2.6, Other materials, such as low carbon steels, may also be stud welded. Any ‘other material to be stud welded must have the approval “of the Engineer, 7.3 Mechanical Requirements {7.34 Standard Mechanical Requirements, At the ‘manufacturer's option, mechanical properties of studs shall be determined by testing either the stainless steel after cold finishing or the full diameter finished studs.‘In either ease, the studs shall conform to the properties shown in Table 7.1. 7.3.2 Testing. Mechanical properties shall be determined in accordance with the applicable sections of ASTM A370, Test Methods and Definitions of Mechanical Testing of Stel Products. A typical test fixture is used, ‘similar to tha shown in Figure 72. 733 Bagineer’s Request. Upon request by the Engi- reer the contractor shall furnish: GQ) The stud manufacturer's cenification that the studs, as delivered, conform to the applicable require- ‘ments of 7:2 and 7.3. @) Cemified copies of the stud manufacturer's test reports covering the fast completed set of in-plant quality ‘control mechanical tests, required by 7:3 for each diameter elivered, The quality control west shall have been made ‘within the six month period before delivery of the studs. @) Centfied material test reports (CMTR) from the stainless steel supplier indicating the diameter, chemical properties, and grade on each heat delivered. 734 Absence of Quality Control Tests. When quality ‘control tests are not available, the contractor shall furnish mechanical test reports conforming (othe requirements of 73, The mechanical tests shall be on finished studs provided by the manufacturer ofthe studs. ‘The number of tests to be performed shall be specified by the Engineer. 7.3.5 Engineet’s Option to Setect Studs. The Engineer ray select studs of each type and size used under the ‘contract a5 necessary for checking the requirements of 7.2 and 7.3. Fumishing these studs shall be at the contractor’s expense, Testing shall be done at the owner's expense ‘AWS D1 8101.64:2007 7.4 Workmanship 7.4.1 Cleanliness. At the time of welding the studs shall be free from rust, ist pits, scale, oll, moisture, of other deleterious matter that would adversely affect the welding operation, 7A2 Base Metal Preparation. The areas to which the studs are to be welded shall be free of scale, rust, ‘moisture, paint, or other injurious material to the extent necessary to obiain satisfactory welds and prevent objectionable Furies. These arcas shall be cleaned by wire brushing, scaling, prick-punching, or grinding. Extreme care should be exercised when welding through metal decking, 74.3 Moisture. The are shields (ferules) shall be kept dry. Any are shiclds which show signs of surface mois ture from dew or rain shall be over dried a1 250°F (120°F) for two hours before use. 7.4.4 Spacing Requirements, Longitudinal and lateral spacing of stud shear connectors (type B) with respect (0 tach other and 10 edges of beam or girder flanges may vary a maximem of 1 in. (25 mm] from the locations shown in the drawings. The minimum distance from the ‘edge of a stud base tothe edge ofthe flange shall be the iameter plus 1/8 in. [3 mn], but preferably not less than 12. 140 mm}, 7AS Ave Shield Removal. Aficr welding arc shiclds shall be broken free from studs to be embedded in concrete, and where practical from all other studs. 7.4.6 Acceptance Criteria. The studs, after welding, shall be free of any discontinuities or substances that would interfere with their intended function and have a full 360° Mash. However, nonfusion on the legs of the flash and small shrink fissures are acceptable. The weld filet profiles shown in Figure 52 do not apply to the ‘ash of automa 7.5 Technique 75. Automatle Machine Welding. Stods shall be welded with automatically timed stud welding equip- ‘ment connected to a suitable source of direct current, electrode (stud) negative, power. Welding voltage, cur rent, tine, and gun seitings For lift and plunge should be set at optimum settings based on past practice, recom- ‘mendations of stud and equipment manufacturer, or both AWS C5493, Recommended Practices for Stud Weld- ing, should also be used for technique guidance. 752 Multiple Welding Guns. If two or more welding ‘Buns are to be operated from the same power source, they shall be interlocked so that only one gun can operate 160AWS D1.8/D1.6W:2007 at atime. and so that the power source has fully recov- ered from making one weld before another weld is started, 78.3 Movement of Welding Gun. While in operation, the welding gun shall be held in position until the weld ‘metal has solidified. 7.5.4 Ambieat and Base Metal Temperature Require- mens, Welding shall not be done when the base metal temperature is below O°F [-18°C] or when the surface is, \et or exposed to fling rain or snow. When the temperature of the base metal is below 22°F (0°C], one additional stud in each 100 studs welded shall be tested by methods specified in 7.7.13 and 7.7.1.4, except thatthe angle of testing shall be approximately 15°. This és in addition to the first two studs tested for each start of a new production period or change in set-up. 7.55 FCAW, GMAW, SMAW Fillet Weld Option. At the option of the contractor studs may be welded using prequalified FCAW, GMAW, or SMAW processes, provided the following requirements are met: 4, 78541 Surfaces, Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent toa weld shall be free from loose or thick seal, slag, rust, moisture, grease, and other foreign material tat would prevent proper welding or produce cbjection- able fume, {75.2 Stud End, For fillet welds, the end of the stud shel also be clean. 7583 Stud Fit (Fillet Welds). For fillet welds, the stu base shall be prepared so that the base of the stud fits against the base metal. 7584 Fillet Weld Minimum Size. When fillet Wolds are used, the minimum size shall be as required in Table 7.2, 7.5.5.5 SMAW Electrodes. SMAW welding shall be performed using clecwodes 5/32 or 3/16 in, [40 oF 48 mm) in diameter, except that a smaller diameter electrode may be used on studs 7/16 in. [11.1 mm] or less in diameter for out-of position welds. 78.5.6 Visual Inspection, FCAW, GMAW, and SMAW welded studs shall be visually inspected per 6.28.1 or 6.29.1 as applicabie, 7.6 Stud Application Qualification Requirements 7.6.1 Studs of materials acceptable per 7.2.6 which are shop or field applied inthe 1S postion per Figure 7.3 to ‘base materials acceptable per 7.2.7 re deemed prequalified by virwe of the manofucturer's base qualification (CLAUSE 7. STUD WELDING tests (Annex D) and no further application testing is fequired. All other stud materials, base materials and weld positions shall be qualified in accordance with 7.6 and a welding procedure specification (WPS) shall be qualified in accordance with 7.6 ofthis code. 76.11 Operator Qualification. Personnel using such automatic welding equipment shall be qualified in accordance with 7.7 ofthis code. 7.62 Responsibilities for Test. The contractor or stud applicator shall be responsible for the performance of these tests. Tests may be performed by the contractor or stud applicator, and stud manufacturer, or by another testing agency suitable to all partes involved. 7.63 Preparation of Specimens. Tests shall be conducted by welding the studs being qualified 10 atest plate of base metal listed on the qualified WPS. Weld position, nature of surface welded to, current, and time shall be recorded (see Figure 7.3 for positions) 7.64 Number of Spectmens. Ten specimens shall be welded consecutively using recommended procedures ‘and settings for each diameter, position, and surface geometry. 7.65 Test Required. The ten spocimens shall be tested using one or mote or the following methods: bending, ‘orquing, or tensioning. 76.6 Test Methods 7661 Bend Test. Studs shall be bend tested by being bent 90° from the original axis. A stud application shall be considered qualified ifthe studs are bent 90° and fracture occurs in the parent material or in the shank of the stud and not in the weld. 7.662 Torque Test. Studs shall be torque tested using a torque test arrangement that is substantially in ‘accordance with Figure 7.4. The stud application shall be considered qualified if all test specimens are torqued to destruction without faire in the weld, 7.6463 Tension Test. Studs shall be tension tested to destruction using any machine capable of supplying the required force, A stud application stall be considered ualfied ifthe test specimens do not fai in the weld 7.6.1 Application Qualification Test Data. Application {qualification test data shall include the following: (() Drawings that show the shapes and dimensions of studs and are shields. 2) A complete description of stud and base materials, and a description (part number) of the ar shield. (@) Welding position and settings (current, time, lif). 161CLAUSE 7, STUD WELOING (4) A record shall be made for each qualification. 7.7 Production Control 7:7.1 Pre-Production Testing FA.14 Start of Shift. Before production welding witha particular set-up and with a given size and type of stud, and at the beginning of each day's or shift’s production, testing shall be performed on the fist two studs that are welded. The stud technique may be developed on «2 piece of material similar to the production member in thickness and properties. If actual production thickness is not available, the thickness may vary 225%. All test studs shall be welded in the same general position as required on the production member (flat, vertical, or overhead). Setup includes stud gun, power source, stud diameter, gum lift and plunge, total welding lead length, ‘and changes greater than 25% in current (amperage) and time, 7.7.12 Production Member Option. Instead of being welded to separate material, de est studs may be welded on the production member, except when separate plates are required by 7.7.1.5. 7.7.13 Flash Requirement. The test studs shall be visually examined. They shall exhibit full 360° flash, 7.7.14 Beading, In addition to visuat examination, ‘he test shall consist of bending the studs after the studs axe aloved to cool, (o an angle of approximately 30° ‘rom their original axis by either striking the studs with a hammer on the umwelded end or placing a pipe or other suitable hollow dovice over the stud and manually or mechanically bending the stud, At temperatures below ‘50°F [10°C] bending shall preferably be done by contin- ‘uous slow application of load. For threaded studs the torque test of Figure 74 shall be substituted for the bend test. 74.4.8 Event of Falture, If on visual exemination, the test studs donot exhibit full 360° fash. or if testing failure occurs in the weld heataffected zone of either stud, the procedure shall be comected, and two more _studs shall be welded wo separate material or on the pro- action mermberand tested in accordance with the provisions of 77.1.3 and 7.7.14, If eliher of the second (io ‘studs fails, additional welding shall be continued on separate plies until two consecutive studs are tsted and found to be satisfactory before any more production studs re welded to the member. 7.72 Production Welding. Once production welding has begun, any changes made to the welding set-up, as determined in 7.7.1, shall require that the testing in 163 AWS 01.9/01.84t2007 73.13 and 7.7.1.4 be performed prior to resuming production welding, 7.7.3 Repair of Studs. In production, studs on which a fall 360° flash is not obtained may, atthe option of the contrctor, be repaired by adding the minimum fillet ‘weld a5 required by 7.5.5 in place of the missing flash ‘The repair Weld shall extend at least 3/8 in. (10 sam] beyond each end ofthe discontinuity being repaired. 7.74 Operator Qualification, A stud welding operator is qualified if the pre-production tests listed below are successful. 77.4,1 Before production welding with a particular set-up and with a given type and size of stud, and at the beginning of each day's or shift's production. testing shall be performed on the frst two studs that are welded. ‘The stud technique may be developed on a piece of material similar to the production member in thickness and. properties. Actual production thickness may vary =25%. All test studs shall be welded in the same general posi tion as required om the production member (flat, vertical, or overhead). 7.742 Instead of being welded to separate material the test studs may be welded on the production member, except where separate plates are required by 7.7.4.5, TIA The wst studs shall be visually examined. ‘They shall exhibit full 360° flash. 7-744 in addition to visval examination, the test shall consist of bending the studs after the studs are allowed to ool, to an angle of approximately 30°from ther orginal axis by either striking with a hammer or placing a pipe or ‘other suitable hollow device over the stud and manually ‘or mechanically bending the stud. At temperatures below ‘50°F (10°C] bending shall preferably done by contin- ‘uous slow application of load. See Figure 7.5 for stud~ welding bend jg. 7.745 If on visual examination the test studs do not exhibit full 360° flash, or if on testing failure occurs in the weld heataffected zone of either stud. the procedure shall be corrected, and two more studs shall be welded 10 separate material or on the production member and tested {in aceordance with the provisions in 7.7.4.3 and 7.7.44. either of the second rwo studs fails, additional welding, shall be continued on separate plates until two consecutive studs are tested and found to be satisfactory before Any more production studs are welded tothe member. 7-746 Before any production studs are welded by an. ‘operator not involved in the pre-production set-up stated above, the opesatos shall have the first wo studs welded by him or her tested in accardance with the provisions of 7.1.43 and 7.7.4, When the two welded studs haveAWS D1.6/01.6442007 Deen tested and found acceptable, the operator may then ‘weld production studs. 7.1.5 Removal and Repalr. If an unacceptable stud has been removed fiom a companem subject to tensile stress, ‘the area from which the stud was removed shall be made ‘smooth and flush. Wherein such areas the base metal has ‘been palled out in the course of stud removal, arc welding in conformance with the requirements of this code shall be used to fill the pockets, and the weld surface shall be flush, In compression areas of members. if stud fallues are confined to shanks or fusion zones of studs, @ new stud ‘may be welded adjacent to each unacceptable ara in liew of repair and replacement on the existing weld area (see 7.4.4), If base metal is pulled out during stud removal, the repair provisions shall be the same as for tension areas, except that witcn the depth of discontinuity is the lessee of 1/8 in [3 mm or 7% of the base metal thickness, the discontinuity may be repaired by grinding in liew of filing with weld metal. When a replacement stud is to be provided, the base metal repair shall be rade prior to welding the replacement stud. Replacement studs (other than the threaded type which should be torque tested) shall be tested by bending to an angle of 15° from their original axis, The areas of components exposed to view in completed structures shall be made smooth and flush where astud has been removed. 78 Fabrication and Verification Inspection Requirements 7.1 Visual Inspection, tf a visual inspection teveals ‘ny std that dos not show a fall 360° lash ox any stud that hasbeen repaired by welding such stud stall be bent to an angle of approximately 13° from is original axis (CLAUSE 7, STUD WELDING ‘Threaded studs shall be tongue tested. The method of ‘bending shall be in conformance with 77.1.4. The dres- tion of bending for studs with less than 360° flash shall ’be opposite to the missing ponion of the flash. Torque ‘esting shall be in conformance with Figure 7.4 7.8.2 Additional Tests, The verification inspector, where conditions warrant, may select a reasonable number of additonal studs to be subjected to the tests specified in 781. 783 Beat Stud Acceptance Criteria, The bent stud shear connectors (Type B) and other studs to be embed ded in concrete (Type A) that show no sign of failure shall be acceptable for use and left in the bent position. All bending and straightening for fabrication and inspection requirements, when required, shall be done without ‘heating, before completion of the production stud weld~ ing operation, except as otherwise provided in the con- ‘rack, and approved by the Engineer. 78 Torque Test Acceptance Criteria, Threaded studs (Type A) torque tested to the proof load torque level in ‘Table 7.3 (Table 7.4 for metric) that show no sign of failure shall be acceptable for use. 78. Engineering Judgment. If, inthe judgement of the Engineer, studs welded during the progress of the work are not in conformance with code provisions, as indicated by inspection and testing, corrective action shall be required of the contractor. At the contractor's expense, the contractor shall make the set-up changes necessary to censure that studs subsequently welded will meet code requirements. 7.86 Owner's Option. Atthe option and expense ofthe ‘owner, the Contractor may be required, at any time, to submit studs of the types used under the contract for a qualification check in accordance with the procedures of Annex D. 163(CLAUSE 7. STUD WELDING. AWS 01.8701.6442007 Table 7.4 Mechanical Property Requirements of Studs (see 7.3.1) Type A Studst Type B Studs? Tene Suen “0 (BO MPa ma De SMa ‘Yield Strength 35 ksi (245 MPa] min, “FOksi 390 MPal min, Blngation 40% min i in. [50 mm) = Tipe B Stu sll be cot. worked deformed bar aacho: rnanufacured in secontnce with ASTM A 1002. Rat sites greater than 0757 ip oe its Satsacted fm te suche ice 726 wih melanie samenes me pope cee arta ‘eqvoed by ASTHEA L072, Table 7.2 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for ‘Smail Diameter Studs (see 7.5.5.4) ‘Sud Diameur Winimum Size Fier “ems sent ie a nr va 6 see 159-2 sie 8 i 254 En 10 Table 7.3 "7 189 23 "Festi equ ans sd ew 60% of yi vale own Tae Table 7.4 Stud Torque Values* (Metric) (see 7.8.4) Sued Sos men Proof Torque ind rs rr Mig B M2 oa Mig En 0 toa waa 2390 wos 32 164AWS 01.6101.644:2007 atorgo nee 0 rope eee teh NOTE L: MANUFACTURED LENGTH BEFORE WELOING ‘Standard Dimensions, CLAUSE 7, STUD WELDING Teng ead Ninian Shark Olametar wlanaee Diameter Head Height cl o o o ~0 000 v2 RO ane tame ote 22.000 . ‘ ‘ ne Figure 7.2—Typical Tensile Test Fixture for ae $20 aang tue aeh ae Stud Welds (see 7.3.2) conte 10.000 7a 7909s wets a +000 + 900 aans see teh ve ‘Sandard Dmenslons en oy e788 ate asesoe 7a 000 ts 190 nye 17204 7a 000 wo 909s t7aod as 1 2% aye onsen os 4050 vss 1000 aye axanod 187 Figure 7.1—Dimension and Tolerances of Standard-Type Shear Connectors (sce 7.2.1) — 165(CLAUSE 7. STUD WELDING. ‘AWS 01.6001.6442007 LIMITS OF POSITIONS FOR PLATE OR PIPE. i Figure 7.3—Position of Test Stud Welds (see 7.6.3) 16AWS D1.8/01.612007 CLAUSE 7. STUD WELDING. STUD STEEL NUT ashen SLEEVE WELD AREA MEMBER Noe 1. Omersions aro aparopits to the sizeof te std. 2, Teads of th studs shall bo clean and free of lubxicant othr than residue cuing a Figure 7.4—Torque Testing Arrangement for Stud Welds (see 7.6.6.2) |— MAX. DIAMETER OF STUD + 1/84 In. (0.4m) yy 1-44 In. (82 ra) FOR STUD DIAMETER (In) 18 9/16 14 am 12 58 947 USE ADAPTER GAP A (in 1 VB SNE 72 SHE 11/82 I5IG2 15/92 1902 FOR STUD DIAMETER (mm) 32 48 64 95 127 59 190 222 254 USE ADAPTER GAP"A'(mm) 9 9 5-6 8 82S Figure 7.5—Stud Weld Bend Fixture (see 7.7.4.4) 6 i inramutmatarAWS DI.6/D1 642007 “This page is intentionally blank.‘AWS D1.61.6M2007 Annex A (Normative) Effective Throat ‘This annex is part of AWS D1.G'D1.6M:2007, Structural Welding Code—Siainless Steel, ‘and includes mandatory elements for use with this standard. of of Note:The effective throat ofa welds the minimum distance from the ‘oot of th ln oH face, tass any convex. 169‘AWS D1.6001.64:2007 ‘This page is intentionally blank. 170‘AWS 01 6101.6M:2007 Annex B (Normative) Effective Throats of Fillet Welds in Skewed T-Joints This annex is pat of AWS DI.6/D1.6M.2007, Stractural Welding Code—Sainless Steel ‘and includes mandatory elements for use with this standard, ‘Table B.I is 2 tabulation showing equivalent leg size factors for the range of dihedral angles between 60° and 135°, assuming no rool opening, Root opening(s) IAG in, [2 mm] or greater, but not exceeding 3/16 in. [5 mm), shall be added directly 10 the leg size. The required log size for fillet welds in skewed joints is calculated using the equivalent leg size factor for correct ihedral angle, as shown inthe example. EXAMPLE. US. customary units) Skewed T-joimt, angle: 75%; root opening 16 in. Strength equivelent to 90° fillet weld of size: S/16 in. (1) Factor for 75° from Table B.1: 0.86 (2) Equivalent leg size, W, of skewed joint, Given: Required: Procedure: @) With root opening of: (@) Required leg size, W of skewed fillet weld: [@2) + @)] (6) Rounding up to a practicat dimension: W = 38 i, EXAMPLE (St units) Given: ‘Skewed T-joint, angle: 75°; root opening: 2mm ‘Sirength equivalent to 90° fillet weld of 0 mm Required: Procedure: (1) Factor for 75° from Table B.1: 0.86 Q) Equivalent leg size, W, of skewed joint, ‘without ra0t apening: W=086x80 =69 mm (G) With root opening oft 20mm (@) Required leg sive, W.of 8.9 mm skewed filet weld: {2) + )) (8) Rounding up to a practical dimension: W=9.0mm For fillet welds having equal measured legs (W,). the tance from the root of the joint to the face of the dia ‘grammatic weld (f,) may be calculated as follows: For root openings > 1/16 in. [2 mum] and $3/16 én. (5 mm], For root openings < 1/16 in. [2 mm], use Ry = Oands, = ty ‘where the measured leg of such fillet weld (W,) isthe perpendicular distance from the surface of the joint wo the ‘opposite toe, and (Ris the rot opening. f any, between pans (ee Figur 3.6) Acceptable rot openings ae defined in 54.1. mANNEX 8 ANS D1 6101,6M:2007 Table B.1 Equivatent Fillet Weld Leg Size Factors for Skewed TJoints (see Annex 8) Dihedral angle, P or os 7." a 0" 3 90" 9s" ‘Comparable filet weld Comparable § om 076 ot 086 ost 095 1001.03 Dibedral ange, yor tose eS ‘Comparable fillet weld Pea nai 108 619 123 12s 128 13 ‘60° TO e0* t mod ) ® © © (WoT PREQUALIFIED) Notes: 1. hp (Eh = Ettactve throat dependent on magnitude of root opening (A (5895.41). (n) aprasonts 5 through 5. 2. Le Micknoss of thinner part 4 Notprequalted tor gae'mata! are welding using short cetng rant, Figure B.1—Details for Skewed T-Joints'3 (see 2.17) m Ponrernnrtetty begorersarrenocs moan‘ANS D1.6D1.6M:2007 Annex C ‘There is no Annex C. Annex C was omitted in order to avoid potential confusion with references to Commentary clauses. 13‘AWS D161 6M2007 ‘This page is itemionally blank. 174 ~‘AWS 01.6/01 6442007 Annex D (Normative) Manufacturers’ Stud Base Qualification Requirements ‘This annex is part of AWS D1.6/D1.6M:2007, Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel, ‘and includes mandatory elements for use with this standard. D1. Purpose ‘The purpose of these requirements is wo prescribe vests for the stud manufacturers’ certification of a stud hase for welding under shop af field conditions. D2. Responsibility for Tests ‘The stud manufacturer shall be responsible forthe performance of the qualification test. These tests may be performed by a testing agency satisfactory to the Engi reer. The agency performing the tests shall submit a certified report to the manufacturer of the studs giving procedures and ess forall tests ineluding the information listed under D10. D3. Extent of Qualification Qualification ofa stud base shall constitute qualification of stud bases with the same geometry, flux, and arc shield, having the same diameter and diameters that ore smaller by les than 1/8 in [3 mm). A stad base qualified with an approved grade of Type 300 alloy stainless steel shall constitute qualification for all other approved grades of Type 300 alloy stainless stel (see 7.2.6). pro- ded chat al other provisions stated herein are complied with, D4. Duration of Qualification A size of snud base with are shield, once qualified, is considered qualified until the stud manufacturer makes any change in the stud base geometry, material, lux, or are shield which affects the welding characteristics, DS. Preparation of Specimens 5.1 Test specimens shall be prepared by welding epre- sentative studs to suitable specimen plates of ASTM ‘A.36 steel or any of the other materials Fisted in AWS DI.1. Studs may also be welded to suitable specimen plates of any of the approved grades of Type 300 series siaintess steels listed in 7.2.6. Welding shall be done in the Mat position (plate surface horizontal). Tests for threaded studs shall be on blanks (studs without threads). DS.2 Studs shall be welded with power source, welding ‘gun, and automatically controlted equipment as recommended by the stud manufsccurer. Welding voltage, cuc- rent, and time (see D6) shall be measured and recorded for each specimen. Lift and plunge shall be at tie of ‘mum setting as recommended by the manufacturer. D6. Number of Test Specimens 6.1 For studs 7/8 in. (22.2 mm) or less ia diameter, 30 (est specimens shall be welded consecutively with constant optimum time, but with current 10% above opti- rum, For studs over 78 in, (22.2 rom] diameter, 10 test specimens shail be welded consecutively with constant ‘optimum time. Optimum current and time shall be the midpoint of the range normally recommended by the smanufaeturer for production welding. 175ANNEX ‘D6.2 For studs 7/8 in. [22.2 mm or ess in diameter, 30 test specimens shall be welded consecutively with con stant optimum time, but with current 10% below opti- ‘mum, For studs over 7/8 in [22.2 mm diameter, 10 test specimens shall be welded consecutively with constant ‘optimum time, but with current 5% below optimum. D7. Tests 7.1 Tension Tests. Ten of the specimens welded in accordance with DS.1 and ten in accordance with D6.2 shall be subjected to a tension test in a fixture similar to that shown in Figure 7.2, except that studs without heads ‘may be gripped on the unwelded end in the jaws of the tension testing machine. A stud base shall be considered as qualified if all test specimens have a tensile strength ‘equal to or above the minimum specified in 7.3.1. 72 Bend Tests (Studs 7/8 in, [22.2 mm) or less in iametes). Twenty of the specimens welded in accordance with D6.1 and twenty in accordance with D6.2 shall be bend tested by being bent altcmatcly 30° from their original axes in opposite directions until failure ‘occurs. Studs shall be bent in a bend testing device as shown in Figure D.1, except that studs Jess then 1/2 in. [12 mm] diameter, optionally, may be bent using a evice as shown in Figure D2. A stud base shall be considered as qualified if, on all test specimens, fracture fccurs inthe plate material or shank of the stud and not inthe weld or heat-affected zone. All test specimens for studs aver 7/8 in (22.2 mm) shall only be subjected to tensile tests WIS D1.6/D1.662007 DB. Retests If failure occurs in a weld or the heat-affected zone in any of the bend test groups of D7.2 ara less than specified minimum tensile strength of the stud in any of the tension groups in D7.1, a new test group (specified in 'D6.1 or D6.2, as applicable) shall be prepared and tested If such failures are repeated, the stud base shall fail to gualify. D9. Acceptance For a manufacturer's stud base and are shield combina tion (0 be qualified, each stud of each group of 30 studs shall, by test or retest, meet the requirements prescribed in D7. Qualification of a given diameter of stud baso shall be considered qualification for stud bases of the same nominal diameter (see D3. stud base geometry, ‘material, flux, and are shield). D10, Manufacturers’ Qualification Test Data ‘The test data shall include the following: (2) Drawings showing shapes and dimensions with tolerances of stud, are shields, and flux @) A complete description of materials used in the studs, including the quantity and type of flux, and 2 description ofthe are shields G) Conified resulis of laboratory tests required. 176‘AWS D1 8101.82007 ANNEX DOUBLE-ACTING —h-30% RYDRAULIO + ' rine STUD DIAM #164 In. (0-8 me a PIPE (80 may WA N ANGLE OF CENTERLINE OF DEFLECTED STUD SHALL BE MEASURED AT CENTERLINE OF PLUNGER Notes: 1 Fostute holds spscimon end stud is bent 30° alternataly In oppose directions, 2. Load can be applieg with hydraulic cylinder (shown) oF 2 tn" sink 1116 fixture adapted for ue wih tonsion tos chine 89 rm ml i 182 em) | ee FRACTURE LINE ‘SPECIMEN PLATE 3 Figure D.2—Suggested Type of Device for Qualification Testing of Small Studs TYPICAL FRACTURES IN SHANK OF STUD “ee D7.2) cdeg FRACTURE Une Note: Fracture In wold near Note: Fracture though stud Mletremsing on plato, __finsh torn from plate, TYPICAL WELO FAILURES ‘Figure D.1—Bend Testing Device (see D7.2) 7AWS Dr.6)D1.6M2007 ‘This page is imentionally blank 18‘AWS D1.8101.6M2007 Annex E (Normative) Discontinuity Acceptance Criteria ‘This annex is part of AWS D1.G/D1.6M:2007, Structural Welding Cade—Suainless Sieel, ‘and includes mandatory elements for use with this standard. 179ANNEXE, ‘AWS D1.6701.8842007 vino ane nan 1 To ores anu Su oF oso PERATTED WAN z+ bY Borne ng moun or ogoormury 4 "a tenn nanan ceteuiee eS Bwecn on |? Seen may Gomes mune Bm) Saeed Satie emacs Eva 5 se 5 Bae 5 Sus 2 2 ie cmneses soncneasa nee Te. TERame TH non oe Oat PERATTED WA gs | SOrenumerag mason ere or oscar ee ne ammae eaRee eS Eiveen uo | Setar omobnmice See su ay Bo) ones cian tues AomeLT oe = 2 is a a° 7 Fs 2 a a CINMILLIVETERS (C= MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF THE WELD BETWEEN EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION-TYPE DISCONTINUITIES (LARGER OF ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES GOVERNS}, OR. ‘TO Al! EDGE OR AN END OF AN INTERSECTING WELD. © =) Figure E.1—Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography for Statically Loaded Structures [sce 6.28.2.2(1)] 180[AWS D1.6001.86:2007 ANNEX E cur wore TK welbw i LENGTH D PLATE OF PIPE "THICKNESS i A ‘ A T bisconTINUITY. © weLD “e* Key, WELD A = LONGITUDINAL TUBULAR JP GROOVE WELD WELD 8 © TUBULAR GIRTH CJP GROOVE WELO DISCONTINUITY A = ROUNDED DISCONTINUITY LOCATED IN WELD A DISCONTINUITY B = ROUNDED OR ELONGATED DISCONTINUITY LOCATED IN WELD B D AND W = LARGEST AND SMALLEST DIMENSIONS, RESPECTIVELY, OF DISCONTINUITY A LAND § 2 CARGEST AND SMALLEST DIMENSIONS, RESPECTIVELY, OF DISCONTINUITY B. T= THICKNESS OF TUBULAR MEMBER (© = SHORTEST DISTANCE PARALLEL TO THE WELO A AXIS, BETWEEN THE NEAREST DISCONTINUITY EDGES (CASE 1 DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS? DisconminurTy iii LUnarTarioNs ‘CONDITIONS ° soy [ROUNDED DISCONTINUITY t 598 (wore 1) 793, $14 in (8 mo] Ts 2 in (60 mm) DoRL £98 in (10 mm) > Bin (50 mm) (8) ONE DISCONTINUITY ROUNDED, 220 OF at, ‘THE OTHER ROUNDED OR c WHICHEVER ELONGATED (NOTE 2) ISGREATER | @) DOA L 2 322 i [25 mm] Notas: 1 For elongated eiscentinutes (length > 9 x widih), abe Figure E.1 for maximum dimenalona, 2. Tho elongeted aiscontinully may be located in either tne langhucinal or girth wald, For tne purposes of ths lustraion,discortinuty B wes leceted In tho girth wold. 2. Spe 6.28.32. Case I—Discontinuity at Weld Intersection Figure £.1 (Continued)—Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography for Statically Loaded Structures [see 6.28.2.2(1)] See acme rates enaeANNEXE AWS D1.8/D1.6n1:2007 PLATE OR PIPE THICKNESS T FREE EDGE LENGTH D kev. 1D AND W = LENGTH AND WIDTH, RESPECTIVELY, OF OJP GROOVE WELD C = CLEARANCE BETWEEN FREE EDGE AND CLOSEST EDGE OF DISCONTINUITY ‘CASE Il DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS 122 BiscoNTMTY | uananions conomions <78, 2 Ain 6 £2 60 mm ° ‘€ 98 In. [10 mm) ‘T > 2 in, [50 mm © 2 0 98 (26 we Ste a2sa2 2. For elongated discontinue engin > 3 x widih), see Figure E.1 for maximum clmensions. Case II—Discontinuity at Free Edge Figure E.1 (Continued)—Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography for Statically Loaded Structures [see 6.28.2.2(1)] 182 serene ied teyeuorareerrncues nee[AWS D1.6001.644:2007 ANNEXE cn war wade tarot pure on ere / THICKNESS oscarumai fT | resco Fg noon : wore 2 Ker: ‘SEE CASE | DEFINITIONS FOR WELDS A & B, DISCONTINUITY 8, DIMENSIONS B, D, W, L, 8.7, AND ©. DISCONTINUITY & = ROUNDED OR ELONGATED DISCONTINUITY IN’ WELD CASE IN| DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS '2 DisconTinurTy DIMENSION LMTTATIONS conomons. i . sama D>aw : 20 Of st OR 27, : s WHICHEVER DOR L 2 982 In (25 mm] i IS GREATER Case IL—Discontinuity at Weld Intersection Figure E.1 (Continued) —Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography for Statically Loaded Structures [see 6.28.2.2(1)] 183ANNEX & AWS D1.6/D5.6412007 LENGTH D key, D, W, CAS DEFINED IN CASE tI, (CASE IV DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS 2 DISCONTINUITY piscoNTiN umaTarions: ‘CONDITIONS. . <7 owe 29D 0A 2T, © WHICHEVER is De 9192 In. (25 mm] GREATER Notes: 1 S00 6.262. 2. For elongated discontinuities (length > 3 x width), see Figure E.1 for maximum dlmensions. Case IV—Discontinuity at Free Edge Figure E.1 (Continued)—Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography for Statically Loaded Structures [see 6.28.2.2(1)] 14sat Tin gm) 0.009 (2m 0.09.32 mm) 2.048 1 min] EACH TOTAL ‘ 7 7 & : : soe | [2 nm 0.67 Asn) 0.06019 [2mm] EACH Sota us - . : jl [ caongon | 0250 in {6 mm) 0425 n (2mm) EACH OAL OTA Fry e see 0) o at | | 0.383 In. [9 mm} | (0.393 in. ren) £2.35 n[9 mm) 0.167 (mn EACH 12 13) l Jesengoon [ssa pon 0500 m2 I 0.250% (6 mm EACH “oral “TOTAL we aa a sotto 0) e tle () evonaare9 | (@)ROUNDED fe.cuusren. | (6) RANDOM SCATTER, WICAL WELD “{8) INDEPENDENT OF (1) AND (2) chose secriON 6) MAY ALSO BE IN COMBINATION WIT (1) ON (9) EVEN THOUGH NOT SHOWN Figure E.2—Maximum Acceptable Radiographic Images (see 6.28.2.3) o0zno aw LoSM a xaNNY98 z g & 2 x3 x x x . yw . . on sven sh gen} yen gun of, a — ee ii a Sac — Bi vag (C—Hnimum loazance atowed between edges of discontinuities 32 i, (2-5 mm) otarer (pet Figure E.. Larger of adjacent cscontnuties governs, Xi—Largest permissible elongated discontinuity tr 1-1 in [30 mi joint ickness (600 Figure E-1). x2—Wulip’e iscantnulies wih a lengih permited by Figure E.1 may be handied esa single ciscondnuly. X9-X4—Flounded ype decontinuty oss than 232 in. [25 em). XS--Rounded type dacontoules Ina cusor. Such a clustor Raving a maxima of/4 i, [20 mm] for all pore nthe custr shall bo treated as equi the sama clearance as a ‘16 fong scomly of Figure Intorprataion: Rounded and elongated discontinuities aco accoplable as shown. ll aro wii he sao mia and tho minimum clouranc alowed botwoen cscomtinulos or the end of a weld oink meeps Figure E.3—For Radiography of Joints 1-1/8 in. [30 mm] and Greater, ‘Typical Examples of Random Acceptable Discontinuities (sce 6.28.2.3) axaNNY cece wo'tewrta SMVANS D1.8/01 642007 ANNEXE we we "-TOOETERNE THE MARONIM SS OF DEGONTNUTY PERMITTED ae Heysont On wee Sat oNGIEer& WOREOMTALITOS vs a, IOSaTeRaNeTe MNT CLEKUNEE ROWED 4 BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIES OF ANY SIZE, oe 8 PROLEGT SVERTOALYTO. gfoab | oe a3 wi a8 ._ 4 85 el 4 crs | Souk | _ Do Lou ow 1 ‘a 2 2 3 om « emwenes a ° * TO DETERMINE HE Wax SIZE OF DBCONTIUITY PeRWTTEDW vfsone Outs dpe eneieer A NORZONTALS TOS cz | a teres Te ust Cueseane moo 4 ¢ Eerie sees or OscoMTINUTES OF aN Ze g FROGT SvERMOALTOS gt ah 4 ag aK Bor | 8h ab 4 aa | 4 oo . ea © 8 ww as cmnmserens (C— MINIMUM CLEARANGE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF THE WELD BETWEEN EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION TYPE DISCONTINUITIES, (LARGER OF ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES GOVERNS) NOTE: ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES, SPACED LESS THAN THE MINIMUM SPACING REQUIRED BY FIGURE E.5, SHALL BE MEASURED AS ONE LENGTH EQUAL TO THE SUM OF THE TOTAL LENGTH OF THE DISCONTINUITIES PLUS THE LENGTH OF THE SPACE SETWEEN THEM AND EVALUATED AS A SINGLE DISCONTINUITY. Figure E.4—Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Tension Welds (Limitations of Porosity and Fusion Characteristics) (see 6.2.2.1) 187ANNEXE ‘AWS 01.81.6207 1. TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN. yng ANY JOINT OR WELO SIZE, PROJECT A HORIZONTALLY TO 8. 4-114 [- 2, TO DETERMINE THE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED 4 € BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIES OF ANY SIZE, Bee § PROJECT 8 VERTICALLY TOC. cS gob as 4 38 J — — — — — — — ao ge an < 4 g 38 e Hel J 5 | < owe i | 4 ° | ou ! o ww 1 me 2k CININCHES 2 «o 1. TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN [ANY JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT A HORIZONTALLY TO 8. 32 }— 2, TO DETERMINE THE MININUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIES OF ANY SIZE, PROJECT 8 VERTICALLY TO C. 2} 20 A~GROOVE WELD SIZE 0A, FRET WELD SIZE, mm. a Lo e 2 2 40 50 5 7 0 mS CIN MILLIMETERS. ‘C=-MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINAL AX'S OF THE WELD BETWEEN EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION TYPE DISCONTINUITIES. (LARGER OF ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES GOVERNS) “THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF & DISCONTINUITY LOCATED WITHIN THIS DISTANCE FROM AN EDGE OF PLATE: SHALL BE 1/8 n.[S mim), BUT A 1 in, (3 mm) DISCONTINUITY MUST BE 1/5 in (6 rm} OR MORE AWAY FROM THE EDGE. THE SUM OF DISCONTINUITIES LESS THAN 1/8 In, [9 mm] IN SIZE AND LOCATED WITHIN THIS, DISTANCE FROM THE EDGE SHALL NOT EXCEED a/16 in. (5 mir], DISCONTINUITIES 1/16 In. [2 men] 70 LESS “THAN 1/8 In [3 mm] WILL NOT BE RESTRICTED IN OTHER LOCATIONS UNLESS THEY ARE SEPARATED BY LESS THAN? L (L BEING THE LENGTH OF THE LARGER DISCONTINUITY}: IN WHICH CASE, THE DISCONTINUITIES SHALL BE MEASURED AS ONE LENGTH EQUAL TO THE TOTAL LENGTH OF THE DISCONTINUITIES AND SPACE AND EVALUATED AS SHOWN IN FIGURE E.5, Figure E.5—Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Compression Welds (Limitations of Porosity or Fusion Type Discontinuities) (see 6.29.2.2) 88ae sete uoroe acer ‘AWS D16iD1 5M2007 ANNEX E WELO THICKNESS, mm oven oe so oS i“ ma it a8 2 12 a 2 e al 2 a 1 SS 3 if i \ pasion iu 3 i : » WELD THICKNESS, in tw 1. INTERNAL LINEAR OR PLANAR REFLECTORS ASOVE STANDARD SENSITIVITY (EXCEPT ROOT OF SINGLE WELDED T,¥,, AND K-CONNECTIONS— SEE FIGURE E 7). 2, MINOR REFLECTORS" (ABOVE DISREGARD LEVEL UP TO AND INCLUDING STANDARD SENSITIVITY) (EXCEPT ROOT OF SINGLE WELDED T,,¥, AND K-CONNECTIONS—-SEE FIGURE 7). "ADJACENT REFLECTORS SEPARATED BY LESS THAN THEIR AVERAGE LENGTH SHALL BE TREATED AS CONTINUOUS. Figure E.6—Class R Indications (see Table 6.4) 189ANNEXE tw WELD THICKNESS, mm |AWS D1.69D1.84:2007 wiosn7s 75s] aah eh RONO—roRTBWALD OE creche ssw) ovento = eunune ovens EATS Bideeo oe INTERNAL LINEAR OR PLANAR WHERE D |S DIAMETER) ve REFLECTORS ABOVE STANDARD 12 meuecrons cove erwin Sar eT ee ea 1 —- 28 § \ § Sta o & Be \ ge 38 \ be Be » $e \ BB . ad \ 2 BE ave ‘ « # 8 \ ge 3 3 : i 8 16 : surelewemoe 7) \ ove — BERRA |S » sega evel aun. renee \ weg ge 4 ! Ym =} oy won ve) even “+ ronrasa wenn sa worms Fe cuenta =—emuime ovens WELD THIOKNESS, In ty LENGTH (NT TO EXCEED O12 ‘WHERE D 16 DIAMETER) Figure E.6 (Continued)—Class R Indications (see Table 6.4) 190AWS D1.8/01.664:2007 ANNEXE MAN MEMBER ALIGNED DISCONTINUITIES SEPARATED BY LESS THAN (Lt = L2)2 AND PARALLEL DISCONTINUITIES SE>RRATED BY LESS THAN (41+ H2y2 SHALL BE SRANCH MEMBER EVALUATED AS CONTINUOUS. ‘ACCUMULATIVE FLAWS ARE EVALUATED ‘OVER 6 in [150 mm] OR Di2 LENGTH OF . WELD (WHICHEVER IS LESS), WHERE ‘TUBE DIAMETER = D. EIT APoLIED STRESS Lever) LAND H BASED ON A RECTANGLE WHICH TOTALLY ENCLOSES INDIGATED DISCONTINUITY LENT, 1228s 100 ssooroe 144 (8) OR tyid REJECT INTERNAL REFLECTORS AND tT -ACCUMULATIVE FLAWS: ALL OTHER WELDS : 4 oisconnnures tat ARE WH HOR s Qieor me OUTSDE sunPAGE SHALL Be = Iwowiouan Seo noir exreNDNe To He SURFACE é naw: oreo 5 nsf = i ® sccerr “RESLECTORS BELOW STANDARD | SENSITIVITY ARE TO BE DISREGARDED. savy va} 24 sonDa LeNeTHn Figure E.7—Class X Indications (see Table 6.4) v1 Speteniauctentcetne tenia unvon tceven ennAWS D1.9/D1.644:2007 ‘This page is imentionally blank. 192AWS 01.6/01.6M:2007 Annex F (Informative) Suggested Filler Metal for Various Combinations of Stainless Steels and Other Ferrous Base Metals ‘This annex is not part of AWS D1.6/D1,6M:2007, Stnucrural Welding Code—Stainless Steel, but FI. General A given grade of stainless steel may be welded to the same grade, to a large number of other grades of stainless steel, as well as to carbon steel or low alloy steel. When a sven grade is welded to the same grade, the appropriate filler metal choice is likely, in most cases. tobe a matching or neasly matching composition often with the same alloy designation. For example, 316 stainless would normally be welded with 316L filler metal, whether covered ‘electrode (AWS AS.4 class E316L-XX), solid wire (AWS. AS class ERSIGL or ER3IGLSi), metal cored wire (AWS 5.9 class EC3I6L or EC3IELSi), or fox cored ‘electrode (AWS A5.22 class E316LTX-X). In these A5.4 and A5.22 classification designations, the “X" is used to indicate any one of several possible digits that relate char- ‘cterstics of the electrode other than the alloy content of, the deposit. Such 2 filler meta selection most commonly provides the best march in properties ofthe weld metal 10 ‘those ofthe base metal. Bu it isnot always the case. ‘There are certain instances where the appropriate filler ‘metal may not have the same designation as the base ‘metal, The most common example, by far, is thet the appropriate filler metal for 304 stainless base metal is 308 (or, for 304L base metal, 308L filler metal). in this instance, the filer metal of nearly matching composition is slighty richer in alloy content, on the average, than is the base metal asa result of a preference for weld metal containing a Vile ferrite to avoid hot cracking. Another example of a nonmaiching designation, but a matching ‘composition, is thar the base metal 9041. is commonly ‘welded with 385 filler meta. ded for informational purposes only. ‘When a given grade of stainless steel is to be welded to another grade of stainless steel, then a number of filler metals may be appropriate choices. For example, if 304L sto be welded to 316L. either 308L filler metal or 316L. filler metal is an appropriate choice. One might choose 308L because its. in general less expensive than 316L. ‘or one might choose 316L because it happens to be on hand. Either choice is appropriate because the weld ‘metal corrosion resistance will match that of the least ‘corrosion resistant base metal (304L in most exviron- iments) because the strength ofthe weld metal will equal ‘or exceed that of the weaker of the two base metals GI6L in most situations: this may not apply if one or both base metals are in cokl-worked condition), and because both filler metals can be expected, in this instance, to provide weld metal containing alte ferrite so that the weld metal will be crack resistant. So the choice of ‘3081 or 3161 filer metal is arbitrary inthis example. F2, Nonmatching Filler Metals It is often not necessary ot indicated for an appropriate: filler metal to match the chemistry of either of two base ‘metals to be welded together. In structural applications ‘as considered in this code, the main considerations in filler metal selection are: (1) weld metal strength equaling or exceeding the base metal strength (with possible exception for high strength base metals, such as cold-worked steels); (2) weld metal corrosion resistance suitable for nor- smal atmospheric exposure: and is(3) weld cracking resistance. ‘With only these three considerations, for the 304L 10 316L example above, other common filler metals would also be appropriate choices in most eases, for example, 3061 or 347 filer metals. This isthe philosophy behind Prequalification of a numberof filler metals fora given base meta, as given in Tables 3.2 and 3.3 ofthis code However, when a Giller metal of nonmatching chemical ‘composition is being considered for an application, itis incumbent upon the Engineer to take into account possible aspects beyond these three considerations, For exam- pile, referring o Tables 3.2 and 3.3, for 2304 to 304 joint, 309MoL. filler metal would be prequalified and quite appropriate. ifa bit expensive. However, ifthe weldment were to require postweld heat treatment (PWHT), the selection of 309MoL filler metal would become inappropriate (and potentially dangerous) because PWHT normally causes 309MoL. weld metal (o suffer extensive transformation to sigma phase, a very britle constituent. Or, if the weldment were intended for service involving cryogenic temperatures, 309MoL. would likely be énap- propriate because its toughness at cryogenic tempera- tues is very limited due to the large amount of ferrite ‘normally found in 309MoL. weld metal Appropriate filler metal selection can go further afield than 309MoL filler metal for 304 base metal. An exam: ple might be joining of 410 stainless steel in the mil ‘annealed condition. Matching 410 weld meta, in the as- ‘welded condition, would be martensite, quite song and hard, but not very ductile. So. fit were desired to use the ‘weldment in the as-welded condition, 410 filler metal ‘might be considered inappropriate for 410 base metal ‘However, 309 filler metal would likely be an appropriate choice because the resulting weld metal will conta a lit- We fetite for good resistance to hot cracking, Teast match the strength ofthe mil-anneated 410, it will be ductile and tough, and it will easily exceed the con sion resistance of the 410. The Engineer in making this selection, should take into account the fact that the heat- affected zone of the 410 will be much harder than any other part of the weldment, but if this is acceptable, 309 isan appropriate filler metal. F3, Suggestions for Filler Metals Because there are so many steinless steels, and so many more possible combinations of two stainless steel grades ‘or combinations of stainless stels with carbon steels or low alloy steel itis virally impossible to ist all combinations of base metas and filler metals that might be considered appropriate. Nevertheless, some suggestions might be belpful. Table F.1 is limited to only one sugges- ‘AWS D1.8/D1.6142007 tion of a filler metal for a given combination of base metals, but that is not 10 imply that other choices are inappropriate. Again, reference is made to the multiple possibilities for prequalification as given in Tables 3.2 and 3.3, as well as to the examples discussed above. The suggestions in Table F.1 are based upon the thee consid- ‘erations listed above, with some engineering judgment, the criteria of which are as follows: (1) The least costly filler metal, of several available choices, is suggested. But a more costly filler metal could be appropriate also, (2) A readily available filler metal is suggested, as ‘compared to one less readily available. But less readily available filer metals could be appropriate also, (3) In solid wire and in metal cored wire classifica tions, a distinction is made for weldability purposes, between lower silicon filler metal and higher silicon filler real (¢g., ER308L versus ER308L$i). From the point ‘of view of performance of the weldment, this distinetion {is inconsequential and is, therefore, ignored. So, for ‘example, when 308L is indicated in Table F.1, it means that ER3OBL, ER3OBLSi, F308L-XX covered electrodes, and ES0BLTX-X filer metals are equally appropriate, () Forte prequalified base metas of Table 3.2, any of the prequalified filer metals of Table 33 could be suggested, (5) Mantensitic stainless steels are likely to be given a PWHT. As a result of this consideration, the suggested filler metal in Table F.1 for a martensitic stainless stexl ‘of fora combination of two martensitic stainless steels is, in most cases, a martensitic stainless stel with a similar response to PWHT, (6) Precipitation hardening stainless steels are likely (o be given one or two separate PWHTS, Filler metals ‘whose weld deposits provide similar response after these ‘more complex PWHTs are suggested, (@) If a martensitic stainless ofa precipitation harden ing stainless i to be welded to a nonmatensitc sales, and PWHT is Iely, an austeritc stainless see! filler metal which snot adversely affected by PWHT is suggested. (8) For cenain stainless base metas, or joints of stainless steel to cteep resisting low alloy steel, a nickel base alloy filler metal, as classified 10 AWS AS.11, ‘A514, oF the soon to be published A5.34 is much more ‘appropriate than a stainless steel filler metal, so the nickel base alloy filler meta is suggested. In order to make proper use of Table F.1, the Engineer needs 10 inke into account say unusual or special candi- tions dat could affect the performance of a panticular weldment. Table F.1 should not be used as a substinuie for engineering judgement. 194‘AWS Di.6/01.6M:2007 ANNEXE Index for Table F.1 Fox the sole purpose of indexing Table F.1, base metals are arranged inte the six groups shown below. These groupings are inno way indicative of weldbilty, ype, or any other characteristics. These groupings are only a mechanism to establish an index for users of this standard so they may quickly find the suggested filler metal for a specific base metal combination, Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Geoup 4 Group 5 Group 6 17-4PH 3098 321K 439 CACISB ‘cR20 77H 300 329 4208 CA2aMWy -CG3M 25.60 309Cb 330 4c0B cad0 CG-eMeN 261 00H au 00 co-am 294 310 3a 4c0F con 2042 310s 3TH 4a cH0 201 30H 388 46 cH.20 | 2 310Ce 34a 60 CK-3MCUN 2598Mo 310HC> 403 6h cK20 | Bs 310MoLN 405 62 CK 35MIN 301 ae 409 cars CNM 30k 316 410 64 cNaMN 301LN 316. 103 635 CNT 302 3168 410NiMo 660 / 3 Bieri aig 662 3038e 316c0 a6 Som. 308 316N a16se 1925 hMo Bom 3ISLN 20 2205 30m 317 20F 2308 300N 317k 20FSe, 2507 Nitronic 60, 3O8LN aM | 429 A286 Carbon Steel, <0.35% C 30s 317LMN 80 ‘AL-GXN Carbon Sicel, 03% C 306 307LN BI CASN Ce-Mo Creep Resisting Steet 308 320 84 cAeNM Low Alloy Stel, <0.3% C 309 m1 436 cals Low Alloy Seel, 30.3% In order to find the suggested filler metal for a specific combination of base metals find the group number of each mate- ‘ral in the tle above. Use the table below to find which page the combination can be found. Base Metal Groupings Group | Group2_| Group | Groups | Groups | Groups Group! [| page196 | page202_ | page203 | page 20s | page205 | page 206 Group? page 197 | _poge207 | page208 | poge209 | page 210 Base Metal Group pege 198 | pase2in | page2i2 | page2i3 Groupings Groups page199 | page2ia | _page2is Group 5S page 200 | page 2i6 Groups age 201 Notes for Table F.1 1. Filler metal should match corrosion resistance of weakest link. 2, Filler metal should at least match strength of weakest link, if possible. 3. Ifthe combination is likely tobe postweld heat teated, a filler metal which will not be embvittled by PWHTT is indicated. 4, Filler metal should provide some ferrite in the deposit with dilution from the two sides ofthe joint. 5. Filler metal should not be crack sensitive, if possible 6. NICr-3 isa bare filer welding electrode or rod. The comparable welding electrode for SMAW is NiCrFe-2. 7. For similar metal welding of Cr-Mo Creep Resisting Steel. use a comparable chemical composition filler metal. 195ANNEX AWS 01 8101.6M:2007 RRRRRRR RRR RG RR ER RRR Ree Ra RRERRRRR RRR RRR ERR RRR RAR ReRER RRR RRR ERR ER RR eae RSERRRRR AHA R RR ERR RRR GE ZRERRRRR RRR HR REG RR EAS RRRERHRRR RRR RRR ERR ER RA EREH SHER KERR ERR aR RHERRHR RRR HERA SERS RSERRHR RARER RR ERS R BEREEERESRSESEES SECERESEESER EEE REBAR RRR RRR REE SRRERRRERRRE RE SHER RR ERR REE RRGRRRR RRR S RARER RRR eaE aadaneged SRERR EES AREER aagges augde aad aad 28 a ws, om ke Was Naha Tae Tea HOW = NaCraaiel WERE AM= NoNhig RIEca)” WA = Wl Aang v4 42 OAD KG OSS LON SLU SK Table Ft Suggested Filler Metals for Various Combinations of Stainless Steel and Other Ferrous Base Metals Basle) Tat DIR AH) mI am darkinadsdiidaans 196 Eiaais m‘AWS D1.8/D1.82007 ANNEX F gS BRR EERERRRRER BRR aaEa nad RRR gga8 gs aaa g3 g aaa e 3 BRAR 3 ARR BR g ge23 3 RaRR g RR ES 2 ARES 2 aaa 8 ijglgeeeeheneeeedd : BSSRERESEZ RS ] EERR RRS RRR Table F.1 (Continued) ‘Suggested Filler Metals for Various Combinations of Stainless Steel and Other Ferrous Base Metals HOW = Neca Wlbtle NM = Noplichig irMd WA. WeidAuapimaly NA = NAA i Tae 0 mon Bees) SS WH ECD OHI M0 —AS HGH HONED HOWL EMS SY RET. KUN N37 SLM SIAN LN mm361 ‘Table F.1 (Continued) Suggested Filler Metals for Various Combinations of Staintess Steel and Other Ferrous Base Metals Me Suemeal OL mH 30 7H Sa) ASSOC OW OW 0 ON Oe 2 ee Eo ee a ee Te ) a 3030 stds SSD NCW WD a so nS Sh wha CWO se ee ee ee “a M30 SMa ca 7 Me MESHES NOW ORONO NCW MR a ee ee NEW 10> NEW MCW AIOE SIN AIL» SION s ee ce NOW AEM NEW NCW AINE AIO AIKMAN I © Oe AIS NCW HOW) NEW NCW AIOE SION AI IHD AL 0 194 a AOL NEW AIO ROW NCW AIMS AIR AI AIOE AIO 4s 40 Ao NCW AIO NEW NCW SIO SIO NL AIO AE 400% yee Ns NCW ROD NEW NOW AIDE AINE IRD 4A oD ww 7 mm mw mw 7m mm ee ee ee a0 a0 a0 a a0 a 5 MoM) 310 38 NOM) 30 38 NOMe3 310 mae mH EMD a MO 31D 31) eae 3931051) As um 3H SH MND 2 XP) NOMS HY NM) NCO) NGMES NOM) NCGMod JO MEL AML HHL mL MH x a om mm mw ™ x oa me a mm 0 on 0 ey w @ oa. gaaa 2s ow sn mm N09 x9 oo so 30310300 SM Mw ww Mw NGS a moms 31030 ONS NOD NCOs 310 mo 33030 a = a= a0 sone Oe ee ee ee ee ee) 2310 NiOMed Noe] NKMo3S NOMS NOM} SL ML SAL 3 FP NOMS am ey pe om Nos x 0 0 30 me eo Am xB 2 Lm em > wm wm ww MS eae cAoo 33x cus xe 8 me mw (NCW = NaCl Wete NM = Mig Fired WA = Wel Aagomly NA = Ndr Te kw ta a Cam)ANNEX F ‘ANS D1.8/05.66:2007 uagless ess 88 RRR RR RS Sasa ess Be HgglasaBaassaaaseeaskaaseaR es i Peer ree rere eee ree eee ee g| | Miles bass Raga aReSsanaaeaa ee = ct BERERRRARRRRERRRRRRARERRESE i IsjssaGanaGhGRGRERAd RRR RADE i elacagnakRRRRARRRsaeenaae bale i B[pssGessRRRGRARRSRRR SERB 3)7 8 bleesieasGe8GeGaR eee e eae B/S : Jejasebanngageaeaanadanxene els 3 [ess beeeRARRR RAG SHR ae RRS ELT 32 F[RasQasaRSGRRERRS RS RR REE ET ali JJRasERRSRARRAERER RRR RRR REDE, = frac Gnaaeasageagadsenensgalde gi] | ljisngaxeeansaeesedgansnectly 8 [RSS ESRERARRRRRR RHE RE RE RED)? : 3 gPSRERSSRREREREG BRAS RESRED)g AG Ipesusesaneaneageanaersecall i sess BRR RRR RRR ARERR RRR RRS E ELS 5 lJsssBae ee aseeaeead eee ee eb BE = A|SS SRR RSSSRRRRSSRTRRRERSEE 3 §jsssbeaceeeeeecgedgganeaBe Z| | ijessbasstaaaeGeesazeenaeke JPasbenGgeGeecegeageaweges E|SS aD RRERRRREARRRRRR RRR RED lebsssssdthidgansedsueled 216Liz Table F2 ‘Type and Chemical Composition of Staintess Steels and Other Ferrous Base Metats Nominal Compesioa,% Fler Meta Tye © om oF ss GN Mo No GON Al oT Other pH MareniiePH 00! 050 Om? O01 O50 1625 a0 030400 ire Semi-Austente PH 0.05 050 002 O01 050 1700 7.00 1.00 25460 Awleniic 001100 gz GOL 030 2000 2500 650 1.90 020 261 Penile 01020 al Oot oa 2600 ‘00 a4 Fens «01-20 aL Oo G10 29.00 400 cHN} TYPE ~ DISTANGE AND SENSITIVITY REFERENCE BLOCK Figure O.2—Qualification Block [see 6.15.11(1)] 260eee AWS D1 6/D1.6:2007 Commentary on Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel 1st Raltion Prepared by the AWS D1 Commitice on Structural Welding Under the Direction of the AWS Technical Activities Commitee Approved by the AWS Board of Directors 261AWS 01 6/D1.6442007 ‘This page is intentionally blank,‘AWS 01,801.0M2007 COMMENTARY Foreword This foreword isnot apart of the Commentary of AWS DL6/DL.6M:2007, Siruemral Welding Code—Sainless Ste, bu is included for informational purposes only. ‘This coramentary on AWS DI.6/D1.6M:2007 has been prepared to generate better understanding in the application of the code to welding in stl construction. Since the code is written in the form of a specification, it cannot present back- ‘ground material or discuss the Structural Welding Committee's intent; i isthe function of this commentary to fil this need, Suggestions for application as wel as clarification of code requirements ae offered with specific emphasis on new ‘or tevised sections that may be less familiar to the sor. In this first edition of the D6 commentary, the scope is limited +0 only a few clauses on design. I is anticipated thatthe commentary will expand as needed in the future to support the code. ‘The nature of inquiries directed tothe American Welding Society and the Structural Welding Committe has indicated that there are some requirements inthe code tht are citer difficult understand or not sufficiently specifi, and others that appear tobe overly conservative. It should be recognized tha the fundamental premise of te code isto provide gen- ral stipulations applicable to any situation and to leave suficent latitude for the exercise of engineering judgment. Another point ro be recognized is chat che code represents the collective experience of the committer and while some provisions may seem overly conservative, they have been based on sound engineering practice. The commie, therefore, believes that 2 commentary isthe most suitable means to provide clarifiction as well as proper interpretation of many of the code requirements. ‘Obviously, the size of the commentary had to impose some limitations with respect tothe extent of coverage. This com- ‘mentary is not intended to provide a historical background of the development ofthe code, nor is itintended to provide a deailed resume of the studies and research data reviewed by the committee in formulating the provisions of the code, Generally, the code does not treat such design considerations as loading and the computation of stresses for the purpose cof proportioning the load-carrying members of the structure and their connections. Such considerations are assumed to be covered elsewhere, in a general building code, bridge specification, or similar document. As an exception, the code does provide allowable stresses in welds, fatigue provisions for welds in cyclically loaded structures and tubular structures, and strength limitations for tubular connections. These provisions are related to particular properties of welded ‘connections, ‘The Committee has endeavored to produce a useful document suitable in language, form, and coverage for welding in stainless stel construction. The code provides a means for establishing welding standards for use in design and construction by the Owner or the Owner's designated representative. The code incorporates provisions for regulation of ‘welding tha are considered necessary for public safety. The commitce recommends thatthe Owner or Owner's repre= sentative be guided by this commentary in application ofthe cade tothe welded structure. ‘The commentary isnot intended to supplement code requirements, but only to provide a useful document for interpretation and application ofthe code: none ofits provisions are binding. It isthe intention of the Structural Welding Comumit- {cc to rovise the commentary on a regular basis so thet commentary on changes to the code can be promply supplied (o the user, In this manner, the commentary will always be current with the edition of the Structural Welding Code— Stainless Stee with which Xs bound. 263AWS 01.8/01.64:2007 ‘This page fs intentionally blank. 264AWS D1.8/D1.64:2007 Commentary on Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel C-2. Design of Welded Connections C-2.0 General ‘The successful application of stainfessstecls depends on ‘thorough consideration oftheir specific properties. ‘One important aspect is their performance in fires. All stainless steels have superior oxidation resistance to carbon steels. In addition, most stainless steels, except for ferrtie stainless steels, retain yield and tensile strength beter than carbon steels as temperature is increased, ‘The coefficient of thermal expansion ofaustenicie stainless steels is almost 50% greater than that of nonaustnitic steels, This creates supplementary stresses resulting from temperature changes. The distribution of residual ‘sresses in dissimilar joins in the as-welded condition resembles that in similar joins. However, contraiy to the situation relative to similar joints, postweld heat tweaiment of dissimilar joints may acually introduce residual suesses in the ‘weld zone. In the longitudinal direction, the stress distribution would be as follows: tension in the austenitic steel, compression in the non- austenitic steel, and shear in the weld. Am increase in the temperate ofa thermally treated dissimilar joint would ‘actualy relieve residual stresses. €23 Allowable Stresses. Design engineers should be aware of the principles governing the choice of filler metal for a given stainless steel base metal or metals. ‘This choice is based predominantly on the required Fer- rite Number 2s defined in the WRC or siails diagrams. However, filler metals selected in accordance with this criterion ‘may not match the mechanical properties of base metals. €-23.21 Allowable Stresses Established by Teste ‘ng. In some cases, the allowable stss criteria may be ‘overly conservative. Typically, they are based on the propenties of annealed base metal and on the properties of weld metal, However, in an accual joint using cold- See worked materials, annealing of the base metal is incomplete and localized, and the actul sength of the weld joint may be increased by the presence of high-strengdh base metal, Appropriate ests may allow for higher allowable stresses. €-2.3.3 Fatigue Provisions. Existing research data shows that the fatigue strength of joints in stainless steels is similar to that in carbon steels. However, these data do not cover all types of joints and welds, and the number of tests performed is limited. Consequently, chis code cannot include fatigue provisions as precise and universal as itis in the ease of carbon stecls. On the basis of available information, the Engineer may decide to apply fatigue rules for carbon steels. However, certain precautions specific to stainless steels should be taken. Mantensitic steels may develop a high hardness in their heat-affected zones (HAZs). This, in addition to the risk ‘of underbead cracking, may impair the fatigue strength of joints. ‘Austenitic steels have a thermal conductivity and coefficient of chermal expansion respectively equal to 60% and 150% of those values for carbon steels. This typically leads to residual stresses higher than in welded carbon steels, especially in cases of intense localized heating. ‘The latter may accur in plug or slot welds. in ring welds in small holes, and in eases of high interpass temperatures, As mentioned above, small thicknesses may fir- ther contribute to overheating of the base metal and to high residual stresses. As a final result, high residual stresses may decrease the fatigue strength of assemblies, References for Commentary Clause C-2 SEVASCES.02 “Specification for the Design of (Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members” 2. Euro Inox “Design Manual for Structural Stainless ‘Steel," 2nd Edition, 2002 265COMMENTARY 3. Proceedings of the seminar “Stainless Steel in Trans- port Industy.” Helsinki University of Technology, 1998 4, Proceedings ofthe Intemational Experts Seminar on Staintess Stel in Consiructon, international Stan- Jess Steel Forum, 2003 Note: Organizations listed below offer information ancl design aids in both electronic and paper formais: (1) Australian Stainless Stel Development Association (2) British Stainless Steel Association AWS D1.60D1 6442007 3) Centro Inox (Italy) (4) Euro Inox (5) International Molybdenum Associ (6) International Stainless Stee! Forum (Nickel Development Instinute (@) South African Stainless Steel Development ‘Association (9) Specialty Steel Association of North America (10) Stee! Construction Institute (UK) 266A Acnumber, Tables 4.1, 4.18, 46 “Acceplable linearity (UT), 615.11(18) ‘Acceptance criteia, 4.6.11.5,6.11, ‘Annex E bend esis, 46.5, 6.10.28 fillet weld break test 4.10.5.1 incomplete fusion, 4.11.5 smacroeich ts 3.18.141, 45.9, 4.1042 radiogmphs, 4103.3 tepai, 5.123, 5.136 stud welding. 78.3,7.8.4 tensile west, 4.67 UT peocedize, 6.26(2) ‘welder and welding operator qualification, 4.10 ‘workamanhip, 2.46 (WPS qualification, 4.6 visual, 4.6.1, 462, 4.10.1, 410.1. Acceplanceteecton ceria (UT), 15.24, 628, 6.39, Tale 64 ‘Access hoe, Fig. 5. ‘Aging temperature, 55 ‘Alignment, 2.7, 211.2, 53.5, Figs. 24, a7 eeues) Allowable sess, 2.3, Table 2.1 Alloy designation, Table 3.2 ‘Alloy Mus, Annex L, Tables 4.1, 6.18 ‘Alteroate head configuration std, 72.1 ‘Ambient temperature, 6:28.49, 628.4, 6.29.19, Annex HS American Conference of Governmental Industry Hygienists, Annex 16 ‘American Iron are Stes! Inatute (als, 1.2 ‘American National Standards Instiute (ANSI), Anoex 16 ‘American Society for Nondesructive “Testing (ASNT),62.7 Annecican Society of Testing and ‘Matedials (ASTM). 1.2 SEs ae Index American Welding Scciesy (AWS), 1.7, ‘Annexes 16, K2 Ammonium sulfate, Annex NL ‘Amperage, 3:13.29, 7.7.1.1, Table 3. Fig. 3.5 (Notes) Anchor studs, 7225 Angle ‘beam Search units, 6.15.8 wedge, 6.15.8 Angles of imercep, 622.603) refraction, 6.1583 Annealing, 5:16 ANSI Z49.1,17 ANSVASME B46.1, 6.10.13, API Standard 1108, Annex H1 “Applicaton gages, Annex H62 ‘Approval, 1.5, 5.4, 65.1 ‘Aqua Regia, Annex NI ‘Ate, 310.1,3.302,4.93, Annexes 121, 2, 18,56 eng 3.2946) shield (snd fer), 7.1,722, 7.43, 745,124,767, Amneses D3, D4, D9, DIO stabilizing ux stud), 22.3 shes, $.103 Architectural requirements, 5.117 ‘Argon, Table 35 (Notes 4,6 £) As-detiled tolerance, Figs. 34, 3.5 Aseftup tolerance, Figs. 3.4.3.5, ‘ASME, Table 2.1 (Note) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 329, 6105.1 Assistant Inspectors, 6.2.3, 62.4 ASTM A 276,726 ASTM A 36, Annex DS.1 ‘ASTM A 370,732 ASTM A 493,726 ‘ASTM £ 1032, 62.1 ASTM E142, 6.7.6, 69.1 ‘ASTME 165, A623 ASTM B 709, 677 267 AWS D1 6:D1.6442007 ASTME 747,691 ASTME 4, 69.1, 6.104 ‘As-welded condiion, 3.14.1, Annex 22 Aumospheriecoresion, 3.0 exposure, 3.0 -Avemuation coaol (UT), 6.15.11) ‘Aster sinless stel, 12,20, 3.0, 3.42, 3.29, 35, 613.1, 628, ‘Annexes 1, 17.2, Tobles 32,4. Authority having jurisdiction, 13.1 ‘Autogenous GTAW, 3.14 “Avilary componeet, 3.7 AWS AZ, 16,21.53 ‘AWS A3.0, 13, Annex L AWS A42, 342, 3.103, 8.122, 329 ‘AWS A523, 212.1, Table 33, AWS A530, 3.121, 3.12.2, Table 3.3 AWS ASA, 3,101, Table 33 AWS A5.9, 3.101321, 3,122 AWS B1.0,6.7 ‘AWS B2.1, 3.0, 32,43, 41.10, ‘Annex 14 AWS Board of Diectors, Annex KI AWS C544, 75.1 ‘AWS Centfied Welding Inspector (CW, 62.1 AWS DIL, Annex D5. AWS D16,4.13,4.1.10, 4.7.2, Annex #H AWS Fa.t, Anox 36 AWS QC, 6.2.1, 6.22 AWS staff member, Annexes K1, KS B Back reflections, 6.15.10 Backgouging, 323.11, 3200), Fig. 35, Backing, 2.14.32,3.23.11,328.1, 3.29(10) 417,54.1.1,56,592, Tables 3.5, 5.1, Fig. 415 Bare cables, Annex JE Bare elecuades, 3.11.1 ‘Bars, Table 3.2INoEX: Base, 75.53 Base meta, 12, 12.6, 12.9, 12.91, 20,23.1,23.300), 36,475. 7.63,7.75, Anoex I, Table 32 ‘umiliary component, 37 ‘backing, 3.8 ‘chemical compositions, Table F.2 ‘exept. 3.6.1 Group, Tables 32, 4.1, 415 sepals, 5.13,5.13.1, temperature, 75.4 testing, 6.13.3 change, 6.184 vollage. 615.3 Bead, 3.4.2,3.303,5.8.3,620.1, Annex cea Beam, 2.11.3, 213,617,644 Beam cope, 5.24 Bend radius, 663.1,Fig. 49 stresses, 22.2,23.25 test specimens. 463, 46.5.1, 41023, 4102.4, Tables 4.2, 43, Figs. 44,47, 4.8,416-421 testing device, Annex D7.2 Fig. D.1 Bovel angle, 6226 Bidders, 67.1. 68.683 Blemishes, .103,6.10.10, Boles, 5.3.6, 5.14 ‘Box section, 2.101,3282, Annex L Boxing. 2.4,23,2.442, 26, Annex TL Brazing. 1.6, Annexes 16, ‘Breathing zones, Annex J2 Brigh metal, 52.22, 5.12.2 Building Commissioner, 1.5, Annex L Builtop girders, 2.11:3.1 Builtup member. 2.6, 2.12, 2.14.1, 532 Bum peotection, Annex 14 Bursts, 72.5 Bun joints, 2.143.1,3.8.1,543,69.1, 1629.1.8, Annex H6.2.1, Figs. 2.4, 25 ‘romtubular connections, 210, 2.1. 2.102 prohibited, 2.143.1 ‘tubolar connections, 2.9,29.1,292 c (Cables, Annes JI CCalibroted gain, 615.116). 615.113, ‘Annex L (Callrsied gain cont (etesuator, 6154,6.159.2 CCaltzaion block, 6.15.93, 615.113, 6.17, 6.18.1, Fig. 610 methods, 6.18 Camber, $3.8, 539 ‘Canadian Standard Association (CSA), 621 ‘Canadian Welding Bureau (CWB), 621 (Carbon, 1.2, 52.15.12, 7.1, Tables 3.5 (Notes), 46 ‘Carbon dioxide, Table 3.5 (Nowe de) Cardiovascular Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR), Annex 1 ‘Castings, 12, Table 32 ‘Center of gravity, 2.2.4 Ceramic, 7.1 CCenitied Material Test Reports (CMTR), 733 ‘Chamfering, 29.1, 2.102, Figs. 2.4,2.5 Chemical analysis, 46.11.4,4.6.11.5 test, Fig. 422 (Chemical composition range, 3.7 Chipping, 52.1, $121 Chisel, 5.8 (Chromium, 1.2, 3.12.1, Table 46 (Clad masters, 1.21, Fig. 4.17 (Note 2) Clamps, 5:36 Class R indications, Annex E, Fig. £6 (Clas X indiations, Annex, Fig. .7 Glothing, Annexes 11,15. 16 Coaxial cable change, 6.18.4 Cobalt 60, 6.10.6 Coefficients of thermal expansion, 2.0 Cold cracking, Annex 3 Cold pressure welding, Annex J6 Cold rolled, 1.2 Combination of WPSs, 32 Combustible materials, Annexes J4, 35 Combustible substance, Annex 14 Common plane of contac. 2.4.43, Fig. 24 ‘Complete Joins Peneuation (CHP) groove weld, 2.1.53,23.21, 2.1432,2.16, 320, 324,329), $3,4324, 628.18, 629.18, ‘Annexes H63, L, Table 2.1, Figs. 34.35 ‘Compression, 7.7.5, Table 2,1, Annex Fig BS wave depth, Fig. 6.13 wave sensitivity, Fig. 6.14 ‘Computer enhancement radiation imaging, 627.2, 627.6 Concave rot surface, 4.6.2, 4.10.11 Connections, 2.0,2°7.1,2.9, 53. splices, 26,2.11 CComestors, Annex J1 Consequences of fllure, Annex Table 112 (Notes) Consumables, 3.12 AWS 01.8/01.6M:2007 Continuous weld, 2.14.1, 629.17 Comet documents, 1.2.92, 24.4.1,$.2, 578, 6:.1.1,63, 6.7, 61032, 62915 specification, 2.1.56,224, 23.2, 2322,233,271,522,531, 593,68.1,6156 Comuacor, 31,3103, 3.122, 312.3, 412,422,477, 41022,30, 61.11,683, 6.12.1,625, Annex L ‘obligation of, 6.6 Convex surface ‘qualification specimens, 4.6.5.1, 46.115, 410.24 ‘Converity, 4.10.4.2, 5.11.2 ‘Copper, 32916), Annex NZ Comer, 46.5.1 ‘Comer joins, 214.32, 3234,3.245 ‘Corrosion, 512.2, Annex Id resistance, 5.5,72.5, Annex 15 tests, 1292 Corrosive environments, Annex Table H2 Comosive service, Annex Hl ‘Coupling 6.22.1 Cover pass, $8.2, Annex L. (Cover plates,2.1132 Cover plated beam, 5.3.7 Crack, 329(11). 4.62, 4.6.5.1,4.10.1.1, 4102441043, 4.1042, 41052, 4115,52.11,5.105, 620.1,62023, 6.22.1, 6281.1, 628.21, 6291.1, 629.13,7.25 (Craters. 4.62, 6.28.13, 6.29.13 Creep tess, 12.92 Crevice carrsion, 5.2 (Curent, Tables 35,4.1,4.18 Cutting, 41023, 52.1,32:12,52.23, 53.8, Annexes 1616, Fig 74 equipment, 5.2.2 requirements, 52.2 Cyclic lad, 2.3.3, Fig. 3.5 Note b) (Cyclically loaded, 2.3.3, 6.5.7,6.23.1, 620,726, Annex H6.3, Table 64, ‘Annex Hl structures, 24.43, 2.7.1, Annex L, Figs. 2.1,26,2.15 Cylindrical discontinuity characteristics, 620.1, 6202.2, Decibel, 6.15.11. Amex L ‘ating, Amaex L seating, 6.15.11) Defect, 5.1.34,522.4,5232,5131,‘AWS D1.6/01.6M:2007 5.132,67,683, 610.10, Annex L Defective areas, 5.2.23, 5.124, 513.1 Defraud, 6.6.5 Deluminations, 6.133 Delta fete, 3.42, 3.29, Annexes IL, 1. Fig- 3.1 Depth of ling, 25.5 Detiled drawings, 6.25 Dew point, 3.12.3 Die stamping, 6.57 Diffusible hydrogen, Aanex 13 Dikedral angle, 2.1.5.3, Annexes B, L Disection of rolling. Fig. 44 Ditector of Technical Standards and Publications, Angex K2 Discontinuity, 46.5.1, 46.8,46.115, 41024.4103., 5.13.1, 52.11, 52.23, 665,676,617, 683, 6103, 6133,617,61831, 6192, 6201,621,62124, 6213, 621.4,6215,622.1, 6.225, 6282 1, 6292,62923, 7.25, 746, Annexes B, L, Figs EI-ES characterization and sizing, 6.13.1 height dimension, Fig. 621 length dimension, Fig. 622 Disregard level, 6232 Discimilr base metal welding, Annex, ” austenitic wo carbon, 17.2 duplex wo carbon, 175 {eric to carbon, 174 ‘mantersitc to carbon, 17.3. poswold heat weatment, 17.7 recitation hardening to carbon, 16 Distance amplitude correction, 6.18.1 amplirade curve (DAC), 6.18.2.2, 6.18.32, Annex L, Figs. 6.14, 615 calibration, 6.15.10 Distomion, 53.2, 55,582 contr! program, 5.33 Dizziness, Annex 12 Documentation retention requirements, 6.1605) Downsloping, Amex 121 Draft, 329(12) Drawings, 2.4.1, 214,2.15.1,2.156, 2423, 24.42, 323.2,3242, 53:1, 5412,543, 561,593, S411, 5.114, 5.117, 65.1, 62922, 71,762, Annexes DIO, C DS block, 6.15.10, 6.15.11(1), Annex Fig. O11 Ductile behavior 2.6 Ductty, 4.63, 4.102, Annex 1S Dupe stainless seis. 1.2, 5.5, 5.16, ‘Annexes I, 15, 17.5, Table 4S Dust, Annex JS Dye penetra inspection, 6.7.6 Bocentiniy, 222,2.24,543, Edge ‘blocks, 6.10.13, Fig. 6.7 fective ‘tee, 23.22, 24.2.1, 25.5, Table 2.1 thwoat, 24.22, 2.16,3.13, 3142, 5.41, Annexes A, B ‘troat and leg. 2.13 weld atea, 23.2.2 ‘weld length, 2.14,2.42.1, Annex L weld size, 2.16,3.17, 318, Table3.4, Fig 32 Electric shock, Annex JT Blectical, equipment, Annexes 31,35 hzards, Annex JL outlet change, 6.18.4 parts, Annex Jt Blectrode, 392, 310,3.11,3103, 3122, 482,483,491,7555, ‘Annex L, Teles 35,4. diameter, Tables 3.1.3.5 storage and drying conditions. 3.10.2 Etectrode-flux combinations, 3.9.2 Electronic imaging, 6.27.1 Elongated discontinuities, 6282.1, ‘Annex E, Figs. £1.23 (Notes) ‘Emmbritdement, Annex 14 Engineer, 124, 20, 23.3,2.53,254, 25.,27.4,30,34.2,35,37, 3103, 3.112,3.122,3.123, 3.8.11, 3.29011), 8.1.2, 4.75, S121, 513.1,52.12,5222, 5223,52.3.1,533,539, 55, 563,573,582, 593,512, 6122, 621,627.1,655,654, 613, 626.1, 74,727, 183, ‘Annex H2, Table 2.1, Figs. 5.1, 61-64 Engineering judgment, 3.0, 78.4 Equipment qualification, 6.15.9 Erection, $0,621 cans, Annex N Excavation, $2.22, 5.2.23, 52.24 Excessive noise, Annex 3 Exhaust, Annex Explosion, Annex 3 Eye protection, Annex} F Forumer, Tables 41,415,453 oe INDEX Fabrication, 23, 3.15,5.0, 532,53, 55,552, 5.16, 66.1,71.78, ‘Annexes H4, KS Tabricaton/erection inspection, 5.1, 6.11.1, 66.1 Face bend specimens, Table 42, Figs 44,4.15,4.17-4.19 Fabricator, 12.9,3.1,3.103, 3.122, 3.12.3, 5.0, 6.10.12, Annex II Fatigue, 23.2.6, Annex L contre, Annex Table H.t stress, 2.7.1, 211.1, 2183 Paying surface, 2.44.2, 255,5.41.1, ‘Annex L. Fenste, L28, 30, 342, 3.103, 341.2, 3.122 Fersitcsainless steel, 1.2, 2.0,5.5, 5.163,67.7,7.1, Anexesl1, 12.1, U4, Tables 45,45 Files, 5.2.1 Fill pass, Table 3.5 Filler meuls,3.0,39, 29.2,312320, ‘Annex 11, Tables 2.1, 3.3 lasification(9), 3.1 (ranula, Tables 4.1, 4.18, Group, Table 33 ‘manufacturer, Table 3.5 powdered, Tables 4.1, 4.18 suggested, 1.25 12.8, Antex F, Table FL Filer Plates, 26,27,273,274, 5412. Filet weld, 24.2,2.4.23,243, 24.5, 2.123, 314,329(10), 44,45, 4105, 5112, 5.11.4, amex B, Table 35, Figs 21-23,32,4.2, 430), 45,420,7.2 prequalified, 3.14 size, Table 358 Fillet weld-reak test, 64.3, Pum blackening, 6.10.11. ‘enification, Figs. 61-64 review, 612.1 Fins, $211,725 Fir, Annex 35 ‘prevention, Annexes 15,16 Fire resistant loves, Annex 14 material, Annex 36 Fissues, 7.46 Fit p tolerances, 3.23.2 Fitness-for-purpose, Annex Hi Fitings, Table 3.2 Fintute, 5.36, 7.3.2, Annex D?.1, Figs 73.15 : Flame, Annex 14 Flange, 2.113.{,2.1132,53.7, 629.19, 144, Annes H622INDEX Flare bevel groove weld sizes, 3.17, Table 34 Flared connections, 2.10.1 Flare groove welds 3.17, Table 3.4 Fla position, 3.15, 3.21, 3.29, 3.30, 3303,77.1.1, Annex DS.1, Table 35,Figs. 34,35 Flaw, 67, 614.1, 615.1108) Flow rate, 3.1, Table 3.1 Fluorescent Yereens, 6.104 Flux Cored Arc Weiding (FCAW), 3423,3.15,321, 3244, 325, 330, 7.55, Annexes LM, Tables 35,4.1,4.18,5:1, Figs. 34,35 Flux reclamatlon, 3.114 Flux vade designation, Toles 3.1, 4.1, as Flaxes,34.2,39,3.11.5.14 vunmelted, 3.1141 virgin, 3.1142, Fogging. 6.10.10 Foreign materials, 5.10.1 Forgings, Table 32 Fracture mechanics. Annex #1 Fracture specimen, Fig. 423, Full-illed bearing. 211.2, Funes, annenes M126 Fusioa, 30, 3296), 46.2. 46.5.1, 468,410.11, 4.104, 41042, 135,628.12.629.12, 1, 6292.2, 7.75, Annexes : 2 Fig. Bd Fusioo-type discontinuity, 4.102.4, ‘Annex L G Gages, 653, Annex 6.2 Gamma rays, 69.1 Gas Metal are Welding (GMAW), 341,312,323, 315,321, 3243, 3244, 3.25, 3.30, 7.55, ‘Annex L, Tables 3.33.5, 51, Figs 34,35 Gas Metal Are Welding-Shor Circuit ‘Are (GMAW-S),3:29(8), 48. 41022 Gas Shielded Fix Cored Are Welding (FCAW-0), 329, Table 3.5 Gow), Anzex L Gas shielding, 3.29012) Gas Tungsten Are Welding (GTAW), 341, 3.123.315, 321,3243, 3.24.4, 3.25, 3.29(8), 3.30, Annex L, Tables 35,51, Figs. 3.4.3.5 Gases, 3.9, Annexes 12,15, 6, Table 4.1 Geometric alignment 27.1 Geometric unsharpness,6.10.5.1 Girder, 2.11.3, 2.11.32, 629.17,7.44, Gogetes, Ansex 14 Gouges. 5:2.2.52.2.1 Gouging, 52.1,52.12,52.32, 5.121, 1613) (Grain growth, Annex 14 Grinding, 52.12,523.2,563,5. 5121, 5.134, 513.5, 6103, 61032,142.775 disks, 52.1, Fig. 25 Groove angle, Amex L, Fig. 3.5 Groove dep, 2.15.1 Groove preparation, 3.23.3, 323.4, 3.243, Figs. 34,35 Groove welds, 2.1.5.1, 21.53,2.11-1, 2122,2:123, 21432, 315,3.16, 3.20,3.23,324,326,3282,43.1, 45.1,562,5.115, 5116, 628.18, Table 4.1 Figs 3.4, 3.5, 36,4.1.43,44,4 10-412, 4.15 419,423 ‘Gress noneonformance, 6.6.5 Guided-bend test, 4.6.3, 4.64, 4.10.2, Table 43, Figs. 46-48 (Guo lift an plunge, 7.7.1.1 seuings, 75.1 Guy lines, 3.3.6 H H& D density 610.111.6121 Hammers, 58 Handling, 5.1.4.6.65, Annexes 34, K2, NB.ILNB2 racardous materials, 1.7 ey, Annex 33 Heat sink, Fig 3.5 (Notes) ‘Heat straightening, 5.5 Heut-Affected Zone (HAZ). 6.10, 613.1,7.7.45, Annex 121 Heetium, Table 3.5 (Notes de, g) “Hermtically seated contniners, 3.102 ‘igh dluion, Annes 15 ightap boots, Annex 14 shoes, Annex J4 Hole-type image quality indicators, 692, Teble 61, Figs. 6.1-65 Horizootl position, 3.15,3.21, 4.1.6, ‘Annex DS.1, Table 3.5, Figs. 34, 35,4143 Horizontal baseline seale (UT), 62122,62123,6214 Horizenal linearity (UT), 6.152, 6159.1,6.15.10 Horizestl mid-sereen (UT), 6.15.11 270 ‘AWS D1.6/01.644:2007 Horizontal sweep (UT). 6182.1, 6.18.31, Fig. 6.13 Hot cracks, Annoxes 121,15, rolled, 12 work surfaces, Annetes $4,315 Hydrochloric acid, Annex NI 1 NW reference block, 6.15:10(D), Fig. on Muminator (viewer), 6.12.1 Image conversion seten, 6.27.2 enhancement, 627.6 uality indicator (10H), 6.92, 6.10.1, 627.5, Annex L, Table6.1, Figs 61-66 Inaccessibiity. 5.15 Imadequate joint penetration, 4.6.2, 4.10.11, 620.1 Ircomplete fusion. 4.11.5.620,1,622,1 Increased uni stresses, 23.2.6 Index point, 6.1583, 615.84 Indication, 46.115. 683.6.10.10, 6.15.10, 6.15.11, 615.110), 6.18.1, 618.1.1,6182, 61822, 6.1832, 6202 1,620.22, 620.23,6212.1,621.22, 62123, 6213.2, Annexes H621L level, 6.15.11(5), Annex L Iorared, Annex 16 Injusious laps. 7.2.8 material, 74.2 Inline discontinuities, 28.2.2 Inquirer, Annexes K2, K2.t, K24, K3, Ke Ingen, 3.12.1, 3122 Inspection pevsonnel, 62 sequence, Annex HS Insulated gloves, Annex 14 Insulation, Annex 13 Ierference, 5.11, 5.11.4, 6.11.2 Intergranular comesion, 5.2 Imermetllic compounds, Annex IS Imerminent filet welds, 2.323,2.14.3.4,629.1.3 groove, 21433, Inuemal stabilization, 6.15.3 Ierpass temperate, 5.12.1,58.4, ‘Aanex 13 Iovespretaion problems, 6.22 Irnerscting parts, 22.1 lonizing, 6.27.1, Annex 6 QH location, 6.27.1, Figs 6.1.62AWS 01.8701.6012007 {Ql selection and placement, 610.7, ‘Table 6.3 leidium, 6.106 ‘on, 1.2, 5.72, 510 Iron-ftee abrasive wheel, $2.1 [Isothermal gancformation diagrams, ‘Annexes 1,135) J Jovgereyetest, 62.4 Jig, 4631, 536,774, igs 46,47 Sint configuration, 320, 6.16(1), Fig. 3.5 designation Figs, 3.4, 3.5 ets, 3.13,3.2, 476, Annexes Mi, Ma Figs. 34,35,36 root opening, 324.30 L ‘Lamellar tearing 6.133 Lamination, 5.21.1, 6.1608), 6.18.21 Lap joi, 2.6,2.8, 5.4.1.1, Figs.22, 23 Laser welding, Annex 16 Lara deflection. 2.8.3 Layer. 330,3.302,582, 628.12, ‘Annex Ly Tables 3.5, 4.15 Lead, 52, 6.104, 6.1083,7.21.1, ‘Annex 31 Lead figures, 6.10.12 Leather leggings, Annex 34 Leg (veld). 2.15.3,224,3.14.1, 469,513, 5.11.4, Annexes B, Table B2 Lepio's Etch, Annexes NU.N2 Limitation of essential variabtes, 3.1, 32,48,49,4.11., Tables 4.1, 448 Lineer indications, Amex H63 Linearsype discontinuities, 124 Liquid, 6294, Annex 15 penewanl testing, 628.4,629.4 Listed material, 37 Longitudinal bend test, 4.5.1, 46.4 Longivdinal waves (UT), 6.15.10, welds (UT).243 Low carbon nickel, Annex N2 Low hydrogen filer metas, Annex 13 M Machining, $.2.1,52.2.1,523.2, 512.1, 5.135, 725, Fig, 2.5 Macroech, 3.18.11,425,43.2.1-4, 441.1, 468.1, 41041, Table 42, Figs. 45,423 Magnetic panicle inspection, 62.7 Mandatory provisions 1.9 Manganese, Teble 4.6 Monufacerer 3.1,3.1142.472,42.7, 6:15(9,6272,7.,75.1,Anneses D2,15,L. MI certification, 3.103, 3.12.2, fncetions, 3.10.2 Maneasiicssalest sel, 12.20, 53.5516, 62.7, Annexes I, 3, 173, Tables 45,46, Fig. 51 (Note 8) Maximum lectode diameter, Table 3.5 fic weld sing 3.04.1 hole diameter, 2.53.3.19 ‘eters temperature, 3.2914) root opening variation, 2244 single pss layer width, Table 3.5 Wow’) slon width, 2.54, 3.1.9 Mechanica properties 311.2, 312.2 a4 requirements, 73.1,732, Table 7.1 stalaless tel sade, 71 Mechanical straightening 5.5 Mette fax (crushed slag), 3.1142 ‘Metal cored elecwode, Tables 4.14.18 Meu decking, 74.2 Mesa fame fever, Annex 12 Meare (0 equivaents, 1.8 Mill induced dsconinsties, 52.3, 523163 Mil estepor, Annex M4 Misioum clearnce, 62822, 6292.2 hole diameter, 25.3, 3.18 ‘reheat, 3.2903) sequtd sesiivty, 6273 slot with 2.5.4 Misalignment, 5434 Mistocated holes, 5.14 “Mock-up welds. 616 Moisture, 329(1), 51.21, 741,742, 7851 Molten metal, Annex 34 ‘Molybdonum, Tables.6 Mul, Annex 33 Mulpe elecrodes, 49.2 Mulple pass welds $1157 N [Nasional Fleticl Code (NEC), Annex 16 "Navona! Fie Prowcion Association (NFPA), Annex 16 Nausea, Annex 12 Nike, Annexes 18, N2, Table 4.6 Nicke!-chromiumvito, Annex N2 Nivie acid, Annexes Ni. N2 Nitrogen. Amex 15 123 comma nox. Node, Annex L Nemogram, Figs. 46-49 ‘Nomopraph,6.15.11(11), 6.15.11.2, “Annex Form 0-3 ‘Noncontinuous beams, 2.13 [Nonéesuructive Testing (NDT), 4.1.1, $63,5.103,624,62.7,6.56, 655,62, 6.26.1, Annex H6, Table H2 [Nonionizing, Annex 36 ‘Nonprequalified, Annex 1 [Nonprequalified stainless ste, 3.3, “Annex It [Nontubalar connections, 320,322, Fig 24 Notches, $2.2,52.21-52.23,52.4 ° Objectionable fumes, 7.42 Occupations Sfety and Fealth ‘Administ (OSHA), Annex 16 (Oficial interpretations, Annexes Ki Ka Ofte, 271,543 1, 74.1, Annex 35, Fig. 74 ‘Opposite sides, common plane, 2.4.43, Fig. 21 Organi: contaminants, §2.1.1 Ovienuation, 67, 621.1.6213.6226, Fig. 35 Ou-of-pasiton, 755.5 Over-exposure. Ansex 12 Ovethead postion, 3.15,321,3.303, 416,771, 7741, Tole 33, Figs, 34,35 ‘Overlap, 3.2966) 4105.1, 582 Overy, 46.11, 411, 4115, 615.1, ‘Table 4.15. Fig 421 ‘Overratch, 20 Over. 6.112, 612.2, 665,692, 6.122,6.123,786, Annex L Oxyfuel ge, $121 ‘Oxygen, Table 3.5 (Notes 4.) P Packages, 3.93, 3.113 Pain, 74.2 Panoramic exposures, 6.10.52 Pant cuffs, Annex J5 Pant legs, Annex 15 Partai Joint Penetration (PIP) groove Weld, 21.5.1,232.1,2.16.3.15, 316,321, 3.23, 417,418,432, 4324, Table2.1, Fig. 36 Partial sampling. Annex HS Panta testing. 6.8.2 Peening. 58, 583,584 Peneiram examination, 4.13.4,iwoex 46115, 4114,4.155 Penetrant testing, Aasex #63 Performance quaifistion 30, 4.1.3, 479,492,476,478.4101, 4114.64, Tables 43,44, Fis, 434,4.5.421,423 Patiod of effeciveness, 479 Periphery, 3:30,72.5 Persona injury, Annex 3 Persona proutive devices, Annex 3 Phosphor, Annex 12.1 Paysician, Annex 1 Pipe 3.281, 44.7-419, 4.31 441.1, 36,4791, 4102.1,4108, 17.14,7.7 64, Annex L, Tables 32,42, 46,85, Figs 43-45, 412,436). 4.14 Piping porsity, 628.1, 626.18, 629.16,620..8, Amexes 162. Piting coroson, 5:2 Planar defects, 67 Planar type disontimies, 620.1 62023,6223, characterises, Fig. 6.20 Plasma Are Welding (PAW), Table 5.1 Plte,211, 32,3302, 417.419, 4341,441.1,476,479.1,691, IAS, Anoex DS.{, Tables 32, 42,Figs 43.44.45 Plug, Annex J3 Plug and slo welds, 2.6, dep of iling. 256 Plug welds. 251,252, 211.330, 3304 Plunges, Figs. 4.64.16, 417 Point of tangency, $2.4 Pola, 6.5.2, Tables 4.1, 4.18 Porosity 3 29,3296), 411.5620, 629.16,6.202.1, Annex H6.2.1, Fig. B4 fuser, 622.1 piping, 622.1 seared, 622. Posiion 494, Table 4.4, Figs. 34,35, perl Poscweld Heat Treatment (PWHT), 214,516 5161-5164, ‘Annexes 16,17, Tables 4.1, aus Power ouage (ite), 6.18.4 Preapproved welding processes, 341 Precipitation hardening, 12 Proat, 5.84, Annexes 1218, Tble at vemperames 512 Prequalifistion, 30,323.11,327, ‘Annex I Prequalified, Annex M2 ‘ler meals, Table 33 Join, 3.0.3.13,3.28, Annex M1, Fi processes, 33 stainless steels, Table 32. WPS requirements, 3:29, Table 3.5 WPSs,31,32,34.1, 26.1.3. 391,3281-3283, 51.1, 5.123 varsbles, Table 3.5 Pressure piping. 1.1 Pressure vessels, LL Prick-punching, 742 Primary member, 2.102, 629.1.5 tension members, 2.14.35 Procedure Qualification Recowd (PQR), 414,415,64, Annexes 11, M3, Table 4.2, Figs. 44, Forms M1, M2 Procurement testing, 6.13.3 Prohibited types of joints and welds, 2143, Propealy docamented evidence, 47.3, Propeny damage, Annex J Protective clohing, Annex 14 ‘Protective garb, Annex N33. Pulse echo type. 6.15.1 Pulsed GMAW, Table 3.5 (Noted) Pulsed GTAW. Table 3.5 (Note 6) Purchasing requtements, 3.11.1, 312.1 Qa Qualification, 3.2, 3.01. 3.18.1.1.3.25. 413,41-7,418,473,475, 419, 47.10,4.102.1, 41033, 6.123,642,6.131,6.1592, 6.15.10, 71,724, 78,76.1-, 7.67, Annexes D2-D4, M Quality ‘assurance, 6.1.1 cont), 61.1, 733,734 R Radial cracks, 7.2.5, Rediaal eneegy, Annex 16 Radiation. 6.105, 6.108, 6.10.1, 6108.3, 6.27.1,6.27.2, 6273, 6.27.7, Annexes 12,16, L imaging system, 6.7.4,6.27 Radiograph idenification mark, 6.10.12 Radiographic Si, 6.104 images, Annex Figs. 2.2, B4 procedures, 6.10 testing, 4.10.22, 4103.1, 6 69.1,692,6.103,6.122, mm. ‘AWS 01.801.6%:2007 Radiography, 4.103, 4.103.1,6.10.2, 6103.2, 627.1, Annex Figs. 2.1, 3 Reactive, Annex J5 Realtime imaging, 627 Re-austnitizing. Annex 13 Recallration, 6.184 Records, 4.13, 4.73, 477,65,6.132, 6273 Reduced-section tension test, 4.5.1, 466, Figs. 4.10,4.13(4, 8) Reeotrant comers, $2.4,52.42 Reference level, 6.15.30, 615.113, Annex L reflector, 6.15(6), Anmiex L stands, 6.17 Reflectors, Fig. 6.11 Reinforcement. 3.21, 462,4.10.1.1, Fig. 4.10 (Noes) ‘Rejectable discontinuities, Annexes H3, L Repair $.13.1,521,5221.5224, 5.13,5.132,65.1,684, 6.14.2, 6217 Replacement stud, 7.75 Residual elements, Annex 12.1, ssreses, 582 Resistance, 30, Annexes 11,16, Responsbiies contacter, 1.4.2 engineer, 14.1 Inspector, 4.3 Renaners (nonmetallic, Tables 4.1, 4s Rest, 46.10, 4.78, 4.78.1, 47.8.2, 62.7.1, Annex DB shapes, 22.1,2.12.2.1-1, 3412. Root bend sposimens, 46.3, Table 4.2, Figs. 4,415, 417-821 Rol Roct openings, 3.24.8, $4.2, 5.44, 5.45, annex B,Figs.3.4,3.5 Root pas, Trble 35 Rounded discontinuity, 6.28.21, 6282.2 ‘Rounded indications 4.6.11.5,6.282.2, Ag Rust, 14.1,742, 755.1 s Safety, 5.12.2, 6.102, Annetes 16, N3 sand health, 17 department, Annex N3.3.6 precautions, 7 ‘Semple wetding forms, Annex M ‘Saw blades, 3.2.1 Scale, 211.3, 74.1,742,755.4AWS 01.8/01.6412007 Scanning (U7) methods, 6221, Fig. 6.17 pater, 6.19, 622.1. Fig. 6.16 sensitivity. 6.18.1. speed, 6272 Scheduled changes, 66.6 Screen marking, Fig. 6:23 Seacoast environments, 3.0 Seal welding, 20 Seal welds, Annex Table H.2 Self Shielded Fux Cored Are Welding (FCAW-S), Table 3.5 (Note €) Seams. 7.2.5 Search unit (UT), 6.157, 6.158.2, 61583,61584, 61593, 6.15.10, 6.15.11), 615113,, 61822,62022, 62023, 62121, 62122,62123, 62131, 62132, 6221, 6224, ‘Annex L Fig 6.10 Sensitivity (UT) ‘altration,618.1,618.22.6.18.3, Fig 615 requirements, 6.16(10) ‘Service temperanae, Table 21, Annex #2 Service emperatre limits, 12.7 Shapes, 1.2, Annex D10, Table 32, Fig. 3 Shear, Table 2.1 connectors, 7.25, 7.44, MU | sess, 23.22 wave (UT), 615.10, Annex L Fig. 615 Sheet, Table 3.2. Fig 4.10 (Note 1) Shelter, 3.29 Shielded Metal Are Welding (GMAW), 341,315, 321.323, 325, 3.20, 755, 7555, Tebles3S.4.1, 5.1, Figs. 34,35 Shielding gas, 3-1, 3.12.3, Tables 3.3, 35,41,418, ‘Shielding medium. 48:3.4.9.1 ‘Shims, 6103.3 ‘Shop splices, 2.11.3.1,53.7 ‘Shon circuiting transfer (GMAW-S), ‘Annex Fig. B.L, Tables 3.4,3.5,3.6 (tes, 41,48. Shrinkage resuain, $3.5 Side bend specimens, Tables 4.2.4.3, Figs. 44,415, 4,16,421 Silicon, Tables 3.2 (Note a), 46 Single electrode, 49.2. Table 3.5 Single electrode machine welding. 4.9.3 Skecwed joints, 3.18, Annex B Skewed Tints, 21.$3,2322, 2.16, 2422, anaes B, Fig. Bl, Table Br 83, Fig. ‘Skip weing, Annes 121.4 ‘Slag, 3.302, 3.303.465, 41024, 4115, 58,6201, 7551 ‘Sollen English, 624 SNT-TC-IA, 627, 6.16 Soldering, Annex J6 ‘Solid parle. Annex 12 Solvent, Ansex N32 Sound (UT) ample, 6 15.1165) ph distance, 615.2, Annex L Sundaes 4.1:1,463, 4.102 Souceo-flm dance, 69.2, Annex L Sparks, Annex 4 ‘Spat, 58,5102, Ampex L Sphedcl discontinuity, 620., 62021, Fig. 6.18 characteisis, Fig. 6.18 Spice,26,2.111, 2113 testing, 683 ‘Spray ransfer (GMAW), 329,48.1, “Annex 12.1, Table 4.1 Stainless stel, 20,30, 34.2,3.28, $0, ‘Annex D3, Tables 3.2.45 suis, 7.1, Annex ‘Standard ‘ference reflec, Fig. 69 reflector, 6.17, 6.18, 6.18.1,6.183.1, 61832 sensitvty, 6.18.1, 6.18.1.1 tnits of measurement, 1.8 ‘Standardized WPSs, 3.0 ‘Statcally loaded, 2.6,6.23.1,6.28, ‘Annex H63, Table 6.4, Annex ‘Table HL Fig. EL ‘Stifencrs, 2.6, 6:29.16 ‘Straight beam (longitudinal wave), 6157 Suess, 1.1,2322,2323,23.3,272, 273,282,211.1,2 121,213, 2.14.2, 5.16.3, 629.22, Table 2.1 corrnsionerecking, $2, 5.163 intensification effects,233 Sup, Table 32 ‘Structural welding commince, Annexes 13M Sins, 536 Sud applicator, 762 base, 7.1,724,74.4,75.53, "Annexes D1, D3, D7.1,D72, D8. D9 bond fixe, Fig. 7.5, Annex Figs. Di,D2 diameter, 7.7.1 0d, 75.52 23 INDEX Fille welds, Table 7.2 7553 pun, 77.14 manufacturer. 7.2.4,7.33,76.2, ‘Annexes DI, D4, D5.2 ‘mechanical propetis, Table 7.1 position, Fig. 7.3 tensile test, Figs. 72,74 (orque values, Tables 73,74 welding, 71, 75.1,783 ‘welding equipment, 7.2.1,7.5.1 ‘welding operator, 7.7.4 Subassembly spices, $3.7 Subcontse, 4.12, 4.7.2 Submerged Are Welding (SAW), 2.14, 3.0.32, 342,31,3113,3.114, 3.1142,315,321, Tables 33, 35, 5.1, Figh 34,35 Sulfur, Annex 12.1 Supplemenial heating, Annex (3 ‘Surface conditions, $2.1, 5.3.1, 618.4 reparation, 52.1, 6.6.5, 6.16 Symmetry, 223 T Tack, 4.7.12 welding. 4.7.12 welds, $36, 5.7.572,57.3 ‘Tears, $21.1, 6.1010 ‘Technical inquiries, Annex K_ ‘Temperature, Tables 4.1, 4.18 ‘Temporary welds, 5.7.5 Tensile strength,232.2,3.7,4.66.1,467.1, ‘Annexes D?.1, DB, Tables 21, 32,33 055,22. 29:1,628.18.629.15, 6.29.18, 6,292.1, Annexes 62.1, A63, Table 2.1 test 46.7, Annex D7.2, Fig. 7.2 ‘Tension, Table 21 ‘Tension or compression members, 2M4 ‘Tension specimens, Figs 4.10-4,13(A), Table 42 tested, 7663 ‘Terns and definitions, Annex L Test insmument, 6.152, 6.153, 6154, 6159.1, Annex L spocimens,23.3,41.2.43.1, 4323,4324,461.464, 472,47.10, 4.1023,7662, ‘Annexes D5.1, D6, D62, D7.2, Table 42 ‘Testing extent of, 68 12,npex: ‘Testing Laboratory Data Repoas, 472, ‘Annex M3 ‘Thermal cing, 5.2.1.2. 52.4.2, Fig, 25 ‘Thickness, Tables 4.1, 415,42, 43, Figs. 46,416.19 ‘Thickness Kimiation, 32948), 46.11. 4113, Table 47 ‘Threaded stds, 7.7.1.4, 7.84, Annex DS. Toins,2.53,2322,2422 Ties, Table 4.2 Tolerances, 323.2, 3242, 52.12, 539,542, $111,532, 617, Annexes D1O, M3, Figs. 34, 3.5, 65.74 Torch welding, Annex 16 “Torque ws erangemest, 7.6.62, Fig. 74 Toughness, Annexes B1, BS esi, 12.92 Trade designation, 3.1, Table 3.1 ‘Transducer chang, 6.18.4 Transducer cost, 6.158, Fig. 68 ‘Transducers, 6.15.1, 6.15.7 s2e, 6.13.2, 6156 ‘Transfer correction, 6.16(12), 6.18.1, 6.183, Pig 6.12 ‘Transitions of ‘butt joints nontubetar connections, 29 thicknesses o wid, ‘Transverse, 4.5.1 spacing, 24.3 ‘Travel speed, 3.1, Table 3. ‘Tass, 2.15.11 ‘Tubes, Table 3.2 Tubing, 4.1.9, 43.1476, 4.1021, ‘Annex L, Fig. 4.3(B) ‘Tabular, 1.2, Annex L ‘connections, 2.10, 3.16, 3.21, 322, 3.27,3.28.3, Annex L,Figs.22, 25 Jim detatis, 327 ‘Tungsten electrode, Table 3.5 (Note ) Towelds, 622.6 Twists, 7.25 U US, customary unis, 1.8, Annex B Utasoni (UT) ‘equipment, 6.15, 6.1603) ‘examination pon, Fig 6.24 ‘nsiomeataton and calibration, 6.3.1 ‘opernioe requirements, 6.14, 6.14.1, 6.182, 615, procedure 6.131, 6.16 scanning pavers, Fig. 6.16 lechniian, 6.13.1, 6.15.6,622.1, 6224 testing, 67.5, 6.13, 6.14.1, 6283, (629.3, Annes L, Annex Form Ont UUrasonie Unit Centifieation, Annex Form O-L ‘Ultraviolet, Annex 16 Undercut, 329%6),329(8), 4.6.2, 469.1, 4101.1, 4.10.51, 5.111, 5.135, 6.108, 628.15,629.15, ‘Annex H6.2.3, Table H3 UUndermach, Annex 12.2 (Cnderran, 629.17, H6.2.2 ‘Unified numbering system, 1.2 Unlisted steel, 12.9.2 UNS numbers, Table 3:2 v ‘Vapors, Aanex JS Veniilation, Annexes C2, C5 Verification, 6.1.12, 61.2.2, 620,63, 64, 65,656, 6566.122, 6.16(14), 78,782 Vertical linearity (UT), 6.15.11(18) Vertical postion, 321, 3.29(8), 3.1.6, 486, 7711,7741, Table 35, Figs. 34,35 down, 3.2968) progression, Tables 41, 4.18 Vibrating tools, 58 Video reconding, photographic stil lm, 6272 Visible ight, Annex J6 Visioncess, 624 Visual sides, Annex H6.2 examination, 46.1,462, 4.101, 4.10.11, 4.10.42, 4.10.51, ANS.SIS, TINA TINS, 7744 Inspection, 454, 4.52,5.135,63, 862,665, 628.1, 628.19, 6.28.21, 6283, 6.284, 6.29,3.1, 6294, 75.56, A6.1 ‘Voltage, 3.1, Table 3.1 Ww WI78.2,62.1,622 Webs, 2.113.1,53.8 ‘Web-iovange welds, 6.28.17, 629.17, Fig. 5 Wedges, 53.6 ‘Weld bead widih/depeh imitations, Fig, 30 Weld lasitication, Annex Teble H.1 m8 AWS D1.8/01.6442007 cleaning, 5.10 discontinuity characterization, 620 Aiscontinuity sizing, 6:21, integrity, 67 seta removal and rept, 5.12 profiles, 46.9.1, 5.11, 5.112, 5.113, 5.115, 628.14,629.14, Fig. 52 Slee, Figs. 34,3.5,45 spacing, 25.1,252, 2121 tabs, 38, 5.2.4.1. 59, 6.103. termination, 244,59 Weléers, 4..4,4.7.1,47.12,493,4.10, 411,333 performance qualification, 48, Table 43 qualifications, 2.16 Welding ‘socess hole, $24 Fig. $.1 cconsuruabes, Annex J2 forms, Annex procedure specification (WPS), 2.16, 3.0,322124) 4344.1, 5.11, 64,761, Tables 3.5,4.1, 48, 47 process, 21.5.1,34, 35,315,321, 3.224,329(6). 4.11.46... Annexes C2, E sequence, 53.2, 53.7, Annex 12.1 symbols, 16,2.153 terms, 13, Aagex L ‘Weiding Journal, Ateses K3, KA ‘Wind, 329012) ‘velocity, 329,512 ‘Wire classification, 342, Table 3.3 (Nowe) Wire fed speed, Table 3. Wire image quality indicators, 6.10.1, ‘Table 62, Figs. 61-66 Worlananship, 62.1, 662, 663,7.2, 24 Workpiece, Annex J1 x X-rays, 6.91 Y ‘Yield suength Tables 21, 3.1 ‘Yoke type equipment, 67.7 Zine, $2 Zeloes values, 2.16‘AWS 01.9101.601:2007 List of AWS Documents on Structural Welding Designation Title DLVDIIM Structural Welding Code—Steel DIZDI2M —_ Structural Welding Code—Aluminum DI3DIIM —_ Structural Welding Code—Sheet Seel DLADIAM ——_Strucuiral Welding Code—Reinforcing Steet DISDISM Bridge Welding Code DILGDLOM Structural Welding Cade—Stainless Steel DISDI8M Structural Welding Code—Seismic Supplement Structural Welding Code—Tianium 25AWS 01.6101 6.2007 ‘This page is intentionally blank. 276 SE eee unas

Aws D1.6 - 2007 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aws D1.6 - 2007 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like